Fiat 2022 Doblo Owner Manual

F I A T D O B L Ó

O W N E R H A N D B O O K

Dear Customer,

We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing a Fiat Doblò.

We have written this handbook to help you get to know all the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way.

Here you will find information, advice and important warnings regarding vehicle use and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your Fiat Doblò.

You are advised to read it right through before taking to the road for the first time, to become familiar with the controls and above all with those concerning brakes, steering and transmission; at the same time, you can understand the vehicle behaviour on different road surfaces.

This document also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care and servicing of your Fiat Doblò over time.

After reading it, you are advised to keep the handbook inside the vehicle, for an easy reference and for making sure it remains on board the vehicle should it be sold.

In the attached Warranty Booklet you will also find a description of the Services that Fiat offers to its customers, the Warranty

Certificate, the detail of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity and the range of additional services available to Fiat

Customers.

We are confident that these tools will bring you closer to your new vehicle and make you appreciate the assistance provided by the

Fiat team.

Enjoy reading. Happy motoring!

Attention

This Owner Handbook describes all Fiat Doblò versions. As a consequence, you should only consider the information related to the trim level, engine and version that you have purchased. All data contained in this publication are purely indicative. FCA Italy S.p.A.

can modify the specifications of the vehicle model described in this publication at any time, for technical or marketing purposes. For further information, contact a Fiat Dealership.

1

Read this carefully!

Refuelling

Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with an octane rating (RON) of no less than 95 conforming to the European specification EN228.

Diesel engines: only use diesel fuel for motor vehicles conforming to the European specification EN590. The use of other products or mixtures may damage the engine beyond repair and consequently invalidate the warranty, due to the damage caused. For further details on the use of the correct fuel 3 213.

Starting the engine

Vehicles with ignition switch: Turn key to position 1 to release the steering wheel lock. Manual transmission: operate clutch and brake pedal. Automatic transmission: operate brake pedal and move selector lever to P or N. Do not operate accelerator pedal.

Diesel engines: wait until control indicator preheating warning light extinguishes. Turn key briefly to position 2 and release after engine has been started.

Vehicles with power button: Manual transmission: operate clutch and brake pedal. Automatic transmission: operate brake pedal and move selector lever to P or N. Do not operate accelerator pedal. Press Start/Stop button. Release button after starting procedure begins. Diesel engine starts after control indicator preheating warning light for preheating extinguishes. Before restarting or to switch off the engine when vehicle is stationary, press Start/Stop once more briefly.

Parking on flammable material

The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard.

Respecting the environment

The vehicle is fitted with a system that allows continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment.

Electrical accessories

If, after buying the vehicle, you decide to add electrical accessories (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), visit a Fiat

Dealership. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the electrical system of the vehicle can support the required load.

Scheduled servicing

Correct maintenance enables the vehicle to perfectly maintain performance and safety characteristics, its environmental friendliness and low running costs over time.

The Owner Handbook contains ...

... important information, advice and warnings for correct use, driving safety and maintenance of your vehicle over time.

2

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION ........................... 4

KEYS, DOORS AND

WINDOWS ..................................... 6

KEYS, LOCKS ................................... 6

DOORS ............................................ 13

VEHICLE SECURITY ........................ 17

EXTERIOR MIRRORS ....................... 19

INTERIOR MIRRORS ....................... 20

WINDOWS ....................................... 22

ROOF .............................................. 25

SEATS, RESTRAINTS ................ 26

HEAD RESTRAINTS ......................... 26

FRONT SEATS ................................. 27

REAR SEATS ................................... 31

SEAT BELTS .................................... 34

AIRBAG SYSTEM ............................ 36

CHILD RESTRAINTS ........................ 41

STORAGE ................................... 46

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS .......... 46

LOAD COMPARTMENT ................... 49

ROOF RACK SYSTEM ..................... 57

LOADING INFORMATION ................ 58

INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS ................................. 60

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW ... 61

CONTROLS ..................................... 65

WARNING LIGHTS, GAUGES AND

INDICATORS ................................... 70

DISPLAYS ........................................ 81

VEHICLE MESSAGES ...................... 88

VEHICLE PERSONALISATION ......... 89

TELEMATICS SERVICES ................. 90

LIGHTING .................................... 91

EXTERIOR LIGHTING ....................... 91

INTERIOR LIGHTING ....................... 95

LIGHTING FEATURES ...................... 96

INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM .......... 98

MULTIMEDIA NAVI PRO .................. 99

MULTIMEDIA ................................. 117

TOUCHSCREEN RADIO ................ 128

RADIO ........................................... 136

CLIMATE CONTROL ................ 146

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEMS ..... 146

AIR VENTS ..................................... 155

MAINTENANCE ............................. 156

DRIVING AND OPERATING ..... 157

DRIVING HINTS ............................. 158

STARTING AND OPERATING ........ 158

ENGINE EXHAUST ......................... 163

ELECTRIC DRIVE UNIT .................. 167

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ....... 168

MANUAL TRANSMISSION ............. 171

DRIVE SYSTEMS ........................... 172

BRAKES ........................................ 172

RIDE CONTROL SYSTEMS ........... 175

DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS . . 178

CHARGING .................................... 206

FUEL .............................................. 213

TRAILER HITCH ............................. 215

VEHICLE CARE ........................ 219

GENERAL INFORMATION ............. 219

VEHICLE CHECKS ......................... 222

BULB REPLACEMENT ................... 228

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ................... 234

VEHICLE TOOLS ........................... 234

WHEELS AND TYRES .................... 235

JUMP STARTING ........................... 244

TOWING ........................................ 246

APPEARANCE CARE ..................... 247

SERVICE AND

MAINTENANCE ........................ 251

GENERAL INFORMATION ............. 251

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ....... 252

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS,

LUBRICANTS AND PARTS ............ 266

TECHNICAL DATA ................... 267

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION ............. 267

VEHICLE DATA .............................. 269

CUSTOMER INFORMATION ... 275

CUSTOMER INFORMATION .......... 275

VEHICLE DATA RECORDING AND

PRIVACY ....................................... 278

INDEX ........................................ 282

3

INTRODUCTION

Introduction

Your vehicle is a designed combination of advanced technology, safety, environmental friendliness and economy.

Make sure your passengers are aware of the possible risk of accident and injury which may result from improper use of the vehicle.

You must always comply with the specific laws and regulations of the country that you are in. These laws may differ from the information in this Owner's

Manual.

Disregarding the description given in this manual may affect your warranty.

When this Owner's Manual refers to a workshop visit, we recommend your Fiat

Dealership.

Using this manual

● This manual describes all options and features available for this model.

Certain descriptions, including those for display and menu functions, may not apply to your vehicle due to model variant, country specifications, special equipment or accessories.

● This Owner's Manual depicts lefthand drive vehicles. Operation is similar for right-hand drive vehicles.

4

● Directional data, e.g. left or right, or front or back, always relate to the direction of travel.

● Displays may not support your specific language.

● Display messages and interior labelling are written in bold letters.

Danger, Warnings and Cautions

9 DANGER

Text marked 9 Danger provides information on risk of fatal injury.

Disregarding this information may endanger life.

9 WARNING

Text marked 9 Warning provides information on risk of accident or injury.

Disregarding this information may lead to injury.

CAUTION

Text marked Caution provides information on possible damage to the vehicle.

Disregarding this information may lead to vehicle damage.

Symbols

Page references are indicated with 3 . 3 means "see page".

Page references and index entries refer to the indented headings given in the section table of content.

We wish you many hours of pleasurable driving.

Your Fiat Team

KEYS, DOORS AND

WINDOWS

Keys, locks ........................................ 6

Keys ................................................ 6

Radio remote control ....................... 7

Electronic key system ...................... 8

Central locking system ..................... 9

Automatic locking .......................... 12

Child locks ..................................... 12

Doors ............................................... 13

Sliding door ................................... 13

Rear doors ..................................... 14

Load compartment ........................ 15

Vehicle security ................................ 17

Anti-theft locking system ................ 17

Anti-theft alarm system .................. 17

Immobiliser .................................... 19

Exterior mirrors ................................. 19

Convex shape ................................ 19

Electric adjustment ........................ 19

Folding mirrors ............................... 19

Heated mirrors ............................... 20

Interior mirrors .................................. 20

Manual anti-dazzle ......................... 20

Automatic anti-dazzle .................... 20

Child surveillance mirror ................. 21

Rear view display ........................... 21

Windows .......................................... 22

Windscreen ................................... 22

Power windows ............................. 22

Rear windows ................................ 23

6

Heated rear window ....................... 23

Heated windscreen ........................ 24

Sun visors ...................................... 24

Roller blinds ................................... 24

Roof ................................................. 25

Glass panel .................................... 25

KEYS, LOCKS

Keys

CAUTION

Do not attach heavy or bulky items to the ignition key.

Replacement keys

The key number is specified on a detachable tag.

The key number must be quoted when ordering replacement keys as it is a component of the immobiliser system.

Locks 3 247.

Central locking 3 9.

Starting the engine 3 159.

Radio remote control 3 7.

Electronic key 3 8.

The code number of the adapter for the locking wheel nuts is specified on a card.

It must be quoted when ordering a replacement adapter.

Wheel changing 3 240.

Key with foldaway key section Replacing battery in radio remote control

Replace the battery as soon as the range reduces.

Press button to extend. To fold the key, first press the button.

Radio remote control

Depending on the version, the radio remote control enables a operation of the following functions:

● central locking system 3 9

● anti-theft locking system 3 17

● anti-theft alarm system 3 17

● tailgate unlocking 3 9

● power windows 3 22

● mirrors folding 3 19

● vehicle locator lighting 3 96

● peripheral lighting 3 96

The remote control has a range of up to several metres, but may also be much less due to external influences. The hazard warning flashers confirm operation.

Handle with care, protect from moisture and high temperatures and avoid unnecessary operation.

Batteries do not belong in household waste. They must be disposed of at an appropriate recycling collection point.

1. Remove the back cover from the remote control.

2. Extract the flat battery from its location.

7

3. Replace battery with a battery of the same type. Pay attention to the installation position.

4. Clip the back cover in place.

Fault

If the central locking system cannot be operated with the radio remote control, the cause may be one of the following:

● Fault in radio remote control.

● Electronic key is out of reception range.

● The battery voltage is too low.

● Overload of the central locking system by operating at frequent intervals, the power supply is interrupted for a short time.

● Interference from higher-power radio waves from other sources.

Manual unlocking 3 9.

Electronic key system

9 WARNING

The electronic key can affect a pacemaker.

Keep the electronic key away from the breast.

The electronic key simply needs to be on the driver's person.

Additionally, the electronic key includes the functionality of the radio remote control 3 7.

Handle with care, protect from moisture and high temperatures and avoid unnecessary operation.

Note

To save battery power, the keyless functions are set to stand-by after 21 days of non-use.

To reactivate the functions, press a button on the electronic key.

Replacing battery in electronic key

Replace the battery as soon as the system no longer operates properly or the range is reduced.

Depending on the version, the electronic key system enables a keyless operation of the following functions:

● central locking system 3 9

● tailgate unlocking

● ignition switching on and starting the engine 3 159

● headlight activation

Batteries do not belong in household waste. They must be disposed of at an appropriate recycling collection point.

8

1. Remove the cover.

2. Extract the flat battery from its location.

3. Replace battery with a battery of the same type. Pay attention to the installation position.

4. Clip the cover in place.

Fault

If the central locking cannot be operated or the engine cannot be started, the cause may be one of the following:

● Fault in electronic key.

● Electronic key is out of reception range.

● The battery voltage is too low.

● Overload of the central locking system by operating at frequent intervals, the power supply is interrupted for a short time.

● Interference from higher-power radio waves from other sources.

To rectify the cause of the fault, change the position of the electronic key.

Manual unlocking 3 9.

Central locking system

Unlocks and locks doors, load compartment and fuel filler flap.

A pull on an interior door handle unlocks and opens the respective door.

Note

In the event of an accident in which airbags or belt pretensioners are deployed, the vehicle is automatically unlocked.

Note

A short time after unlocking with the remote control the doors are locked automatically if no door has been opened. A precondition is that the setting is activated in the vehicle personalisation 3 89.

Selective unlocking of cabin and load compartment

Selective unlocking allows you to unlock either the doors of the cabin and the fuel filler flap or the load compartment, i.e., sliding doors, rear door / tailgate.

Selective unlocking has to be configured.

Graphic Info Display: Switch on ignition.

Press * more than 2 seconds. An audible signal is given and a message is displayed in the Graphic Info Display.

Colour Info Display: Select the relevant setting in the Vehicle personalisation.

Vehicle personalisation 3 89.

Remote control operation

Unlocking

Press O .

Unlocking mode can be set. Two settings are selectable:

● All doors and load compartment will be unlocked by pressing O .

● Only the driver's door and the passenger door will be unlocked by pressing O .

9

Unlocking the load compartment

Press * or press O two times to unlock the load compartment only, i.e., sliding doors and rear doors or tailgate.

Locking

Close doors and the load compartment.

Press N .

If the vehicle is not closed properly, the central locking system will not work.

Confirmation

Operation of the central locking system is confirmed by the hazard warning flashers. A precondition is that the setting is activated in the vehicle personalisation

3 89.

Electronic key system operation

The electronic key must be outside the vehicle, within a range of approx.

one metre of the relevant door side.

Unlocking

Keep the hand behind the door handle or keep the tailgate button pressed to open the windows.

Unlocking mode can be set in the vehicle personalisation menu in the Info Display.

Two settings are selectable:

● All doors, load compartment and fuel filler flap will be unlocked by passing a hand behind one of the front door handles or the handle of the rear door. If the vehicle is equipped with a tailgate, press the tailgate button.

● Only the front doors and the fuel filler flap will be unlocked by passing a hand behind one of front door handles.

Vehicle personalisation 3 89.

Unlocking the load compartment

Only the load compartment, i.e., the rear door or the tailgate, will be unlocked by passing a hand behind the rear door handle or pressing the tailgate button.

Pass a hand behind the door handle of one of the front doors or the rear door to unlock the vehicle or press the middle tailgate button.

10

Locking

Press with a finger or thumb on one of the door handles (at the markings) or press the tailgate button.

All doors, load compartment and fuel filler flap will be locked.

If the vehicle is not closed properly, the electronic key remains in the vehicle or the ignition is not off, locking will not be permitted.

Confirmation

Operation of central locking system is confirmed by the hazard warning flashers.

Central locking button

Locks or unlocks all doors and the load compartment from inside the passenger compartment. If the vehicle is equipped with electronic key system, the fuel filler flap is locked or unlocked, too.

Press Q to lock. The LED in the button illuminates.

Press Q again to unlock. The LED in the button extinguishes.

Operation with the key in case of a central locking system fault

In case of a fault, e.g. vehicle battery or remote control / electronic key battery is discharged, the driver's door can be locked or unlocked with the mechanical key.

Manual unlocking

Electronic key: press and hold the latch to extract the integral key.

Manually unlock the driver's door by inserting and turning the key in the lock cylinder.

The other doors can be opened by pulling the interior handle.

By switching on the ignition, the anti-theft locking system is deactivated.

Manual locking

11

Manually lock the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap by inserting and turning the key in the lock cylinder of the driver's door.

Automatic locking

Automatic locking after driving off

This system allows automatic locking of the doors and the tailgate as soon as the speed of the vehicle exceeds 10 km/h /

6 mph.

If one of the doors or the tailgate is open, the automatic central locking does not take place. This is signalled by the sound of the locks rebounding, accompanied by illumination of h in the instrument cluster, an audible signal and the display of an alert message.

This function can be activated or deactivated at any time. With the ignition on, press Q until an audible signal starts and a corresponding message is displayed.

The state of the system stays in memory when switching off the ignition.

Automatic relock after unlocking

This feature automatically locks all doors, load compartment and fuel filler flap a short time after unlocking with the remote control or electronic key, provided no door has been opened.

Child locks

9 WARNING

Use the child locks whenever children are occupying the rear seats.

Mechanical child locks

Turn the child lock in the rear door to the vertical position. The door cannot be opened from the inside.

To deactivate, turn the child lock to the horizontal position.

Electric child locks

12

Depending on version there are different variants.

DOORS

Sliding door

Opening

Remotely operated system to prevent opening of the rear doors via the interior door handles and the use of the rear power windows.

Switching on

Press R . The indicator light of the button comes on, accompanied by a confirmation message. This indicator light remains on until the child lock is switched off.

Switching off

Press R again. The indicator light on button goes off, accompanied by a confirmation message. This indicator light remains on while child lock is switched on.

After unlocking, pull the outside door handle and slide the door towards the rear beyond the point of resistance.

To open from inside push the handle and slide the door towards the rear beyond the point of resistance.

Closing

To close from outside pull the door handle and slide the door towards the front until it locks.

To close from inside push the handle and slide the door beyond the point of resistance. Then, use the shaped recess at the top of the door pillar to slide the door towards the front until it locks.

CAUTION

Ensure the sliding side door is fully closed and secure before driving the vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid damage, do not attempt to operate the sliding side door when the fuel filler flap is open.

9 DANGER

Do not drive with the sliding side door open or ajar, e.g. when transporting bulky objects, since toxic exhaust gases, which cannot be seen or smelled, could enter the vehicle. This can cause unconsciousness and even death.

Refuelling 3 214.

13

Rear doors

Unlock the rear doors with the remote control or by turning the key in the rear door lock cylinder.

Central locking 3 9.

Always open the left hand door before the right hand door.

The door is opened from inside the vehicle by pulling the interior handle.

To open the left hand rear door, pull the exterior handle.

The right hand rear door is released using the lever.

9 WARNING

The rear lights may be obscured if the rear doors are open and the vehicle is parked on the roadside.

Make other road users aware of the vehicle, by using a warning triangle or other equipment specified in the road traffic regulations.

The doors are retained in the 90º position by locking stays. To open the doors to

180º, push the latch and swing open to the desired position. Before closing the doors ensure that the locking stays are in the 90º position.

9 WARNING

Ensure extended opening doors are secured when fully opened.

Opened doors may slam closed due to the force of the wind!

Always close the right hand door before the left hand door.

Central locking system 3 9.

14

Driving with an open load compartment

In exceptional cases only, it is possible to drive with the right-hand rear door open, e.g. if long objects need to be transported. Open the left-hand followed by the right-hand rear door, then close the left-hand rear door and lock it.

9 DANGER

Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous carbon monoxide, which is colourless and odourless and could be fatal if inhaled.

When driving with an open load compartment, exhaust gases could enter the vehicle. Open the windows.

Note

Do not use the left-hand rear door to hold objects in place.

If possible, secure objects with lashing straps attached to lashing eyes 3 52.

CAUTION

Always make sure that the load in the vehicle is securely stowed when driving with an open load compartment.

For further information, refer to "Loading information" 3 58.

Always comply with local or national regulations.

Load compartment

Tailgate

Opening

Depending on the version, press ' to unlock the tailgate.

After unlocking, press the middle tailgate button and open the tailgate.

Closing

Use the interior handle.

Do not push the middle tailgate button whilst closing as this will unlock the tailgate again.

Central locking system 3 9.

15

General hints for operating tailgate

9 DANGER

Do not drive with the tailgate open or ajar, e.g. when transporting bulky objects, since toxic exhaust gases, which cannot be seen or smelled, could enter the vehicle. This can cause unconsciousness and even death.

CAUTION

Before opening the tailgate, check overhead obstructions, e.g. a garage door, to avoid damage to the tailgate.

Always check the moving area above and behind the tailgate.

Note

The installation of certain heavy accessories onto the tailgate may affect its ability to remain open.

Note

At low outside temperatures the tailgate may not open fully by itself. In this case lift the tailgate manually to its normal end position.

Emergency tailgate opening from inside the vehicle

Opening

An access hole between the door and the floor enables the tailgate latch to be released using a suitable tool. Push lever to the left to unlock and open the tailgate.

Rear window

The rear window can be opened to give access to the load compartment without opening the tailgate.

The tailgate and the rear window cannot be opened at the same time.

After unlocking, press the right tailgate button and open the rear window.

Closing

Press on the centre of the rear window until it is fully closed.

16

VEHICLE SECURITY

Anti-theft locking system

9 WARNING

Do not use the system if there are people in the vehicle! The doors cannot be unlocked from the inside.

The system deadlocks all the doors. All doors must be closed otherwise the system cannot be activated.

Unlocking the vehicle disables the mechanical anti-theft locking system.

This is not possible with the central locking button.

Activating

Simple key: Insert the key and turn it clockwise twice within 5 seconds.

Remote control: Press N on the radio remote control twice within five seconds.

Electronic key: Press twice with a finger or thumb on one of the door handles (at the markings) within five seconds

Anti-theft alarm system

The anti-theft alarm system is combined with the anti-theft locking system.

It monitors:

● doors, tailgate, bonnet

● passenger compartment including adjoining load compartment

Activation

Ignition must be switched off. All doors must be closed and the electronic key must not remain in the vehicle. Otherwise the system cannot be activated.

● Radio remote control: Monitoring of doors, tailgate and bonnet is activated 5 seconds after locking the vehicle by pressing e . Monitoring of passenger compartment including adjoining load compartment is activated 45 seconds after locking the vehicle by pressing e .

● Electronic key system: Monitoring of doors, tailgate and bonnet is activated 5 seconds after locking the vehicle by pressing with a finger or thumb on one of the front door handles at the markings. Monitoring of passenger compartment including adjoining load compartment is activated

45 seconds after locking the vehicle by pressing with a finger or thumb on one of the front door handles at the markings.

Activation is confirmed by the flashing of the status LED and coming on of the turn lights for a short time.

If a door or the tailgate is not correctly closed and the vehicle is locked via remote control or electronic key system, the vehicle remains unlocked. However, the anti-theft alarm system will be activated after 45 seconds.

Note

Changes to the vehicle interior such as the use of seat covers and open windows, could impair the function of passenger compartment monitoring.

Activation without monitoring of passenger compartment

Switch off the monitoring of passenger compartment when animals are being left in the vehicle, because of high volume ultrasonic signals or movements triggering the alarm. Also switch off when the vehicle is on a ferry or train.

17

1. Switch of ignition.

2. Press U within the next 10 seconds until the LED of the button illuminates constantly.

3. Get out of the vehicle.

4. Lock the vehicle immediately by using the remote control, pressing with a finger or thumb on one of the door handles (at the markings) or pressing the tailgate button.

Activation is indicated by the flashing of the status LED.

Indication

LED in the central locking button flashes if the anti-theft alarm system is activated.

Seek the assistance of a workshop in the event of faults.

Deactivation

Radio remote control: Unlocking the vehicle by pressing c deactivates the anti-theft alarm system.

Electronic key system: Unlocking the vehicle by pressing on one of the front door handles at the markings deactivates the anti-theft alarm system.

The electronic key must be outside the vehicle, within a range of approx. one metre of the relevant door side.

The system is not deactivated by unlocking the driver's door with the key or with the central locking button in the passenger compartment.

Note

If the vehicle is unlocked and no door is opened, the vehicle is automatically relocked after 30 seconds. In this case, the anti-theft alarm will be reactivated, too.

Alarm

When triggered, the alarm horn sounds and the hazard warning lights flash simultaneously. The number and duration of alarm signals are stipulated by legislation.

18

The anti-theft alarm system can be deactivated by pressing c , by pressing on one of the front door handles at the markings with electronic key system. The

LED of the U button will extinguish and the turn lights flash for a short time.

A triggered alarm, which has not been interrupted by the driver, will be indicated by the rapid flashing of the LED of the

U button. If the ignition is switched on, the flashing stops immediately

If the vehicle's battery is to be disconnected (e.g. for maintenance work), the alarm siren must be deactivated as follows: switch the ignition on then off, then disconnect the vehicle's battery within 15 s

If the battery has been reconnected (e.g.

after maintenance work), wait for 10 minutes to restart the engine.

Locking the vehicle without activation of the anti-theft alarm

Lock the vehicle by inserting and turning the integrated key of the remote control or the electronic key system in the lock cylinder of the driver's door.

Malfunction of the remote control

Unlock the vehicle by inserting and turning the integrated key of the remote control or the electronic key system in the lock cylinder of the driver's door.

Open the driver's door.

The horn of the anti-theft alarm will sound.

Switch on ignition.

The horn will stop sounding and the status LED extinguishes.

Immobiliser

The system is part of the ignition switch and checks whether the vehicle is allowed to be started with the key being used.

The immobiliser is activated automatically after the key has been removed from the ignition switch.

Note

Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) tags may cause interference with the key. Do not have it placed near the key when starting the vehicle.

Note

The immobiliser does not lock the doors.

Always lock the vehicle after leaving it 3 9.

Switch on the anti-theft alarm system 3 17.

Emergency operation of electronic key

3 158.

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

Convex shape

The shape of the mirror makes objects appear smaller, which will affect the ability to estimate distances.

Side blind spot alert 3 197.

Electric adjustment

Select the relevant exterior mirror by pushing the mirror button C to the left or right.

Adjust the respective mirror by the fourway control.

Select the relevant exterior mirror by turning the control to left C or right D mirror symbol .

Adjust respective mirror by tilting the fourway control.

Folding mirrors

19

For pedestrian safety, the exterior mirrors will swing out of their normal mounting position if they are struck with sufficient force. Reposition the mirror by applying slight pressure to the mirror housing.

Electric folding

Heated mirrors INTERIOR MIRRORS

Manual anti-dazzle

Pull the mirror button C rearwards.

Both exterior mirrors will fold.

Pull the mirror button rearwards again to return both exterior mirrors to their original position.

If an electrically folded mirror is manually extended, pulling mirror button rearwards will only electrically extend the other mirror.

Automatic folding

When the vehicle is unlocked, the mirrors swing to their normal mounting position.

When the vehicle is locked, the mirrors are folded down.

20

Depending on the version, heating is operated by pressing e or d .

Heating works with the engine running and is switched off automatically after a short time.

Heated rear window 3 23.

To reduce dazzle, adjust the lever on the underside of the mirror housing.

Automatic anti-dazzle

Dazzle from following vehicles is automatically reduced, when driving in the dark.

Child surveillance mirror

Rear view display

A child surveillance mirror allows to observe the rear seats. The mirror can be adjusted.

The rear view display can show three different views:

● close rear view

● passenger side view

● standard rear view

The standard rear view is displayed by default.

Rear view camera 3 201

Passenger side camera 3 198

To switch between the views, press p .

To switch the rear view display on or off, press ) .

21

WINDOWS

Windscreen

Windscreen stickers

Do not attach stickers such as toll road stickers or similar on the windscreen in the area of the interior mirror. Keep the sensor free from dust, dirt and ice.

Otherwise the detection zone of the rain sensor / light sensor and the view area of the camera in the mirror housing could be restricted.

Sensors 3 66, 3 91

Windscreen replacement

CAUTION

If the vehicle has a front-looking camera sensor for the driver assistance systems, it is very important that any windscreen

22 replacement is performed accurately according to Fiat specifications.

Otherwise, these systems may not work properly and there is a risk of unexpected behaviour and / or messages from these systems.

Power windows

9 WARNING

Take care when operating the power windows. Risk of injury, particularly to children.

If there are children on the rear seats, switch on the child safety system for the power windows.

Keep a close watch on the windows when closing them. Ensure that nothing becomes trapped in them as they move.

Switch on ignition to operate power windows.

Operate the switch for the respective window by pushing to open or pulling to close.

Pushing or pulling gently to the first detent: window moves up or down as long as the switch is operated.

Pushing or pulling firmly to the second detent then releasing: window moves up or down automatically with safety function enabled. To stop movement, operate the switch once more in the same direction.

Safety function

This function depends upon version. If the window glass encounters resistance above the middle of the window during automatic closing, it is immediately stopped and opened again.

Override safety function

In the event of closing difficulties due to frost or the like, switch on the ignition, then pull the switch to the first detent and hold. The window moves up without safety function enabled. To stop movement, release the switch.

Child safety system for rear windows

Press V to deactivate rear door power windows; the LED illuminates. To activate, press V again.

Operating windows from outside

The windows can be operated remotely from outside the vehicle.

Press and hold e to close windows.

Release button to stop window movement.

Overload

If the windows are repeatedly operated within short intervals, the window operation is disabled for some time.

Initialising the power windows

If the windows cannot be closed automatically (e.g. after disconnecting the vehicle battery), a warning message is displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 88.

Activate the window electronics as follows:

1. Close doors.

2. Switch on ignition.

3. Pull switch until the window is closed and keep pulling for additional two seconds.

4. Push switch until the window is completely open and keep pushing for additional two seconds.

5. Repeat for each window.

Rear windows

To partially open the rear windows, tilt the lever and push it fully to lock the windows in the open position.

Heated rear window

Operated by pressing e together with heated exterior mirrors.

Heating works with the engine running and is switched off automatically after a short time.

Depending on climate control system, e is located at a different position.

Press and hold c to open windows.

23

accumulation of snow caused by the operation of the windscreen wipers is prevented.

Roller blinds

Heated windscreen

This function heats the windscreen along its bottom and along the driver's side of the windscreen.

Thus, the function allows a fast detaching of the windscreen wiper blades if they are frozen to the windscreen. Additionally, an

Heating is operated by pressing , . LED in button illuminates.

Heating works with the engine running and is switched off automatically depending on the ambient temperature.

Pressing , again switches off the heating operation. LED in button is extinguished.

Sun visors

The sun visors can be folded down or swivelled to the side to prevent dazzling.

If the sun visors have integral mirrors, the mirror covers should be closed when driving.

A ticket holder is located on the backside of the sun visor.

To reduce sunlight at the second row seats, pull the blind upwards using the grip and engage it at the top of the door frame.

24

ROOF

Glass panel

Sunblind

Press N at the rear: the sunblind is opened as long as the switch is operated.

Press N at the front: the sunblind is closed as long as the switch is operated.

25

SEATS, RESTRAINTS

HEAD RESTRAINTS

Head restraints ................................. 26

Front seats ....................................... 27

Seat position .................................. 27

Seat adjustment ............................. 28

Seat folding ................................... 29

Armrest .......................................... 30

Heating .......................................... 30

Rear seats ........................................ 31

Second row seats .......................... 31

Third row seats .............................. 32

Seat belts ......................................... 34

Three-point seat belt ...................... 35

Airbag system .................................. 36

Front airbag system ....................... 38

Side airbag system ........................ 39

Curtain airbag system .................... 39

Airbag deactivation ........................ 40

Child restraints ................................. 41

Child restraint systems ................... 41

Child restraint installation locations ....................................... 44

Position

9 WARNING

Only drive with the head restraint set to the proper position.

The upper edge of the head restraint should be at upper head level. If this is not possible for extremely tall people, set to highest position, and set to lowest position for small people.

Adjustment

Head restraints on front seats

Height adjustment

Pull the head restraint upwards or press catch and push it downwards.

Removal

Press catch, pull the respective head restraint upwards and remove.

26

Head restraints on rear seats

Height adjustment

Pull the head restraint upwards or push it downwards.

Removal

Press catch, pull the respective head restraint upwards and remove.

FRONT SEATS

Seat position

9 WARNING

Only drive with the seat correctly adjusted.

9 WARNING

Never adjust seats while driving as they could move uncontrollably.

9 DANGER

Do not sit closer than 25 cm to the steering wheel, to permit safe airbag deployment.

9 WARNING

Never store any objects under the seats.

● Sit with buttocks as far back against the backrest as possible. Adjust the distance between the seat and the pedals so that legs are slightly angled when pressing the pedals.

Slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible.

● Set seat height high enough to have a clear field of vision on all sides and of all display instruments. There should be at least one hand of clearance between head and the roof frame. Your thighs should rest lightly on the seat without pressing into it.

● Sit with shoulders as far back against the backrest as possible. Set the backrest rake so that it is possible to easily reach the steering wheel with arms slightly bent.

Maintain contact between shoulders and the backrest when turning the steering wheel. Do not angle the backrest too far back. We recommend a maximum rake of approx. 25°.

● Adjust seat and steering wheel in a way that the wrist rests on top of the steering wheel while the arm is fully extended and shoulders are on the backrest.

● Adjust the steering wheel 3 65.

27

● Adjust the head restraint 3 26.

● Adjust the lumbar support so that it supports the natural shape of the spine.

Seat adjustment

Drive only with engaged seats and backrests.

Longitudinal adjustment

Seat height

Depending on version, pull the lever of the passenger seat and slide the seat, then release the handle.

Backrest inclination

Lever pumping motion up : seat higher down : seat lower

Lumbar support

Pull the handle, slide the seat, then release the handle. Try to move the seat back and forth to ensure that the seat is locked in place.

Push the lever, adjust inclination and release the lever. Do not lean on backrest when adjusting.

Turn the handwheel to suit personal requirements.

28

Seat folding

Depending on version, the front passenger seat can be folded flat to the table position.

Folding single seat front passenger side

Slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible, to avoid contact with the instrument panel during folding.

Push the head restraint down or remove it before folding backrest 3 26.

Depending on version, remove the armrest 3 30.

Unfolding single seat front passenger side

To restore the seat to the upright position, pull up the backrest as far as it will go.

Pull the lever and raise backrest fully then release the lever.

Folding bench seat front passenger side

Fold down the outer backrest by pulling the loop. Swing the backrest forwards until the seat is lowered on the vehicle floor.

When retracted, the maximum weight on the backrest is 50 kg.

Fold down the centre backrest by pulling the loop.

Push lever, fold backrest fully forwards and release the lever. Then push the backrest down further until it is completely flat.

To lift the seat cushion pull the lever and raise the seat cushion against the backrest until it locks.

29

Storage cargo management system

3 52.

Storage load compartment grille 3 54.

Unfolding bench seat front passenger side

To restore the backrest to the upright position, pull up the seat till it is engaged.

To restore the seat cushion to the original position, push the lever and lower the seat cushion till it is engaged.

9 WARNING

When the front passenger seat is in the folded position, the front passenger airbag system must be deactivated.

Airbag deactivation 3 40.

Armrest

To remove the armrest fold it up, push and turn it to the position shown in the picture.

Then pull off the armrest from the backrest.

To fit the armrest engage it in the backrest. Push and fold the armrest in the upright position. Pull the armrest out a bit and fold it downwards.

Heating

Activate seat heating by pressing ß for the respective front seat.

The LED in the button illuminates to indicate activation.

Pressing ß once more deactivates seat heating.

Seat heating is operational when engine is running and during an Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 161.

The armrest can be folded up.

30

REAR SEATS

Second row seats

Depending on the equipment, the rear seat backrest is divided into two or three parts. All parts can be folded down.

Before folding rear seat backrests, execute the following if necessary:

● Move front seats forward.

● Remove the load compartment cover 3 50.

Folding the seats

1. Push the head restraint downwards

3 26.

2. Check that the outer seat belts are lying correctly on the backrests.

4. Depending on version, fold down the centre backrest by pulling the loop.

9 WARNING

Take care when operating the rear backrests from the load compartment.

The backrest is folded with considerable power. Risk of injury, particularly to children.

Ensure that nothing is attached to the rear seats or located on the seat cushion.

9 WARNING

Always make sure that the load in the vehicle is securely stowed. Otherwise objects can be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause personal injury or damage to the load or vehicle.

Unfolding the seats

To fold up, raise the backrests and guide them into an upright position until they engage audibly.

3. Pull the release lever on one or both outer sides and fold down the backrests onto the seat cushion.

5. Alternatively fold seat backrests from the load compartment: pull lever on left or right sidewall of the load compartment to fold the rear seat backrests.

31

The backrests are properly engaged when the red mark near the release lever is no longer visible.

9 WARNING

When folding up, ensure that backrests are securely locked in position before driving. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or damage to the load or vehicle in the event of hard braking or a collision.

Third row seats

9 WARNING

When rear seats or backrests are being adjusted or folded, keep hands and feet away from the moving area.

Never adjust seats while driving as they could move uncontrollably.

Drive only with engaged seats and backrests.

9 WARNING

When installing the rear seats, ensure that the seat assembly is properly located on the anchor points, the locks are fully engaged, and the backrest is returned to the correct position.

Failure to do so may result in personal injury in the event of hard braking or a collision.

32

9 WARNING

Always make sure that the load in the vehicle is securely stowed. Otherwise objects can be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause personal injury or damage to the load or vehicle.

Depending on version, the load compartment area can be increased by folding up or removing the third row seats.

Folding the seats

1. Push the head restraint downwards and if necessary fold down the seats of the second row.

Head restraints 3 26

Folding the seats of the second row

3 31

2. Pull the lever and fold down the backrest onto the seat cushion.

3. Pull the handle and tilt the entire seat forwards.

4. Secure the folded seat in the upright position by attaching the strap to one of the pillars of the head restraint in front of the folded seat.

Unfolding the seats

1. Ensure that the seat belts do not obstruct the unfolding manoeuvre.

2. Remove the strap and lower the seat assembly to the floor, ensuring the rear support is located on the anchor point and securely latched into position.

3. Raise the backrest and adjust the head restraint.

Removing the seats

1. Push the head restraint downwards and if necessary fold down the seats of the second row.

Head restraints 3 26

Folding the seats of the second row

3 31

2. Pull the lever and fold down the backrest onto the seat cushion.

Pull the handle and tilt the entire seat forwards (refer to "Folding the seats" above).

3. Pull the loop to disengage the locks and remove the seat assembly from the floor anchor points.

Installing the seats

1. Attach the seat assembly front supports to the front anchor points.

2. Fold the seat backwards to the floor to fix its rear anchor point.

3. Raise the backrest and adjust the head restraint.

Longitudinal seat adjustment

Pull the handle, slide the seat, then release the handle. Try to move the seat back and forth to ensure that the seat is locked in place.

33

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts are locked during heavy acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle, holding the occupants in the seat position. Therefore the risk of injury is considerably reduced.

9 WARNING

Fasten seat belt before each trip.

In the event of an accident, people not wearing seat belts endanger their fellow occupants and themselves.

Seat belts are designed to be used by only one person at a time.

Child restraint system 3 41.

Periodically check all parts of the seat belt system for damage, soiling and proper functionality.

34

Have damaged components replaced.

After an accident, have the seat belts and triggered seat belt pretensioners replaced by a workshop.

Note

Make sure that the seat belts are neither damaged by shoes or sharp-edged objects nor trapped. Prevent dirt from getting into the seat belt retractors.

Note

Use the belt buckle inteded for the respective seat belt when fastening in order to ensure proper functionality.

Seat belt reminder

Each seat is equipped with a seat belt reminder, indicated by a control indicator

X for the respective seat in the roof console 3 75.

Belt force limiters

Stress on the body is reduced by the gradual release of the seat belt during a collision.

Belt pretensioners

In the event of a head-on, rear-end or side-on collision of a certain severity, the front seat belts and the outer second row seat belts are tightened.

9 WARNING

Incorrect handling (e.g. removal or fitting of seat belts) can trigger the belt pretensioners.

The deployment of the belt pretensioners is indicated by continuous illumination of control indicator v .

Airbag and belt pretensioners 3 76

Triggered belt pretensioners must be replaced by a workshop. Belt pretensioners can only be triggered once.

Note

Do not affix or install accessories or other objects that may interfere with the operation of the belt pretensioners. Do not make any modifications to belt pretensioner components as this will invalidate the vehicle operating permit.

Three-point seat belt

Fasten

Withdraw the belt from the retractor, guide it untwisted across the body and insert the latch plate into the buckle.

Make sure the belt fits tightly to the body while driving.

Loose or bulky clothing prevents the belt from fitting snugly. Do not place objects such as handbags or mobile phones between the seat belt and your body.

9 WARNING

The seat belt must not rest against hard or fragile objects in the pockets of your clothing.

Seat belt reminder X 3 75, 3 81.

Unfasten Pull latch plates with the seat belt out of seat belt holder in the roof.

To release seat belt, press red button on seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back.

Centre seat belt of the second seat row

The centre seat is equipped with a particular three-point seat belt.

Insert lower latch plate into left-hand buckle (1) at the centre seat. Guide the upper latch plate with the seat belt over the lap area and the shoulder (do not twist) and insert it into right-hand buckle

(2) at centre seat.

35

To unfasten the seat belt, first press the button on the right-hand buckle (2) and remove upper latch plate. Then press the button on the left-hand buckle (1) and remove lower latch plate. The seat belt retracts automatically.

Using seat belts while pregnant

9 WARNING

The lap belt must be positioned as low as possible across the pelvis to prevent pressure on the abdomen.

AIRBAG SYSTEM

The airbag system consists of a number of individual systems depending on the scope of equipment.

When triggered the airbags inflate within milliseconds. They also deflate so quickly that it is often unnoticeable during the collision.

9 WARNING

The airbag system deploys in an explosive manner, repairs must be performed by skilled personnel only.

9 WARNING

Adding accessories that change the vehicle's frame, bumper system, height, front end or side sheet metal, may keep the airbag system from working properly. The operation of the airbag system can also be affected by changing any parts of the front seats, seat belts, airbag sensing and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument panel, inner door seals including the speakers, any of the airbag modules, ceiling or pillar trim, front sensors, side impact sensors or airbag wiring.

Note

The airbag systems and belt pretensioner control electronics are located in the centre console. Do not put any magnetic objects in this area.

Do not affix any objects onto the airbag covers and do not cover them with other materials. Have damaged covers replaced by a workshop.

Each airbag is triggered only once. Have deployed airbags replaced by a workshop.

Furthermore, it may be necessary to have the steering wheel, the instrument panel, parts of the panelling, the door seals, handles and the seats replaced.

Do not make any modifications to the airbag system as this will invalidate the vehicle operating permit.

Control indicator v for airbag systems

3 76.

Child restraint systems on front passenger seat with airbag systems

EN: NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an

ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it; DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

36

DE: Nach hinten gerichtete Kindersitze

NIEMALS auf einem Sitz verwenden, der durch einen davor befindlichen

AKTIVEN AIRBAG geschützt ist, da dies den TOD oder SCHWERE

VERLETZUNGEN DES KINDES zur

Folge haben kann.

FR: NE JAMAIS utiliser un siège d'enfant orienté vers l'arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN

GONFLABLE ACTIF placé devant lui, sous peine d'infliger des BLESSURES

GRAVES, voire MORTELLES à l'ENFANT.

ES: NUNCA utilice un sistema de retención infantil orientado hacia atrás en un asiento protegido por un AIRBAG

FRONTAL ACTIVO. Peligro de

MUERTE o LESIONES GRAVES para el NIÑO.

RU: ЗАПРЕЩАЕТСЯ устанавливать детское удерживающее устройство лицом назад на сиденье автомобиля, оборудованном фронтальной подушкой безопасности, если

ПОДУШКА НЕ ОТКЛЮЧЕНА! Это может привести к СМЕРТИ или

СЕРЬЕЗНЫМ ТРАВМАМ РЕБЕНКА.

NL: Gebruik NOOIT een achterwaarts gericht kinderzitje op een stoel met een

ACTIEVE AIRBAG ervoor, om

DODELIJK of ERNSTIG LETSEL van het KIND te voorkomen.

DA: Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt autostol på et forsæde med AKTIV

AIRBAG, BARNET kan komme i

LIVSFARE eller komme ALVORLIGT

TIL SKADE.

SV: Använd ALDRIG en bakåtvänd barnstol på ett säte som skyddas med en framförvarande AKTIV AIRBAG.

DÖDSFALL eller ALLVARLIGA

SKADOR kan drabba BARNET.

FI: ÄLÄ KOSKAAN sijoita taaksepäin suunnattua lasten turvaistuinta istuimelle, jonka edessä on

AKTIIVINEN TURVATYYNY, LAPSI

VOI KUOLLA tai VAMMAUTUA

VAKAVASTI.

NO: Bakovervendt barnesikringsutstyr må ALDRI brukes på et sete med AKTIV

KOLLISJONSPUTE foran, da det kan føre til at BARNET utsettes for

LIVSFARE og fare for ALVORLIGE

SKADER.

PT: NUNCA use um sistema de retenção para crianças voltado para trás num banco protegido com um

AIRBAG ACTIVO na frente do mesmo, poderá ocorrer a PERDA DE VIDA ou

FERIMENTOS GRAVES na CRIANÇA.

IT: Non usare mai un sistema di sicurezza per bambini rivolto all'indietro su un sedile protetto da AIRBAG

ATTIVO di fronte ad esso: pericolo di

MORTE o LESIONI GRAVI per il

BAMBINO!

EL: ΠΟΤΕ μη χρησιμοποιείτε παιδικό

κάθισμα ασφαλείας με φορά προς τα

πίσω σε κάθισμα που προστατεύεται

από μετωπικό ΕΝΕΡΓΟ ΑΕΡΟΣΑΚΟ,

διότι το παιδί μπορεί να υποστεί

ΘΑΝΑΣΙΜΟ ή ΣΟΒΑΡΟ

ΤΡΑΥΜΑΤΙΣΜΟ.

PL: NIE WOLNO montować fotelika dziecięcego zwróconego tyłem do kierunku jazdy na fotelu, przed którym znajduje się WŁĄCZONA PODUSZKA

POWIETRZNA. Niezastosowanie się do tego zalecenia może być przyczyną

ŚMIERCI lub POWAŻNYCH

OBRAŻEŃ u DZIECKA.

TR: Arkaya bakan bir çocuk emniyet sistemini KESİNLİKLE önünde bir

AKTİF HAVA YASTIĞI ile korunmakta olan bir koltukta kullanmayınız. ÇOCUK

ÖLEBİLİR veya AĞIR ŞEKİLDE

YARALANABİLİR.

UK: НІКОЛИ не використовуйте систему безпеки для дітей, що встановлюється обличчям назад, на сидінні з УВІМКНЕНОЮ ПОДУШКОЮ

БЕЗПЕКИ, інакше це може призвести до СМЕРТІ чи СЕРЙОЗНОГО

ТРАВМУВАННЯ ДИТИНИ.

HU: SOHA ne használjon hátrafelé néző biztonsági gyerekülést előlről

AKTÍV LÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen, mert a GYERMEK HALÁLÁT vagy

KOMOLY SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.

37

HR: NIKADA nemojte koristiti sustav zadržavanja za djecu okrenut prema natrag na sjedalu s AKTIVNIM

ZRAČNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, to bi moglo dovesti do SMRTI ili

OZBILJNJIH OZLJEDA za DIJETE.

SL: NIKOLI ne nameščajte otroškega varnostnega sedeža, obrnjenega v nasprotni smeri vožnje, na sedež z

AKTIVNO ČELNO ZRAČNO BLAZINO, saj pri tem obstaja nevarnost RESNIH ali SMRTNIH POŠKODB za OTROKA.

SR: NIKADA ne koristiti bezbednosni sistem za decu u kome su deca okrenuta unazad na sedištu sa

AKTIVNIM VAZDUŠNIM JASTUKOM ispred sedišta zato što DETE može da

NASTRADA ili da se TEŠKO

POVREDI.

MK: НИКОГАШ не користете детско седиште свртено наназад на седиште заштитено со АКТИВНО

ВОЗДУШНО ПЕРНИЧЕ пред него, затоа што детето може ДА ЗАГИНЕ или да биде ТЕШКО ПОВРЕДЕНО.

BG: НИКОГА не използвайте детска седалка, гледаща назад, върху седалка, която е защитена чрез

АКТИВНА ВЪЗДУШНА

ВЪЗГЛАВНИЦА пред нея - може да се стигне до СМЪРТ или СЕРИОЗНО

НАРАНЯВАНЕ на ДЕТЕТО.

RO: Nu utilizaţi NICIODATĂ un scaun pentru copil îndreptat spre partea din spate a maşinii pe un scaun protejat de

38 un AIRBAG ACTIV în faţa sa; acest lucru poate duce la DECESUL sau

VĂTĂMAREA GRAVĂ a COPILULUI.

CS: NIKDY nepoužívejte dětský zádržný systém instalovaný proti směru jízdy na sedadle, které je chráněno před sedadlem AKTIVNÍM AIRBAGEM.

Mohlo by dojít k VÁŽNÉMU PORANĚNÍ nebo ÚMRTÍ DÍTĚTE.

SK: NIKDY nepoužívajte detskú sedačku otočenú vzad na sedadle chránenom AKTÍVNYM AIRBAGOM, pretože môže dôjsť k SMRTI alebo

VÁŽNYM ZRANENIAM DIEŤAŤA.

LT: JOKIU BŪDU nemontuokite atgal atgręžtos vaiko tvirtinimo sistemos sėdynėje, prieš kurią įrengta AKTYVI

ORO PAGALVĖ, nes VAIKAS GALI

ŽŪTI arba RIMTAI SUSIŽALOTI.

LV: NEKĀDĀ GADĪJUMĀ neizmantojiet uz aizmuguri vērstu bērnu sēdeklīti sēdvietā, kas tiek aizsargāta ar tās priekšā uzstādītu AKTĪVU

DROŠĪBAS SPILVENU, jo pretējā gadījumā BĒRNS var gūt SMAGAS

TRAUMAS vai IET BOJĀ.

ET: ÄRGE kasutage tahapoole suunatud lapseturvaistet istmel, mille ees on AKTIIVSE TURVAPADJAGA kaitstud iste, sest see võib põhjustada

LAPSE SURMA või TÕSISE

VIGASTUSE.

MT: QATT tuża trażżin għat-tfal li jħares lejn in-naħa ta’ wara fuq sit protett b’AIRBAG ATTIV quddiemu; dan jista’ jikkawża l-MEWT jew ĠRIEĦI SERJI lit-

TFAL.

GA: Ná húsáid srian sábháilteachta linbh cúil RIAMH ar shuíochán a bhfuil mála aeir ag feidhmiú os a chomhair. Tá baol BÁIS nó GORTÚ DONA don

PHÁISTE ag baint leis.

Additionally, for safety reasons a forward-facing child restraint system must only be used subject to the instructions and restrictions in the table

3 44.

The airbag label is located on both sides of the front passenger sun visor.

Airbag deactivation 3 40.

Front airbag system

The front airbag system consists of one airbag in the steering wheel and one in the roof on the front passenger side.

These can be identified by the word

AIRBAG .

The front airbag system is triggered in the event of a front-end impact of a certain severity. The ignition must be switched on.

The inflated airbags cushion the impact, thereby reducing the risk of injury to the upper body and head of the front seat occupants considerably.

9 WARNING

Optimum protection is only provided when the seat is in the proper position.

Seat position 3 27.

Keep the area in which the airbag inflates clear of obstructions.

Fit the seat belt correctly and engage securely. Only then is the airbag able to protect.

Side airbag system

The side airbag system consists of an airbag in each front seat backrest. This can be identified by the word AIRBAG .

The side airbag system is triggered in the event of a side impact of a certain severity. The ignition must be switched on.

The inflated airbags cushion the impact, thereby reducing the risk of injury to the upper body and pelvis in the event of a side-on collision considerably.

9 WARNING

Keep the area in which the airbag inflates clear of obstructions.

Note

Only use protective seat covers that have been approved for the vehicle. Be careful not to cover the airbags.

Curtain airbag system

The curtain airbag system consists of an airbag in the roof frame on each side. This can be identified by the word AIRBAG on the roof pillars.

The curtain airbag system is triggered in the event of a side-on impact of a certain severity. The ignition must be switched on.

39

Child restraint installation locations

3 44.

9 DANGER

Deactivate passenger airbag only in combination with the use of a child restraint system, subject to the instructions and restrictions in the table

3 44.

Otherwise, there is a risk of fatal injury for a person occupying a seat with a deactivated front passenger airbag.

The inflated airbags cushion the impact, thereby reducing the risk of injury to the head in the event of a side-on impact considerably.

9 WARNING

Keep the area in which the airbag inflates clear of obstructions.

The hooks on the handles in the roof frame are only suitable for hanging up light articles of clothing, without coat hangers.

Do not keep any items in these clothes.

Airbag deactivation

The front passenger airbag system must be deactivated for child restraint system on the passenger seat according to the instructions in the table. The side airbag and curtain airbag systems, the belt pretensioners and all driver airbag systems will remain active.

40

The front passenger airbag system can be deactivated via a key-operated switch on the passenger side of the instrument panel.

Use the ignition key to choose the position:

OFF * : front passenger airbag is deactivated and will not inflate in the event of a collision, control indicator OFF * illuminates continuously in the centre console

ON Ó : front passenger airbag is active

If the control indicator Ó illuminates for approx. 60 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the front passenger airbag system will inflate in the event of a collision.

If the control indicator * illuminates after the ignition is switched on, the front passenger airbag system is deactivated.

It stays on while the airbag is deactivated.

If both control indicators are illuminated at the same time, there is a system failure. The status of the system is not discernible, therefore no person is allowed to occupy the front passenger seat. Contact a workshop immediately.

Consult a workshop immediately if neither of the two control indicators are illuminated.

In the event of a fault a warning message is displayed in the Driver Information

Centre and warning chime will sound.

Change status only when the vehicle is stopped with the ignition off.

Status remains until the next change.

Control indicator for airbag deactivation

3 76.

CHILD RESTRAINTS

Child restraint systems

9 DANGER

Make sure that children below sufficient size and weight are protected using a suitable child restraint system. Never place a child on the lap.

9 DANGER

If using a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the airbag system for the front passenger seat must be deactivated. This also applies to certain forward-facing child restraint systems as indicated in the tables 3 44.

Airbag deactivation 3 40.

Airbag label 3 36.

We recommend a child restraint system which is tailored specifically to the vehicle.

In case of any interference of the child restraint system with vehicle seat head restraint, adjust or remove the corresponding head restraint 3 26.

When a child restraint system is being used, pay attention to the following usage and installation instructions and also those supplied with the child restraint system. The given restrictions in the table refer to a test body, which is the maximum envelope of all existing child restraint systems. Make sure that the front seats do not interfere with the used child restraint system.

Always comply with local or national regulations. In some countries, the use of child restraint systems is forbidden on certain seats.

Only drive with the driver seat correctly adjusted 3 27.

Child restraint systems can be fastened with:

● Three-point seat belt

● ISOFIX brackets

● Top-tether

Three-point seat belt

Child restraint systems can be fastened by using a three-point seat belt. After fastening the child restraint system the seat belt has to be tightened.

41

ISOFIX brackets i-Size child seats and vehicle seats with i-Size approval are marked with i-Size symbol, see illustration.

Top-tether anchors

Top-tether anchors are marked with the symbol : for a child seat.

Fasten vehicle-approved ISOFIX child restraint systems to the ISOFIX brackets.

Specific vehicle ISOFIX child restraint system positions are marked in the

ISOFIX table 3 44.

The ISOFIX brackets are located below the i-Size symbol in the seat cover.

An i-Size child restraint system is an universal ISOFIX child restraint system according UN Regulation No. 129.

All i-Size child restraint systems can be used on any vehicle seat suitable for i-Size, i-Size table 3 44.

Either a Top-tether strap or a support leg must be used in addition to the ISOFIX brackets.

A support leg must be placed firmly on the floor. Positioning the support leg in a footwell storage is not permitted.

42

In addition to the ISOFIX brackets, fasten the Top-tether strap to the Top-tether anchors.

Third row seats 3 32.

ISOFIX child restraint systems of universal category positions are marked in the table 3 44.

Selecting the right system

The rear seats are the most convenient location to fasten a child restraint system.

Children should travel facing rearwards in the vehicle as long as possible. This makes sure that the child's backbone, which is still very weak, is under less strain in the event of an accident. Do not use forward facing child restraint system at all seats when child's weight is below

13 kg.

Suitable are child restraint systems that comply with valid UN ECE regulations.

Check local laws and regulations for mandatory use of child restraint systems.

The following child restraints are recommended for the following weight classes:

● Group 0+: Römer Baby-Safe Plus with ISOFIX base for children up to

13 kg

● Group I: Römer Duo Plus ISOFIX with ISOFIX and Top-tether for children from 9 kg to 18 kg

● Group II, Group III: Römer Kidfix XP with or without ISOFIX for children from 15 kg to 36 kg

● Group III: Graco Booster for children from 22 kg to 36 kg

Ensure that the child restraint system to be installed is compatible with the vehicle type.

Child seat at the front: Adjust the front passenger seat to the highest and fully back longitudinal position with the backrest straightened.

Child seat at the rear: Move the vehicle's front seat forward and straighten the backrest so that the legs of the child in the forward facing or the rearward facing child seat do not touch the vehicle's front seat.

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions to install the corresponding child restraint system in the vehicle.

For semi-universal or vehicle specific child restraint system (ISOFIX or belted child restraint system), see the vehicle list provided in the user manual of the child restraint system.

Ensure that the mounting location of the child restraint system within the vehicle is correct, see following table.

Allow children to enter and exit the vehicle only on the side facing away from the traffic.

When the child restraint system is not in use, secure the seat with a seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.

Note

Do not affix anything on the child restraint systems and do not cover them with any other materials.

A child restraint system which has been subjected to stress in an accident must be replaced.

43

Child restraint installation locations

Installation of universal, ISOFIX and i-Size child seats

As required by European regulations, this table gives the options for installing child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved as well as the larger ISOFIX and i-Size child seats on seat positions equipped with ISOFIX mountings in the vehicle.

Yes : Suitable for fitment of the designated category of the child restraint system.

No : Not suitable for fitment of the designated category of the child restraint system.

Position compatible with a universal child seat

1)

Front passenger seat Second row outer seats Second row centre seat Third row seats

Yes 2) 3) 4) 5) Yes 6) 7) Yes Yes 6) 7)

Position compatible with an i-Size child seat No

Position equipped with a top-tether fixing

Carrycot type of child seat

Rearward facing ISOFIX child seat

No

No

No

Forward facing ISOFIX child seat

Booster child seat

No

No

Yes

Yes

No

R3 6) 7)

F3 6) 7)

B3 6) 8)

Yes

Yes

No

R3 6) 7)

F3 6) 7)

B3 6) 8)

No

No

No

No

No

No

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

Universal child seat: chiId seat that can be installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.

To install a rearward facing child seat at this seat position, the front passenger's airbag must be deactivated OFF.

Only a forward facing child seat is authorised at this seat position with the front passenger's airbag activated ON.

Move the vehicle seat forwards as far as necessary and adjust the seat backrest as far as necessary to a vertical position to ensure that the belt runs forwards from the upper anchorage point.

Adjust the seat backrest as far as necessary to a vertical position to ensure that the seat belt is tight on the buckle side.

Move the respective front seat ahead of the child restraint system forwards as far as necessary.

Adjust the respective headrest as necessary or remove if required.

Adjust the seat backrest of the respective seat ahead of the child restraint system as far as necessary to a vertical position to have enough space for the feet of the child.

Rules:

● A position that is i-Size compatible is also compatible for R1, R2 and F2X, F2, B2.

● A position that is R3 compatible is also compatible for R1, R2 and R2X.

44

● A position that is R2 compatible is also compatible for R1.

● A position that is F3 compatible is also compatible for F2X and F2.

● A position that is B3 compatible is also compatible for B2.

Size of child restraint fixture (1, 2, 3):

● R1 means rearward facing child restraint fixture for mass group 0 up to 10 kg and mass group 0+ up to 13 kg, age around 0-1 year.

● R2 means reduced size of rearward facing child restraint fixture for mass group 0+ up to 13 kg and mass group 1 from 9 to 18 kg, age around 2-4 years.

● R3 means full size of rearward facing child restraint fixture for mass group 0+ up to 13 kg and mass group 1 from 9 to 18 kg, age around 2-4 years.

● F2, F2X mean reduced height of forward facing child restraint fixture for mass group 1 from 9 to 18 kg, age around 6-7 years.

● F3 means full height of forward facing child restraint fixture for mass group 1 from 9 to 18 kg, age around 7-10 years.

45

STORAGE

STORAGE COMPARTMENTS

Storage compartments .................... 46

Glovebox ....................................... 46

Cupholders .................................... 46

Front storage ................................. 47

Overhead console .......................... 48

Underseat storage ......................... 48

Centre console storage .................. 49

Footwell storage ............................ 49

Load compartment .......................... 49

Ladder flap .................................... 49

Load compartment cover ............... 50

Lashing eyes .................................. 52

Cargo management system ........... 52

Safety net ...................................... 53

Load compartment grille ................ 54

Warning triangle ............................. 57

First aid kit ..................................... 57

Roof rack system ............................. 57

Roof rack ....................................... 57

Loading information ......................... 58

Overload indicator .......................... 58

9 WARNING

Do not store heavy or sharp objects in the storage compartments. Otherwise vehicle occupants could be injured by objects being thrown around in the event of hard braking, a sudden change in direction or an accident.

Glovebox

To open the glovebox pull the handle.

The glovebox should be closed whilst driving.

Cupholders

Front cupholder

Cup holders are located at the sides of the instrument panel.

Cupholders may be located in the centre console.

46

Rear cupholder Front storage

Additional cup holders may be located in the foldaway tables on the backrests of the front seats. Fold up the table.

Do not place any hard or heavy objects on the table.

A storage compartment is located on top of the instrument panel.

Some versions have a CD player, a USB, a glovebox cooler and AUX socket in the storage compartment.

A coin holder is located on the instrument panel.

Folding the centre seatback

Cupholders for the third row seats are located in the sides of the load compartment.

A storage compartment is located above the Instrument cluster.

The front centre passenger seat backrest has a document tray.

Seat folding 3 29.

47

9 WARNING

When the front centre passenger seat is in the folded position, the front passenger airbag system must be deactivated.

Airbag deactivation 3 40.

Overhead console

Close whilst driving. The maximum permitted load is 10 kg.

Store only lightweight items such as paperwork or maps.

The separation of the four compartments can be taken out.

The maximum permitted load is 6 kg.

9 WARNING

Secure objects to prevent them from falling out and causing injury.

Pull handle to open.

Close whilst driving. The maximum permitted load is 10 kg.

Underseat storage

Slide the flaps to open.

48

There may be a storage box under the centre bench seat. Lift up the seat cushion by pulling the handle. The storage box can be locked by a padlock.

Centre console storage

A storage box may be located in the centre console. Press cover to open.

A 12 V power outlet is located behind the storage cover.

Footwell storage

The footwell storages can be accessed from the rear seats.

Vehicle tools may be located in the stowage compartments underneath the front seats 3 234.

LOAD COMPARTMENT

Depending on version, the load compartment area can be increased by folding up or removing the third row seats. The seat backrests of the second row can be folded forward separately.

Additionally, the backrest of the passenger seat can be folded.

Depending on the loading, only single seats or backrests can be folded.

Folding passenger seat 3 29

Folding second row seats 3 31

Folding or removing third row seats

3 31

Ladder flap

The ladder flap is available for transporting long loads.

Opening the ladder flap

Depending on version, there are two stowage compartments in the rear footwell.

49

1. Press the lever and disengage the spring clip from the retainer by pulling.

2. Lift the ladder flap.

3. Move past the point of resistance to lock the ladder flap with the props.

Support bar

Rest long loads on the support bar.

1. Push the lever to the top.

2. Push the support bar a bit to the front and then guide it down to the door pillar.

3. Hold the long load in the angled position.

4. Move the support bar below the load to its original position. Fix it by pressing the lever downwards past the point of resistance.

The rear doors will only lock when the support bar is installed.

5. Secure the loads firmly. The side supports can be used as hooking points.

Closing the ladder flap

1. Check that the support bar is properly locked.

2. Lower the ladder flap.

3. Fix the spring clip in its retainer.

Load compartment cover

Rear luggage cover

Do not place any objects on the cover.

Closing the cover

Pull the load compartment cover towards the rear and engage it in the side brackets.

Opening the cover

Remove load compartment cover from side brackets. Guide the cover until it is fully rolled up.

50

Removing the cover

Open the load compartment cover.

Compress the load compartment cover at one side and lift it up. Remove the load compartment cover.

Stowing in the load compartment

If the load compartment cover is not used, stow it in the load compartment. It can be stowed behind the second or third row seats.

Fitting the cover

Insert the load compartment cover into the recess at one side. Compress the cover at the other side and engage it in the recess.

Rear parcel shelf

Do not place any excessively heavy or sharp-edged objects on the rear parcel shelf. The maximum load permissible is

25 kg. With high loads install the safety net behind the rear seats 3 53.

Installing the rear parcel shelf

Lifting the rear parcel shelf

The rear parcel shelf may be folded up from the rear, allowing greater flexibility in the load compartment.

Stowing in the load compartment

The rear parcel shelf can be installed in two positions.

Fit the parcel shelf by engaging in the retainers on both sides.

Set up the folded cover upright behind the rear seat backrests.

51

Lashing eyes Removing the flap

The lashing eyes are designed to secure items against slippage, e.g. using lashing straps or luggage net.

The maximum force applied to the lashing eyes should not exceed

500 daN / 5 kN / 5000 N.

Depending on country, the maximum force may be shown on a label.

Note

Specifications on the label always have priority over those given in this manual.

Cargo management system

Depending on version, a partition behind the front seats protects the driver and front passengers against the risk of load movement.

There may be a flap in the partition behind the passenger seat which can be removed to accommodate long objects.

A protective cover is provided in the vehicle to assure safe transportation.

If the outer passenger seat backrest is folded down and the partition flap is open, the centre seat has to stay free.

Lashing eyes may be located on the vehicle floor and / or in the sidewall. The number and location of the lashing eyes may vary depending on the vehicle.

52

1. Release the locking device, lower the flap and then remove it.

2. Stow the flap behind the driver’s seat.

Turn the locking device upwards. Put the hinges of the flap in their housing, lift the flap and close the locking device.

Fitting the protective cover

The protective cover must be installed whenever the outer passenger seat backrest is folded down and the partition flap is open.

1. Fold the outer passenger seat backrest 3 29.

Installation

Behind the rear seats

2. Attach the four snap hooks of the cover on the corresponding lashing eye.

3. Pull the head restraint from the folded backrest, leaving two notches visible on the head restraint rod 3 26.

4. Load the objects.

5. Pass the strap of the cover around the head restraint. Tension the strap by pulling at the loose end.

With fitted protective cover the maximum load on the folded backrest is 100 kg.

Safety net

Depending on version, the safety net can be installed behind the rear seats or, if the rear seat backrests are folded, behind the front seats.

Passengers must not be transported behind the safety net.

● There are installation openings on both sides in the roof frame above the rear seats. Open the covers and suspend and engage rod of net at one side, compress rod and suspend and engage at the other side.

53

● Attach the hooks of safety net straps in the lashing eyes behind the rear seats.

Tension both straps by pulling at the loose end.

● Rear seat backrests must be raised up.

Behind the front seats

Load compartment grille

● There are installation openings on both sides in the roof frame above the front seats. Open the covers and suspend and engage rod of net at one side, compress rod and suspend and engage at the other side.

● Wind one strap around the bar located under the front driver seat cushion. The other one wind around the bar of the passenger seat. Then secure each hook to the corresponding strap.

Tension both straps by pulling at the loose end.

● Push down head restraints and fold down rear seat backrests 3 49.

Depending on version a partition protects the driver and passengers against the risk of load movement.

The partition can be placed behind the front or rear seats.

54

Moving the partition

There is a flap in the partition which can be opened to accommodate long objects. A protective cover is provided in the vehicle to assure safe transportation.

If the side seat backrest is folded down and the partition flap is open the centre seat has to stay free.

If the backrest of the rear seat is lowered and the flap open to transport long objects, the front passenger seat has to stay free.

1. Release the four locking devices on the top and the bottom of the partition.

2. To be placed behind the front seats fold down the rear seat backrests

3 31

9 WARNING

Take care when operating the bottom locking devices. Risk of pinching.

Opening the flap

1. Depending on the positioning of the partition and the length of the load fold down the outer rear seat backrest and / or passenger seat backrest 3 29, 31

2. Release the locking device of the flap and open the flap.

3. Move the partition and lock the four locking devices on the top and the bottom.

55

Fitting the protective cover

The protective cover must be installed whenever the side seat backrest is folded down and the partition flap is open.

3. Secure the flap with the rod.

Closing the flap

1. Fix the rod in the bracket.

2. Close the flap and lock the locking device.

3. Restore the seats to the upright position 3 29, 31

56

1. Attach the four snap hooks of the cover on the corresponding lashing eye.

2. Pull the head restraint from the folded backrest, leaving two notches visible on the head restraint rod 3 26.

3. Load the objects.

4. Pass the strap of the cover around the head restraint. Tension the strap by pulling at the loose end.

If the loading is stored on the front and rear seat at the passenger side pass one strap on each head restraint.

With fitted protective cover the maximum load on each of the folded backrests is

100 kg.

Warning triangle

Depending on version, the warning triangle can be stowed in the load compartment. Secure it with the elastic straps.

First aid kit

ROOF RACK SYSTEM

Roof rack

For safety reasons and to avoid damage to the roof, the vehicle approved roof rack system is recommended. For further information contact your workshop.

Follow the installation instructions and remove the roof rack when not in use.

Mounting roof rack

Vehicles with roof railing

Vehicles without roof railing

To fasten a roof rack, unscrew the caps in the roof strips. Insert the mounting provisions, as instructed, in the retainer.

Depending on version, the first aid kit can be stowed in the load compartment.

Mounting points are located at the bottom of the roof railing.

Fasten the roof rack according to the installation instructions delivered with the roof rack.

57

LOADING INFORMATION

● Heavy objects in the load compartment should be placed against the seat backrests. Make sure that the backrests are securely engaged. If objects can be stacked, heavier objects should be placed at the bottom.

● Prevent sliding of loose objects by securing them with straps attached to the lashing eyes 3 52.

● Do not allow the load to protrude above the upper edge of the backrests.

● Do not place any objects on the rear luggage cover or the instrument panel, and do not cover the sensor on top of the instrument panel.

● The load must not obstruct the operation of the pedals, parking brake and gear selector, or hinder

58 the freedom of movement of the driver. Do not place any unsecured objects in the interior.

● Do not drive with an open load compartment.

9 WARNING

Always make sure that the load in the vehicle is securely stowed. Otherwise objects can be thrown around inside the vehicle and cause personal injury or damage to the load or car.

● The payload is the difference between the permitted gross vehicle weight (see identification plate

3 267) and the EC kerb weight.

To calculate the payload, enter the data for your vehicle in the weights table at the front of this manual.

The EC kerb weight includes weights for the driver (68 kg), luggage (7 kg) and all fluids (fuel tank 90% full).

Optional equipment and accessories increase the kerb weight.

● Driving with a roof load increases the sensitivity of the vehicle to crosswinds and has a detrimental effect on vehicle handling due to the vehicle's higher centre of gravity.

Distribute the load evenly and secure it properly with retaining straps.

Adjust the tyre pressure and vehicle speed according to the load conditions. Check and retighten the straps frequently.

Do not drive faster than 120 km/h /

75 mph.

The permissible roof load is:

● 80 kg for vehicles with roof railing

● 100 kg for vehicles without roof railing and with two roof racks

● 150 kg for vehicles without roof railing and with three roof racks, except vehicles with seven seats

● 100 kg for vehicles without roof railing and with three roof racks and seven seats

The roof load is the combined weight of the roof rack and the load.

Overload indicator

The overload indicator checks whether the vehicle is overloaded. The function is designed to help avoiding overload and the consequent risks such as unstable road behaviour, tyre blowout, premature wear etc.

If an overcharge is imminent, ON and

% are illuminated.

If the vehicle is overloaded, ON , % and

& are illuminated. In addition, & is illuminated in the instrument cluster.

Activation

Note

For optimal operation, park the vehicle on a horizontal surface.

Do not park the vehicle on a slope.

Do not park the vehicle with the wheels on the pavement.

The system is activated automatically each time the engine is started. In addition, the system can be activated manually by pressing ON in the loading area. After activation, the system operates for five minutes.

59

INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Instrument panel overview ................ 61

Controls ........................................... 65

Steering wheel adjustment ............. 65

Steering wheel controls .................. 65

Horn .............................................. 65

Pedestrian safety alert .................... 65

Windscreen wiper and washer ....... 66

Rear window wiper and washer ..... 67

Outside temperature ...................... 67

Clock ............................................. 67

Power outlets ................................. 68

Inductive charging .......................... 69

Cigarette lighter ............................. 69

Ashtrays ........................................ 70

Warning lights, gauges and indicators .................................................. 70

Speedometer ................................. 70

Odometer ...................................... 70

Trip odometer ................................ 70

Tachometer ................................... 71

Fuel gauge ..................................... 71

High voltage battery gauge ............ 71

Power indicator gauge ................... 72

Comfort consumption gauge ......... 72

Engine coolant temperature gauge ........................................... 72

Engine oil level monitor .................. 73

Service display ............................... 73

Control indicators .......................... 74

Turn lights ...................................... 75

60

Seat belt reminder ......................... 75

Airbag and belt tensioners ............. 76

Airbag deactivation ........................ 76

Charging system ............................ 76

Malfunction indicator light .............. 77

Service vehicle soon ...................... 77

Stop engine ................................... 77

System check ................................ 77

Brake and clutch system ................ 77

Parking brake ................................ 77

Electric parking brake .................... 77

Electric parking brake fault ............. 78

Antilock brake system (ABS) .......... 78

Gear shifting .................................. 78

Overload indicator .......................... 78

Descent control system ................. 78

Lane keep assist ............................ 78

Electronic Stability Control and

Traction Control system ................ 78

Engine coolant temperature ........... 79

Preheating ..................................... 79

Exhaust filter .................................. 79

AdBlue ........................................... 79

Deflation detection system ............. 79

Engine oil pressure ........................ 79

Low fuel ......................................... 80

Charging cable connected ............. 80

Vehicle ready ................................. 80

Reduced engine power .................. 80

Autostop ........................................ 80

Exterior light ................................... 80

Low beam ..................................... 80

High beam ..................................... 80

High beam assist ........................... 80

LED headlights .............................. 80

Front fog lights ............................... 80

Rear fog light ................................. 80

Rain sensor .................................... 80

Cruise control ................................ 80

Adaptive cruise control .................. 81

Pedestrian safety alert fault ............ 81

Side blind spot alert ....................... 81

Active emergency braking .............. 81

Speed limiter .................................. 81

Door open ..................................... 81

Displays ........................................... 81

Driver Information Centre ............... 81

Info Display .................................... 84

Head-up display ............................ 86

Rear view display ........................... 87

Vehicle messages ............................ 88

Warning chimes ............................. 88

Vehicle personalisation ..................... 89

Telematics services .......................... 90

Emergency call .............................. 90

Fiat Connect .................................. 90

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

61

1 Electric child locks ..................... 12

Unlocking tailgate ...................... 15

Child safety system for rear windows .................................... 22

2 Power windows ......................... 22

3 Exterior mirrors .......................... 19

4 Side air vents .......................... 155

5 Steering wheel controls ............ 65

6 Turn lights ................................. 93

Headlight flash .......................... 92

High beam ................................ 92

High beam assist ...................... 92

Exit lighting ............................... 96

Parking lights ............................. 94

7 Instruments .............................. 70

Driver Information Centre ........... 81

8 Steering wheel controls ............ 65

9 Head-up display ........................ 86

10 Windscreen wiper and washer, rear wiper and washer ..................................... 66

Button for Driver Information

Centre ....................................... 81

11 Air vents ................................. 155

12 Info Display .............................. 84

13 Hazard warning flashers ........... 93

Central locking system ................ 9

14 Sun sensor .............................. 149

15 USB charging port ................... 68

16 Storage ..................................... 46

17 Glovebox .................................. 46

18 Climate control system ............ 147

19 Electronic Stability Control and Traction Control ................ 175

Eco mode ............................... 171

Descent control system ........... 176

20 Selective ride control ............... 177

21 Inductive charging ..................... 69

22 Manual transmission ............... 171

Automatic transmission .......... 168

Electric drive unit .................... 167

Drive modes ........................... 172

23 Power outlet .............................. 68

24 Electric parking brake .............. 173

25 Power button .......................... 158

26 Ignition switch ......................... 158

27 Steering wheel adjustment ....... 65

28 Infotainment control

29 Horn ......................................... 65

30 Head-up display ........................ 86

31 Cruise control ......................... 178

Speed limiter ........................... 181

Adaptive cruise control ............ 178

32 Bonnet release lever ............... 222

33 Fuse box

34 Parking assist / Advanced parking assist ......................... 191

Electric child locks ..................... 12

Eco button for stop-start system .................................... 161

Lane keep assist ..................... 203

Tyre deflation detection system .................................... 236

Heated windscreen ................... 24

Parking heater ......................... 152

35 Headlight range adjustment ....... 92

62

INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

63

1 Electric child locks ..................... 12

Unlocking tailgate ...................... 15

Child safety system for rear windows .................................... 22

2 Power windows ......................... 22

3 Exterior mirrors .......................... 19

4 Side air vents .......................... 155

5 Steering wheel controls ............ 65

6 Turn lights ................................. 93

Headlight flash .......................... 92

High beam ................................ 92

High beam assist ...................... 92

Exit lighting ............................... 96

Parking lights ............................. 94

7 Instruments .............................. 70

Driver Information Centre ........... 81

8 Steering wheel controls ............ 65

9 Head-up display ........................ 86

10 Windscreen wiper and washer, rear wiper and washer ..................................... 66

Button for Driver Information

Centre ....................................... 81

11 Air vents ................................. 155

12 Info Display .............................. 84

13 Hazard warning flashers ........... 93

Central locking system ................ 9

14 Sun sensor .............................. 149

15 USB charging port ................... 68

16 Storage ..................................... 46

18 Climate control system ............ 147

19 Electronic Stability Control and Traction Control ................ 175

Eco mode ............................... 171

Descent control system ........... 176

20 Selective ride control ............... 177

21 Inductive charging ..................... 69

22 Manual transmission ............... 171

Automatic transmission .......... 168

Electric drive unit .................... 167

Drive modes ........................... 172

23 Power outlet .............................. 68

24 Electric parking brake .............. 173

25 Power button .......................... 158

26 Ignition switch ......................... 158

27 Steering wheel adjustment ....... 65

28 Infotainment controls

29 Horn ......................................... 65

30 Head-up display ........................ 86

31 Cruise control ......................... 178

Speed limiter ........................... 181

Adaptive cruise control ............ 178

32 Bonnet release lever ............... 222

33 Fuse box

34 Parking assist / Advanced parking assist ......................... 191

Electric child locks ..................... 12

Eco button for stop-start system .................................... 161

Lane keep assist ..................... 203

Tyre deflation detection system .................................... 236

Heated windscreen ................... 24

Parking heater ......................... 152

35 Headlight range adjustment ....... 92

64

CONTROLS

Steering wheel adjustment

Steering wheel controls Horn

Unlock lever, adjust steering wheel, then engage lever and ensure it is fully locked.

Do not adjust steering wheel unless vehicle is stationary and steering wheel lock has been released.

Voice control, volume and display mode can be operated via the controls on the left side of the steering wheel.

Infotainment system can be operated via the controls on the right side of the steering wheel.

Further information is available in the

Infotainment manual.

Press j .

Pedestrian safety alert

The sound of the pedestrian safety alert is generated to indicate the vehicle presence to pedestrians. It is active up to

30 km/h / 19 mph.

65

Windscreen wiper and washer

Windscreen wiper with interval wiping

Windscreen wiper with rain sensor Do not use if the windscreen is frozen.

Switch off in car washes.

Windscreen washer

2 : fast

1 : slow

INT : interval wiping

0 : off

For a single wipe when the windscreen wiper is off, press the lever down.

Do not use if the windscreen is frozen.

Switch off in car washes.

To activate interval wiping mode the next time ignition is switched on, press the lever downwards to position 0 and back to INT .

2

1

0

: fast

: slow

INT : interval wiping

: off

AUTO : automatic wiping with rain sensor

In AUTO position, the rain sensor detects the amount of water on the windscreen and automatically regulates the frequency of the windscreen wiper.

To deactivate the automatic wiping mode, press the lever downwards to

AUTO again.

If ignition is switched off for more than a minute, automatic wiping mode is deactivated. To activate automatic wiping mode the next time ignition is switched on, press the lever downwards to AUTO again.

For a single wipe when the windscreen wiper is off, pull the lever briefly.

66

Pull lever. Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windscreen and the wiper wipes a few times.

Washer fluid 3 224.

Functionality of the rain sensor

Keep the sensor free from dust, dirt and ice.

Control indicator y 3 66.

Rear window wiper and washer

Rear window wiper

Rear window washer

0 : off

S : intermittent operation

R : rear window washer

Do not use if the rear window is frozen.

Switch off in car washes.

The rear window wiper comes on automatically when the windscreen wiper is switched on and reverse gear is engaged.

Activation or deactivation of this function can be changed in the Vehicle personalisation menu 3 89.

Set to R .

Washer fluid is sprayed onto the rear window and the wiper wipes a few times.

The rear window washer system is deactivated when the fluid level is low.

Washer fluid 3 224.

Outside temperature

A drop in temperature is indicated immediately and a rise in temperature after a time delay.

Illustration shows an example.

If outside temperature drops to 3 °C, a warning message is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre.

9 WARNING

The road surface may already be icy even though the display indicates a few degrees above 0 °C.

Clock

Date and time are shown in the Info

Display.

The adjustment of date and time is described in the Infotainment Manual.

Without infotainment system:

● press and hold F or SET 000

● select the setting to be changed with

+ or -

● briefly press F or SET 000

67

● adjust the setting with + or -

● briefly press F or SET 000

Info Display 3 84.

Power outlets

A 12 V power outlet is located behind the storage cover. Push cover upwards to open.

Depending on the version, the 12 V power outlet may be freely accessible.

At the right side of the load compartment, another 12 V power outlet may be located.

Do not exceed the maximum power consumption of 120 W.

Do not exceed the maximum power consumption of 150 W.

With ignition off, the power outlets are deactivated. Additionally the power outlets are deactivated in the event of low vehicle battery voltage.

Electrical accessories that are connected must comply with the electromagnetic compatibility requirements laid down in

DIN VDE 40 839.

Do not connect any current-delivering accessories, e.g. electrical charging devices or batteries.

Do not damage the outlet by using unsuitable plugs.

Stop-start system 3 161.

USB ports

A 230 V power outlet may be located on the lower side of the centre console in the front passenger compartment.

A USB port is located in the instrument panel next to the Info Display.

68

9 WARNING

Remove any metal objects from the charging device before charging a mobile device, as these objects could become very hot.

Charging status is indicated in the LED: illuminates green, when mobile device is charging.

Protective cover for the mobile device could have impact on the inductive charging.

In the event that the mobile device is not charging properly, rotate it 180° and place it on the charging device again.

Cigarette lighter

A further USB port may be located in the rear console.

The USB ports are prepared for charging external devices and provide a data connection to the Infotainment system.

For further information, see Infotainment manual.

Note

The sockets must always be kept clean and dry.

Inductive charging

9 WARNING

Inductive charging can affect the operation of implanted pacemakers or other medical devices. If applicable, seek medical advice before using the inductive charging device.

The portable device to be charged must be compatible with the Qi standard, either by design or by using a compatible holder or shell. The charging zone is identified by the Qi symbol.

To charge a device, the ignition must be switched on.

To charge a mobile device:

1. Remove all objects from the charging device.

2. Place the mobile device with the display facing upwards on the charging device in the storage.

The cigarette lighter is freely accessible.

Depending on version, the cigarette lighter may be located behind the storage cover. Press cover to open.

Press in cigarette lighter. It switches off automatically once the element is glowing. Pull out cigarette lighter.

69

Ashtrays

CAUTION

To be used only for ash and not for combustible rubbish.

WARNING LIGHTS, GAUGES AND

INDICATORS

Speedometer

Odometer

The total recorded distance is displayed in km or miles.

Driver Information Centre

A portable ashtray can be placed in the cupholders.

Depending on version there are different variants.

Trip odometer

The recorded distance since the last reset is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre.

Indicates vehicle speed.

Depending on version there are different variants.

70

Depending on version, press L ,

F or SET 000 for two seconds to reset trip odometer.

The trip / fuel information menu provides additionally two trip counter 3 81.

Tachometer

The arrow indicates the vehicle side where the fuel filler flap is located.

Because of the fuel remaining in the tank, the top-up quantity may be less than the specified tank capacity.

Baselevel cluster

Midlevel and uplevel instrument cluster

If the control indicator 2 illuminates yellow, refuel the tank immediately.

High voltage battery gauge

Displays the engine speed.

Drive in a low engine speed range for each gear as much as possible.

CAUTION

If the needle is beyond the red marker, the maximum permitted engine speed is exceeded. Engine at risk.

Fuel gauge

Displays the fuel level in the tank.

Never run the fuel tank dry.

A scale consisting of segments shows the fuel level.

If the control indicator r

illuminates yellow, refuel the tank immediately.

Depending on version there are different variants.

71

Comfort consumption gauge

Displays the high voltage battery state of charge.

Power indicator gauge

The power indicator gauge informs about the current energy situation of the vehicle.

Charge : Battery is being charged with energy resulting from braking

Eco or deceleration of the vehicle

: An optimum in energy is accessible in all driving modes

Power : Vehicle is driven in a dynamic driving style with focus on performance

Depending on version there are different variants.

The comfort consumption gauge informs about the current electric consumption caused by the following thermal consumers:

● heating

● air conditioning

● heated windscreen

● heated rear window

● heated seats

If the drive mode Eco mode is selected, the performance of the thermal consumers is reduced. The needle of the comfort consumption gauge is in the

ECO zone.

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the coolant temperature.

72

CAUTION

If engine coolant temperature is too high, stop vehicle, switch off engine. Danger to engine. Check coolant level.

Baselevel cluster

A scale consisting of segments shows the engine coolant temperature.

If the engine coolant temperature is too high, the control indicator V illuminates red.

Switch off engine immediately.

Midlevel and uplevel instrument cluster

70 °C : engine operating temperature not yet reached

90 °C : normal operating temperature red zone : temperature too high

Control indicator 2 illuminates if coolant temperature is too high.

Switch off engine immediately.

Engine oil level monitor

The state of the engine oil level is displayed in the Driver Information Centre for a few seconds following the service information after switching on the ignition.

A proper state of engine oil level is confirmed.

If engine oil level is low, T flashes and warning message is indicated in the

Driver Information Centre. Depending on the version, D flashes in the Driver

Information Centre. Confirm engine oil level by using the oil dipstick and top up engine oil respectively.

Engine oil 3 223.

A fault of measurement is indicated by

E or a message in the Driver

Information Centre together with T .

Check engine oil level manually by using the dipstick.

Service display

The service system informs when to change the engine oil and filter or a vehicle service is required. Based on driving conditions, the interval at which an engine oil and filter change is required can vary considerably.

Service information 3 251.

A required service due is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre for seven seconds after switching on the ignition.

If no service is required for the next

3000 km / 1800 miles or more no service information appears in the display.

If service is required within the next

3000 km / 1800 miles, A illuminates temporary as reminder. Simultaneously, the remaining distance or time duration is indicated for several seconds.

73

Depending on the version, the distance travelled since the due date is indicated in the Driver Information Centre.

If service is required in less than

1000 km / 600 miles, A flashes and then illuminates permanently. Remaining distance or time duration is indicated for several seconds. Simultaneously, the remaining distance or time duration is indicated for several seconds.

Depending on the version, the distance travelled since the due date is indicated in the Driver Information Centre.

Overdued service is indicated by a message in the Driver Information Centre which indicates the overdued distance.

A flashes and then illuminates permanently until service is executed.

Additionally, the control indicator C or

SERVICE illuminates.

Reset of service interval

After each service, the service indicator must be reset to ensure proper functionality. It is recommended to seek the assistance of a workshop.

If service is executed by yourself, operate as following:

● switch off ignition

● press and hold F , G or

CHECK

● switch on ignition, the distance indication begins a countdown

● when the display indicates =0 , release the button

A disappears

Retrieving service information

To retrieve the status of the service information at any time press F ,

G or CHECK .

The service information is displayed for a few seconds.

Service information 3 251.

Control indicators

The control indicators described are not present in all vehicles. The description applies to all instrument versions.

Depending on the equipment, the position of the control indicators may vary. When the ignition is switched on, most control indicators will illuminate briefly as a functionality test.

The control indicator colours mean: red : danger, important reminder yellow : warning, information, fault green : confirmation of activation blue : confirmation of activation white : confirmation of activation grey : system paused, at least one system limitation has been detected

74

V p

STOP

J

R

Control indicators are located in the

Driver Information Centre.

Driver Information Centre 3 81.

Red warning lights / symbols

X v

Warning light / symbol

Meaning m

W o

I j h

Seat belt reminder

Airbag and belt tensioners

Airbag deactivation

Charging system

Stop engine

System check

Brake and clutch system

Parking brake

Engine coolant temperature high

Engine oil pressure

Charging cable connected

Door open

&

Y o

!

%

Y w

Yellow warning lights / symbols

Warning light / symbol

Z

Meaning

C i

J o

E u

L b

Malfunction indicator light

Service vehicle soon

System check

Electric parking brake

Electric parking brake fault

Antilock brake system (ABS)

Lane keep assist

Electronic Stability

Control and Traction Control system

Overload indicator

Low fuel

Preheating

Exhaust filter

AdBlue

Deflation detection system

Warning light / symbol

M

ø

K

Ø

Meaning

Reduced engine power

Rear fog light

Pedestrian safety alert fault

Active emergency braking

READY

D

8

9 f

>

<

Green warning lights / symbols

Warning light / symbol

O

L

ò

Meaning

Turn lights

Lane keep assist

Descent control system

Vehicle ready

Autostop

Exterior light

Low beam

High beam assist

Front fog light

Rain sensor

B m

Warning light / symbol

Meaning

Side blind spot alert

Cruise control

Blue warning lights / symbols

Warning light / symbol

C

Meaning

High beam

Turn lights

O illuminates or flashes green.

Illuminates briefly

The parking lights are switched on.

Flashes

Turn lights or the hazard warning flashers are activated.

Rapid flashing: failure of a turn light or associated fuse, failure of turn light on trailer.

Bulb replacement 3 228.

Turn lights 3 93.

Seat belt reminder

X illuminates or flashes in the instrument cluster. Additionally, there is an indication in the roof console. The big symbols refer

75

to the seat belts of the front seats, the small symbols refer to the second row rear seats.

● When the ignition is switched on, X in the instrument cluster and the symbols in the roof console come on for a short time. For the front seats,

X in the instrument cluster and the symbols in the roof console illuminate until seat belt is fastened.

● When driving faster than 20 km/h /

12 mph and a seat belt is unfastened, the symbol in the roof console for the respective seat flashes and a chime is audible. For the second row rear seats, this only applies if at least one rear seat belt was previously fastened.

Aditionally, X illuminates in the instrument cluster.

After two minutes the chime goes off and X in the roof console illuminates

76 constantly until the seat belt of the respective seat is fastened.

Airbag and belt tensioners v illuminates red.

When the ignition is switched on, the control indicator illuminates for approx.

four seconds. If it does not illuminate, does not extinguish after four seconds or illuminates whilst driving, there is a fault in the airbag system. Seek the assistance of a workshop. The airbags and belt pretensioners may fail to trigger in the event of an accident.

Deployment of the belt pretensioners or airbags is indicated by continuous illumination of v .

9 WARNING

Have the cause of the fault remedied immediately by a workshop.

Belt pretensioners 3 34.

Airbag system 3 36.

Airbag deactivation

Ó ON illuminates yellow.

The front passenger airbag is activated.

* OFF illuminates yellow.

The front passenger airbag is deactivated.

Airbag deactivation 3 40.

Charging system p illuminates red.

Illuminates when the ignition is switched on and extinguishes shortly after the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine is running

Stop, switch off engine. Vehicle battery is not charging. Engine cooling may be interrupted. The brake servo unit may cease to be effective. Seek the assistance of a workshop.

Malfunction indicator light

Z illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates when the ignition is switched on and extinguishes shortly after the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine is running

Fault in the emission control system. The permitted emission limits may be exceeded. Seek the assistance of a workshop immediately.

Flashes when the engine is running

Fault that could lead to catalytic converter damage. Ease up on the accelerator until the flashing stops. Seek the assistance of a workshop immediately.

Service vehicle soon

C / i illuminates yellow.

C

Illuminates briefly when the ignition is switched on.

May illuminate together with other control indicators and a corresponding message in the Driver Information Centre.

Seek the assistance of a workshop immediately.

i

Illuminates permanently when the ignition is switched on.

A fault of the electric engine or the high voltage battery has been detected.

Seek the assistance of a workshop immediately.

Stop engine

STOP illuminates red.

Illuminates briefly when the ignition is switched on.

Illuminates together with other control indicators, accompanied by a warning chime and a corresponding message in the Driver Information Centre.

Stop engine immediately and seek the assistance of a workshop.

System check

J illuminates yellow or red.

Illuminates yellow

A minor engine fault has been detected.

Illuminates red

A major engine fault has been detected.

Stop engine as soon as possible and seek the assistance of a workshop.

Brake and clutch system

R illuminates red.

The brake and clutch fluid level is too low.

9 WARNING

Stop. Do not continue your journey.

Consult a workshop.

Parking brake m illuminates red.

Illuminates when the manual parking brake is applied and ignition is switched on 3 173.

Electric parking brake m illuminates or flashes red.

Illuminates

Electric parking brake is applied 3 173.

Flashes

Electric parking brake is not applied automatically. The application or the release is faulty.

77

9 WARNING

Have the cause of the fault remedied immediately by a workshop.

o

illuminates yellow.

Illuminates

Automatic operation is deactivated or faulty. Activate automatic operation again or have the cause remedied by a workshop in the event of a fault.

Automatic operation 3 173.

Electric parking brake fault

E illuminates yellow.

Illuminates

Electric parking brake has a fault 3 173.

9 WARNING

Have the cause of the fault remedied immediately by a workshop.

Antilock brake system (ABS) u illuminates yellow.

Illuminates for a few seconds after the ignition is switched on. The system is ready for operation when the control indicator extinguishes.

If the control indicator does not extinguish after a few seconds, or if it illuminates while driving, there is a fault in the ABS. The brake system remains operational but without ABS regulation.

Antilock brake system 3 172.

Gear shifting

R or S with a number beside it is indicated when gearshifting is recommended for fuel saving reasons.

Overload indicator

& illuminates yellow.

Illuminates when the overload indicator detects an exceeding of the maximum authorised weight 3 58.

Descent control system

ò illuminates or flashes green.

Iluminates green

The system is switched on and ready to operate.

Flashes green

The system is in operation.

Lane keep assist a illuminates green or yellow, or flashes yellow.

Illuminates green

The system is switched on and ready to operate.

Illuminates yellow

The system approaches a detected lane marking without using the turn light in that direction.

Flashes yellow

The system recognizes that the lane is departed significantly.

Lane keep assist 3 203.

Electronic Stability Control and

Traction Control system b illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates

A fault in the system is present.

Continued driving is possible. Driving stability, however, may deteriorate depending on road surface conditions.

Have the cause of the fault remedied by a workshop.

Flashes

The system is actively engaged. Engine output may be reduced and the vehicle may be braked automatically to a small degree.

Electronic Stability Control and Traction

Control system 3 175.

78

Selective ride control 3 177.

Engine coolant temperature o illuminates red.

Illuminates when the engine is running

Stop, switch off engine.

CAUTION

Coolant temperature too high.

Check coolant level immediately 3 224.

If there is sufficient coolant, consult a workshop.

Preheating

!

illuminates yellow.

Preheating of diesel engine is activated.

Only activates when outside temperature is low. Start the engine when control indicator extinguishes.

Exhaust filter

% or

C

illuminates yellow, accompanied by a message in the Driver

Information Centre.

The exhaust filter requires cleaning.

Continue driving until the control indicator extinguishes.

Illuminates temporarily

Start of saturation of the exhaust filter.

Start cleaning process as soon as possible by driving at a vehicle speed of at least 60 km/h / 40 mph.

Illuminates constantly

Indication of a low additive level. Seek the assistance of a workshop.

Exhaust filter 3 163.

AdBlue

Y flashes or illuminates yellow.

Illuminates yellow

The remaining driving range is between

800 km / 500 miles and 2400 km /

1500 miles.

Flashes yellow

The remaining driving range is between

0 km / 0 miles and 800 km / 500 miles.

AdBlue level is low. Refill AdBlue soon to avoid prevention of the engine start.

AdBlue 3 164.

Deflation detection system w illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates

Tyre pressure loss in one or more wheels.

Stop immediately and check tyre pressure.

Flashes

Fault in system. Consult a workshop.

Deflation detection system 3 236.

Engine oil pressure

I illuminates red.

Illuminates when the ignition is switched on and extinguishes shortly after the engine starts.

Illuminates when the engine is running

CAUTION

Engine lubrication may be interrupted. This may result in damage to the engine and / or locking of the drive wheels.

1. Select neutral gear.

2. Move out of the flow of traffic as quickly as possible without impeding other vehicles.

3. Switch off ignition.

79

9 WARNING

When the engine is off, considerably more force is needed to brake and steer. During an Autostop the brake servo unit will still be operational.

Do not remove key until vehicle is stationary, otherwise the steering wheel lock could engage unexpectedly.

Keep engine turned off and let the vehicle be towed to a workshop.

Low fuel o illuminates yellow.

Level in fuel tank is too low.

Refuelling 3 214.

Bleeding the diesel fuel system 3 227.

Charging cable connected j illuminates red.

The vehicle plug of the charging cable is still connected to the charge port. The vehicle cannot be started.

Disconnect the vehicle plug from the charge port and close the charge port flap.

Charging 3 207.

Vehicle ready

READY illuminates green. The vehicle is ready to be driven.

80

Reduced engine power

M illuminates yellow.

The charging level of the high voltage battery is low. Only reduced engine power is available.

Autostop

D illuminates or flashes green.

Illuminates green

Engine is in an Autostop.

Flashes green

Autostop is temporarily unavailable, or

Autostop mode is invoked automatically.

Stop-start system 3 161.

Exterior light

8 illuminates green.

The exterior lights are on 3 91.

Low beam

9 illuminates green.

Illuminated when low beam is on.

High beam

C illuminates blue.

Illuminates when high beam is on, during headlight flash 3 92.

High beam assist f illuminates green.

The high beam assist is activated

3 92.

LED headlights

C illuminates and a warning message is displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

Seek the assistance of a workshop.

Front fog lights

> illuminates green.

The front fog lights are on 3 93.

Rear fog light r illuminates yellow.

The rear fog light is on 3 94.

Rain sensor

< illuminates green.

Illuminated when rain sensor position on wiper lever is selected.

Cruise control m illuminates white or green.

Illuminates white

The system is on.

Illuminates green

Cruise control is active. Set speed is indicated in the Driver Information

Centre.

Cruise control 3 178.

Adaptive cruise control m illuminates white or green.

C illuminates in the Driver Information

Centre.

m illuminates white

The system is on.

m illuminates green

Adaptive cruise control is active.

When Adaptive cruise control is on or active, C with the set speed is indicated in the Driver Information Centre.

Adaptive cruise control 3 183.

Pedestrian safety alert fault

K illuminates yellow.

The pedestrian safety alert is not working.

Side blind spot alert

B illuminates continously green in the instrument cluster.

The system is active 3 197.

Active emergency braking m illuminates or flashes yellow.

Illuminates

The system has been deactivated or a fault has been detected.

Additionally, a warning message is displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

Check the reason of the deactivation

3 189 and in case of a system fault, seek the assistance of a workshop.

Flashes

The system is actively engaged.

Depending on the situation, the vehicle may automatically brake moderately or hard.

Forward collision alert 3 188.

Front pedestrian protection 3 191.

Active emergency braking 3 189.

Speed limiter

ß illuminates in the Driver Information

Centre when speed limiter is active. Set speed is indicated alongside ß symbol.

Speed limiter 3 181.

Door open h illuminates red.

A door or the tailgate is open.

DISPLAYS

Driver Information Centre

Depending on the version, the Driver

Information Centre may vary.

In addition to warning lights, gauges and indicators, the following information is available:

● overall and trip odometer

● digital speed indication

● trip / autonomy information menu

● gear shift indication

● service information

● vehicle and warning messages

● driver assistance systems

● pop-up messages

81

Selecting menus and functions

There are several ways to toggle between the respective menus and functions:

Press button.

Move thumb wheel upwards or downwards on the steering wheel.

82

Buttons of the Driver Information

Centre

Press F , SET 000 or 000 .

Vehicle and service messages are popped up in the Driver Information

Centre, if required. Scroll messages by using the above mentioned controls or buttons.

Vehicle messages 3 88.

Trip / fuel information menu, baselevel display

Differerent pages with combined information can be selected.

Select the required page:

Trip pages:

Trip odometer

The recorded distance since the reset.

To reset, press

F

for a few seconds.

Average fuel consumption

Display of average consumption. The measurement can be reset at any time and starts with a default value.

To reset, press F for a few seconds.

Average speed

Display of average speed. The measurement can be reset at any time.

To reset, press F for a few seconds.

Information pages:

Fuel range

Range is calculated from current fuel level and current consumption. The display shows average values.

After refuelling, the range is updated automatically after a brief delay.

When the fuel level is low, a message appears on the display and the control indicator 2 in the fuel gauge illuminates

3 80.

Instantaneous fuel consumption

Display of the instantaneous consumption.

Digital speed

Digital display of the instantaneous speed.

Stop and Start time counter

A time counter adds up the time spent in

Autostop during a journey.

It resets to zero everytime the ignition is switched on.

Compass

Displays the geographic direction of driving.

AdBlue range

Press F repeatedly until the AdBlue menu is shown.

Indicates an estimate of the AdBlue level.

A message indicates whether the level is sufficient or low.

AdBlue 3 164.

Trip / fuel information menu, midlevel display

Differerent pages with combined information can be selected.

Select the required page:

Trip pages:

Trip odometer

The recorded distance since the reset.

To reset, press SET 000 for a few seconds.

Average fuel consumption

Display of average consumption. The measurement can be reset at any time and starts with a default value.

To reset, press SET 000 for a few seconds.

Average speed

Display of average speed. The measurement can be reset at any time.

To reset, press SET 000 for a few seconds.

Information pages:

Fuel range

Range is calculated from current fuel level and current consumption. The display shows average values.

After refuelling, the range is updated automatically after a brief delay.

When the fuel level is low, a message appears on the display and the control indicator 2 in the fuel gauge illuminates

3 80.

Instantaneous fuel consumption

Display of the instantaneous consumption.

Digital speed

Digital display of the instantaneous speed.

Stop and Start time counter

A time counter adds up the time spent in

Autostop during a journey.

It resets to zero everytime the ignition is switched on.

Compass

Displays the geographic direction of driving.

AdBlue range

Press SET 000 repeatedly until the

AdBlue menu is shown.

Indicates an estimate of the AdBlue level.

A message indicates whether the level is sufficient or low.

AdBlue 3 164.

Trip / fuel information menu, uplevel display

Differerent pages with combined information can be selected.

83

Select the required page:

Trip pages:

Trip odometer

The recorded distance since the reset.

To reset, press 000 for a few seconds.

Average fuel consumption

Display of average consumption. The measurement can be reset at any time and starts with a default value.

To reset, press 000 for a few seconds.

Average speed

Display of average speed. The measurement can be reset at any time.

To reset, press 000 for a few seconds.

Information pages:

Fuel range

Range is calculated from current fuel level and current consumption. The display shows average values.

After refuelling, the range is updated automatically after a brief delay.

When the fuel level is low, a message appears on the display and the control indicator 2 in the fuel gauge illuminates

3 80.

Instantaneous fuel consumption

Display of the instantaneous consumption.

Digital speed

84

Digital display of the instantaneous speed.

Stop and Start time counter

A time counter adds up the time spent in

Autostop during a journey.

It resets to zero everytime the ignition is switched on.

Compass

Displays the geographic direction of driving.

AdBlue range

Press 000 repeatedly until the AdBlue menu is shown.

Indicates an estimate of the AdBlue level.

A message indicates whether the level is sufficient or low.

AdBlue 3 164.

Trip / autonomy information menu, display electric vehicle

Differerent pages with combined information can be selected.

Select the required page:

Information page:

Average consumption of electric energy

Display of average consumption. The measurement can be reset at any time and starts with a default value.

To reset, press 000 for a few seconds.

Trip pages:

Average speed

Display of average speed. The measurement can be reset at any time.

To reset, press 000 for a few seconds.

Average consumption of electric energy

Display of average consumption. The measurement can be reset at any time and starts with a default value.

To reset, press 000 for a few seconds.

Trip odometer

The recorded distance since the reset.

To reset, press 000 for a few seconds.

Traffic sign assistant page

Displays recognised traffic signs.

Flow page

Displays the current energy flow within the electric system.

Compass page

Displays the geographic direction of driving.

Digital speed page

Digital display of the instantaneous speed.

Info Display

The Info Displays can indicate:

● time 3 67

● outside temperature 3 67

● date 3 67

● Infotainment system, see description in the Infotainment manual

● indication of rear view camera

3 201

● indication of panoramic view system

3 199

● indication of parking assist instructions 3 191

● navigation, see description in the

Infotainment manual

● vehicle and system messages

3 88

● settings for vehicle personalisation

3 89

Radio

Press H {} I to select a menu page.

Press OK to confirm a selection.

Press ß to exit a menu without changing a setting.

Touchscreen Radio

Press

Press

X to switch on the display.

MENU to select main menu page.

Multimedia / Multimedia Navi Pro

Press

)

to switch on the display.

Touch : to select system settings (units, language, time and date).

Touch _ to select vehicle settings or driving functions.

Confirm a required function or selection by touching.

Touch 3 on the display to return to the previous page.

There are three options to operate the display:

● via buttons next to the display

● by touching the touchscreen with the finger

● via speech recognition

Button and touch operation

Press ) to switch on the display.

Press : to select system settings (units, language, time and date).

Press _ to select vehicle settings or driving functions.

Touch required menu display icon or a function with the finger.

Confirm a required function or selection by touching.

Touch 3 or & on the display to exit a menu without changing a setting.

85

For further information, see Infotainment

Manual.

Speech recognition

Description see Infotainment Manual.

Flow

Note

On vehicles without integrated navigation system, this menu can only be used via the app.

This menu displays the current energy flow within the electric system.

1. Press m .

2. Select Flow .

Different colours show the energy flow.

● green: electric engine operating

● blue: regenerating energy

Average consumption

Note

On vehicles without integrated navigation system, this menu can only be used via the app.

This menu displays the average power consumption during the current trip.

● green: electric energy consumed

● blue: electric energy generated from the braking and deceleration phases of the vehicle used to recharge the battery

The current trip is subdivided into time steps. For each time step, the average consumption is displayed. The time steps can be modified.

1. Press m .

2. Select Statistics .

3. Press + and to modify the time steps.

Head-up display

The head-up display displays driver information concerning the instrument cluster onto a foldable projection plane on the driver's side.

The information appears as an image projected from a lense in the instrument panel onto the projection plane directly ahead in driver's view. The image appears focused out toward the front of the vehicle.

Head-up display shows:

● vehicle speed

● speed limits detected by the speed sign recognition

● set speed of speed limiter

● set speed of cruise control

● forward collision alert

● navigation information.

86

Switching on

Press e to switch on the head-up display.

Adjust position of head-up display image

Press ä or å to centre the image. It can only be adjusted up and down, not side to side.

9 WARNING

If the head-up display image is too bright or too high in your field of view, it may obstruct your view when it is dark outside.

Be sure to keep the head-up display image dim and placed low in your field of view.

Adjust brightness

The head-up display image will automatically dim and brighten to compensate for outside lighting.

Brightness can also be adjusted manually as needed:

Press e to brighten the display. Press

æ to dim the display.

The image can temporarily illuminate depending on angel and position of sunlight.

Switching off

Press æ and hold to turn the head-up display off.

Language

Preferred language can be set in vehicle personalisation menu 3 89.

Units

Units can be changed in vehicle personalisation menu 3 89.

Care of head-up display

Clean the screen of the head-up display with a soft cloth sprayed with glass cleaner. Wipe the lens gently, then dry it.

System limitations

Head-up display may not operate properly when:

● The lens in the instrument panel is covered by objects or not clean.

● Display brightness is too dim or bright.

● Image is not adjusted to the proper height.

● The driver wears polarized sunglasses.

If the head-up image is not correct for other reasons, contact a workshop.

Rear view display

The rear view display is located at the position of the interior mirror.

It provides the following views:

● standard rear view 3 21

● close rear view 3 201

● passenger side view 3 198

Switching on

Press m and confirm the message with p .

Selecting a view

87

Select the standard rear view or passenger side view by pressing the p on the bottom side.

Close rear view is automatically activated when reverse gear is engaged.

Switching off

Press m .

VEHICLE MESSAGES

Messages are indicated in the Driver

Information Centre, in some cases together with a warning chime.

Press to confirm a message.

Or press thumb wheel.

Vehicle and service messages

The vehicle messages are displayed as text. Follow the instructions given in the messages.

Messages in the Info Display

Some important messages may appear additionally in the Info Display. Some messages only pop-up for a few seconds.

Warning chimes

If several warnings appear at the same time, only one warning chime will sound.

When starting the engine or whilst driving

The warning chime regarding not fastened seat belts has priority over any other warning chime.

● If a seat belt is not fastened.

● If a door or the tailgate is not fully closed.

● If a certain speed is exceeded with parking brake applied.

● If cruise control deactivates automatically.

● If a programmed speed or speed limit is exceeded.

● If a warning message appears in the

Driver Information Centre.

88

● If the electronic key is not in the passenger compartment.

● If the parking assist detects an object.

● If an unintended lane change occurs.

● If the exhaust filter has reached the maximum filling level.

When the vehicle is parked and / or the driver's door is opened

● With exterior lights on.

During an Autostop

● If the driver's door is opened.

● If any condition for a restart of the engine is not fulfilled.

VEHICLE PERSONALISATION

The vehicle's behaviour can be personalised by changing the settings in the Info Display.

Some functions are only displayed or active when the engine is running.

Graphic Info Display

Touch _ to display the vehicle personalisation menu.

Press MENU to open the menu page.

Use four-way button to operate the display:

Select Personalisation-configuration, I

OK .

Select Define vehicle parameters, I OK .

Info Display as touch screen

Following graphic shows only one variant.

89

TELEMATICS SERVICES

Emergency call

Note

In order to be available and operational, the system requires functioning vehicle electrics, mobile service and GPS or GLONASS satellite link. Depending on equipment, a backup battery is used.

Note

The service is only available for markets where it is legally required. Furthermore, it depends on the availability of the emergency centres and the infrastructure in the country.

Status LED in the overhead console

Illuminates green and red and extinguishes after a short time, when the ignition is switched on: the system works properly.

Illuminates red: fault in the system.

Contact a workshop.

Flashes red: backup battery needs replacement. Contact a workshop.

Emergency call

The emergency call function will establish a connection to the nearest public safety answering point (PSAP). A minimum set of data including vehicle and location information will be sent to the PSAP.

In case of an emergency, press the red

SOS button in the overhead console for more than two seconds. The LED flashes green to confirm that a connection to the

90 nearest PSAP is being established. The

LED illuminates steadily as long as the call is active.

Pressing the SOS button immediately a second time will terminate the call. The

LED switches off.

Automatic crash notification

In case of an accident with airbag deployment and without damage of needed hardware, an automatic emergency call is established and an automatic crash notification will be transmitted to the next PSAP.

Fiat Connect

Fiat Connect comprises multiple connected services accessible via app, online or within the vehicle.

Note

This service is not available for all markets.

For further information, contact your workshop.

Note

Full functionality of the service is subject to registration and proper activation.

Connected services may include live navigation such as online traffic information and vehicle status and information such as maintenance alerts.

Services accessible within the vehicle also include emergency call and breakdown call. These functions are automatically activated. Terms and conditions apply.

Emergency call 3 90.

Breakdown call

Pressing the .

button in the overhead console for more than two seconds connects to a roadside assistance service provider.

For information about coverage and scope of services of the roadside assistance, please refer to the Service and warranty booklet.

Privacy settings

Privacy settings of the service can be configured. This will impact the set of data being sent, e.g., in case a breakdown call is triggered.The

emergency call function will not be impacted.

Depending on version, the privacy settings can be changed by simultaneously pressing .

and SOS in the overhead console or via the system settings menu in the Info Display.

LIGHTING

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

Light switch

Exterior lighting ................................ 91

Light switch ................................... 91

Automatic light control ................... 91

High beam ..................................... 92

High beam assist ........................... 92

Headlight flash ............................... 92

Headlight range adjustment ........... 92

Headlights when driving abroad ..... 92

Daytime running lights .................... 93

Hazard warning flashers ................. 93

Turn lights ...................................... 93

Front fog lights ............................... 93

Rear fog light ................................. 94

Parking lights ................................. 94

Reversing lights ............................. 94

Misted light covers ......................... 94

Interior lighting .................................. 95

Instrument panel illumination control .......................................... 95

Interior lights .................................. 95

Reading lights ................................ 95

Sunvisor lights ............................... 95

Lighting features .............................. 96

Centre console lighting .................. 96

Entry lighting .................................. 96

Exit lighting .................................... 96

Vehicle locator lighting ................... 96

Peripheral lighting .......................... 96

Battery discharge protection .......... 97

Turn light switch:

AUTO : automatic light control switches automatically between daytime running light and headlight

F : sidelights

D : headlight

When switching on the ignition, automatic light control is active.

Control indicator F 3 80.

Tail lights

Tail lights are illuminated together with low/high beam and sidelights.

Automatic light control

When the automatic light control function is switched on and the engine is running, the system switches between daytime running lights and headlights automatically depending on the external lighting conditions and information given by the wiper system.

Make sure the sensor is not blocked

3 22.

Daytime running light 3 93.

Automatic headlight activation

During poor lighting conditions the headlights are switched on.

Additionally, headlights are switched on if the windscreen wipers have been activated for several wipes.

91

High beam

To activate the high beam, pull the lever beyond the resistance point.

High beam assist

This feature automatically activates the high beam at night when vehicle is faster than 25 km/h / 15 mph.

It switches automatically back to low beam when:

● A sensor detects the lights of oncoming or preceding vehicles.

● Driving in urban areas.

● The vehicle is slower than 15 km/h /

9 mph.

● It is foggy or snowy.

● Front or rear fog lights are switched on.

If there are no restrictions detected, the system switches back to high beam.

92

Activation

Activate high beam assist in the vehicle personalisation.

The green control indicator

B illuminates continuously when the assist is activated, the blue one

C

illuminates when high beam is on.

Control indicator B 3 80.

Deactivation

Deactivate high beam assist in the vehicle personalisation 3 89.

With high beam on, pull the indicator lever once to deactivate high beam assist.

The latest setting of the high beam assist is being stored and remains set when the ignition is switched on again.

Headlight flash

To activate the headlight flash, pull lever.

Pulling lever deactivates high beam.

Headlight range adjustment

Manual headlight range adjustment

To adapt headlight range to the vehicle load to prevent dazzling: turn thumb wheel X to required position.

0 : front seats occupied

1 : all seats occupied

2 : all seats occupied and load compartment laden

3 : driver's seat occupied and load compartment laden

Headlights when driving abroad

When driving in countries where traffic drives on the opposite side of the road, the headlights do not have to be adjusted.

Daytime running lights

Daytime running lights increase visibility of the vehicle during daylight.

They are switched on automatically when the engine is running.

The system switches between daytime running lights and low beam automatically, depending on the lighting conditions.

Hazard warning flashers

Turn lights To activate three flashes, tap the indicator lever briefly without passing the resistance point.

Front fog lights

Hazard warning flashers are switched on automatically in the following situations:

● Braking in an emergency (depending on the force of deceleration).

● In the event of an accident.

They are switched off the first time you accelerate or if you press ¨ .

up : right turn lights down : left turn lights

A resistance point can be felt when moving the indicator lever.

Constant flashing is activated when the indicator lever is being moved beyond the resistance point. It is deactivated when the steering wheel is moved in the opposite direction or indicator lever is manually moved back to its neutral position.

After 20 seconds the volume of the audible signal will increase if the speed is above 60 km/h / 40 mph.

Activate temporary flashing by holding the indicator lever just before the resistance point. Turn lights will flash until indicator lever is being released.

Turn the control wheel once to activate or deactivate the front fog light.

Light switch in position AUTO : switching on front fog lights will switch headlights on automatically.

93

Rear fog light The vehicle rear fog light is deactivated when towing a trailer or a plug is connected with the socket, e.g. when a bicycle carrier is used.

Parking lights

Misted light covers

The inside of the light housing may mist up briefly in poor, wet and cold weather conditions, in heavy rain or after washing.

The mist disappears quickly by itself; to help switch on the headlights.

Turn the control wheel once to activate or deactivate the rear fog light.

Turn the control wheel twice to activate or deactivate the rear fog light.

Light switch in position AUTO : switching on rear fog light will switch headlights on automatically.

94

When the vehicle is parked, the parking lights on one side can be activated:

1. Switch off ignition.

2. Within one minute move indicator lever all the way up (right parking lights) or down (left parking lights).

Confirmed by a signal and the corresponding turn lights control indicator.

Reversing lights

The reversing light comes on when the ignition is on and reverse gear is selected.

INTERIOR LIGHTING

Instrument panel illumination control

Note

In the event of an accident with airbag deployment the courtesy lights are turned on automatically.

Front and rear courtesy light

Reading lights

Brightness of the following lights can be adjusted when the exterior lights are on:

● instrument panel illumination

● Info Display

● illuminated switches and operation elements

Depending on version the brightness can be set by pressing and holding 0 or

ß until the desired brightness is obtained or in the vehicle personalisation

3 89.

Interior lights

During entry and exit of the vehicle, the front and rear courtesy lights automatically switch on and then off after a delay.

Operate rocker switch:

; : automatic switching on and off press e : on press $ : off

Operated by pressing z and B in the courtesy lights.

Illustration shows rear courtesy lights.

Sunvisor lights

Illuminates when the cover is opened.

95

LIGHTING FEATURES

Centre console lighting

A spotlight integrated in the overhead console illuminates the centre console when headlights are switched on.

The intensity can be adjusted in the vehicle personalisation 3 89.

Entry lighting

Welcome lighting

Some or all of the following lights are switched on for a short time by unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control:

● headlights

● tail lights

● interior lights

The number of activated lights depends on the surrounding light conditions.

The lighting switches off immediately when the ignition is switched on.

This function can be activated or deactivated in the vehicle personalisation

3 89.

The following lights will additionally switch on when the driver's door is opened:

● illumination of some switches

● Driver Information Centre

Exit lighting

The following lights are switched on if the key is removed from the ignition switch:

● interior lights

● instrument panel light

They will switch off automatically after a delay. This function works only in the dark.

Path lighting

Headlights, tail lights and number plate lights illuminate the surrounding area for an adjustable time after leaving the vehicle.

Activating

1. Switch off the ignition.

2. Open the driver's door.

3. Pull the indicator lever.

4. Close the driver's door.

96

If the driver's door is not closed, the lights switch off after two minutes.

Exit lighting is switched off immediately if the indicator lever is pulled while the driver's door is open.

This function can be activated or deactivated in the vehicle personalisation

3 89.

Vehicle locator lighting

This function allows you to locate your vehicle, e.g., in weak lighting conditions using the remote control. The headlights and the hazard warning flashers come on for ten seconds.

Press N on the remote control.

The vehicle must be locked more than five seconds.

Peripheral lighting

Peripheral lighting allows you to switch on the position lights, low beam and number plate lighting using the remote control.

Press G on the remote control to switch on peripheral lighting.

Press G a second time to switch off peripheral lighting.

Battery discharge protection

To prevent discharge of the vehicle battery when the ignition is switched off, some interior lights are switched off automatically after some time.

97

INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM

Multimedia Navi Pro ......................... 99

Introduction ................................... 99

Basic operation ............................ 103

Audio ........................................... 104

External devices ........................... 106

Navigation .................................... 108

Speech recognition ...................... 112

Phone .......................................... 113

Multimedia ..................................... 117

Introduction ................................. 117

Basic operation ............................ 120

Audio ........................................... 121

External devices ........................... 123

Speech recognition ...................... 125

Phone .......................................... 125

Touchscreen Radio ........................ 128

Introduction ................................. 128

Basic operation ............................ 131

Audio ........................................... 132

Speech recognition ...................... 134

Phone .......................................... 134

Radio ............................................. 136

Introduction ................................. 136

Basic operation ............................ 140

Audio ........................................... 140

External devices ........................... 142

Speech recognition ...................... 143

Phone .......................................... 144

98

MULTIMEDIA NAVI PRO

Introduction

Important information on operation and traffic safety

9 WARNING

Drive safely at all times. Only operate the

Infotainment system if the traffic conditions allow a safe usage.

In the interest of safety, it might be appropriate to stop the vehicle before operating the Infotainment system (e.g. for entries of addresses).

9 WARNING

The usage of the navigation system does not release the driver from the responsibility for a correct, vigilant attitude in road traffic. Always follow the applicable traffic rules.

9 WARNING

In some areas one-way streets and other roads and entrances (e.g. pedestrian zones) that you are not allowed to turn into are not marked on the map. In such areas the Infotainment system may issue a warning that must be accepted. Here you must pay particular attention to one-way streets, roads and entrances that you are not allowed to drive into.

99

MULTIMEDIA NAVI PRO

Control panel

100

1 X

If switched off: switch power on / off

If switched on: mute system

Turn: adjust volume

2 c

Display embedded navigation map

3 _

Open vehicle settings menu

4 b

Open audio menu

5 d

Open apps menu

6 : / m

Open settings menu or open charging settings

(electric vehicles)

7 a

Open phone menu

8 Info Display / touch screen with Home menu (Home menu only visible after 3finger touch on screen)

9 USB port

Steering wheel controls

1 Short press: activate embedded speech recognition

Long press: activate speech recognition in Apple

CarPlay ™ or Android ™ Auto if phone connected via USB port

2 Toggle through the menus of the Driver Information Centre

3 Select next / previous radio station when radio active or select next / previous track when external devices active or select next / previous entry in station list, media list, call / contacts list when operation started via steering wheel controls

Short press: confirm selected item or display the presets

4 Short press: accept incoming call

Long press: reject incoming call, hang up call, open phone menu

If phone call active: open call in progress menu

5 Select audio source

6 Short press: display the radio station list or the list of tracks

Long press: update the list of radio stations

7 Á / À

Increase / decrease volume

Press both buttons to mute the system, press one button to unmute the system

101

Steering column controls

1 Radio: select the previous / next preset radio station

Media: select the previous / next track or select the previous / next item in a menu or a list

2 Short press: display the list of radio stations or folders

Long press: update the list of radio stations or display the available sorting options for media

3 Confirm selected item

4 Short press: select audio source, accept an incoming call or end a call

Long press: display the call list

Buttons on the back side:

102

Increase / decrease volume

Press both buttons to mute or unmute the system

Control elements

The Infotainment system is operated via function buttons, a touch screen and menus that are shown on the display.

Inputs are made optionally via:

● the control panel on the Infotainment system

● the touch screen

● audio controls on the steering wheel

● the speech recognition

Network and connected services

Press d and then select OPTIONS to display the Bluetooth, network and connected services settings.

To connect the vehicle to a Wi-Fi network, touch y . A list of all available

Wi-Fi networks is displayed.

It is also possible to share the Wi-Fi connection for other devices.

To update the service and connection status, go to the menu for connected services z and touch R .

To use the connected services, make sure that data sharing and the vehicle position are activated in the privacy menu in the System settings .

Basic operation

The display of the Infotainment system has a touch-sensitive surface that allows direct interaction with the displayed menu controls.

CAUTION

Do not use pointed or hard items like ballpoint pens, pencils or similar for touch screen operation.

Audio settings

Press : and select Audio settings .

The following settings can be adjusted:

● Ambience

● Balance

● Sound

● Voice

● Ringtone

System settings

Press : and then select OPTIONS .

The following settings can be adjusted:

● system settings

● language

● time and date

● screen configuration

● profiles

Storing your personal settings

Press : , select OPTIONS and select

Setting of the profiles .

You can store a multitude of settings in a personal profile. For example, all current tone settings, all radio presets, one phone book, the map settings and your preferred addresses.

In case you share the vehicle with other people, this enables you to restore your personal settings from your profile at any time.

A maximum of three personal profiles may be stored.

Additionally, a Common profile is available. All settings done at any time are automatically stored in that profile. If no personal profile is activated, the

Common profile is active.

Storing your personal profile

After performing all your personal settings:

Select one of the personal profile tabs.

103

Select the input field o and enter the desired name of your personal profile.

If you want to add a photo to the profile:

Connect a USB device with the desired photo stored on it to the USB port, touch the photo frame and then select the desired photo.

Confirm your selection to download the selected photo to the system.

Finally, confirm your inputs to store them in your personal profile.

Activating your personal profile

Press : and then select the tab with the name of your personal profile.

Activating the Common profile

If a personal profile is currently active:

Press : and then select Deactivate profile .

Resetting a personal profile

You can at any time reset a personal profile to restore the default factory settings on that profile.

Select the respective profile and then select Reset profile .

Resetting the Common profile

You can at any time reset the Common profile to restore the default factory settings on that profile.

Select Common profile and then select

Reset the common profile .

104

Audio

Activating the radio

Press b . The audio main menu last selected is displayed.

If the radio main menu is not active, select

SOURCES and then select Radio .

The station last played will be received.

Selecting a waveband

Repeatedly select Band to toggle between the different wavebands.

Searching for stations

Automatic station search

Briefly touch < or > to play the previous or next receivable station.

Manual station search

Press and hold < or > . Release when the required frequency has almost been reached.

A search is made for the next station that can be received and it is played automatically.

Station tuning

If you exactly know the reception frequency of a radio station, you may enter that frequency manually.

Select OPTIONS , select Radio stations and then select the desired waveband.

Select Freq.

, enter the reception frequency and confirm your input.

If a station is receivable on that frequency, the respective station is played.

Station lists

In the station lists, all receivable radio stations within the current reception area are available for selection.

To display the station list of the waveband currently active, select List .

Select the desired station.

Update station lists

If the stations stored in the wavebandspecific station list can no longer be received, the AM and the DAB station lists must be updated. The FM station list is updated automatically.

Select OPTIONS , select Radio stations and then select the desired waveband.

To start an update for the selected waveband, select Ü .

Storing favourite stations

Up to 15 radio stations of all wavebands can be stored as favourites in the

Presets list.

Select Presets to display the preset buttons.

Storing a station from a station list

Select OPTIONS , select Radio stations and then select the desired waveband.

Storing the currently active station

Touch and hold the desired button for a few seconds. The respective frequency or station name is displayed on the button.

If a station is already stored on a preset button, that station will be overwritten by the new one.

Briefly touch the button next to the desired station. Alternatively, select Û to switch to the tiled view. Then briefly touch

† on the tile of the desired station.

Select Add to favourites and then touch and hold for a few seconds on the list row where you want to store the station.

If a station is already stored on a list row, that station will be overwritten by the new one.

Retrieving stations

In the radio main menu select Presets and then briefly touch the preset button of the desired station.

RDS configuration

In the radio main menu select

OPTIONS and then select Radio settings to open the menu for RDS configuration.

Activating RDS

Select General and then activate

Alternative frequency .

If Alternative frequency is activated,

RDS is displayed in the bottom line of the radio main menu.

Radio text

If RDS is activated, information on the radio programme currently active or the music track currently playing are displayed below the programme name.

To show or hide the information, activate or deactivate Display radio text .

Traffic announcements

Many RDS stations broadcast traffic news. If the traffic announcements function is activated, radio or media playback is interrupted for the duration of a traffic announcement.

Select Announcements and then activate or deactivate Traffic announcement .

If Traffic announcement is activated,

TA is displayed in the bottom line of the radio main menu.

105

DAB Announcements

Besides their music programmes, a lot of

DAB stations also broadcast announcements of various categories. If you activate some or all categories, the currently received DAB service is interrupted when an announcement of these categories is made.

In the radio main menu select

OPTIONS , select Radio settings and then select Announcements .

Activate the desired announcement categories, e.g., News or Weather .

Different announcement categories can be selected at the same time.

FM-DAB Linking

This function enables switching from an

FM station to a corresponding DAB station and vice versa.

Switching from FM to DAB occurs as soon as a corresponding DAB station is available. Therefore, it is recommended to store favourite stations as DAB stations to reduce frequent switching.

Switching from DAB to FM occurs if the signal is too weak to be picked up by the receiver.

Activation

Precondition is that Alternative frequency is activated before FM-DAB

Linking can be activated.

106

To activate FM-DAB Linking, select

OPTIONS in the radio main menu and then select FM-DAB Follow-up in the

Radio settings .

The following symbol will be displayed when FM-DAB Linking is activated:

Deactivation

To deactivate FM-DAB Linking, select

OPTIONS in the radio main menu and then deselect FM-DAB Follow-up in the

Radio settings .

FM-DAB Linking will automatically be deactivated when Alternative frequency is deactivated.

External devices

A USB port is located on the control panel. Another USB port may be located in the storage compartment next to the

Info Display.

CAUTION

To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.

Note

The USB ports must always be kept clean and dry.

Activating the music function

Connecting the USB or Bluetooth device.

If device already connected, but playback of stored music files not active:

Press b , select SOURCES and then select the respective source.

Playback of the audio tracks starts automatically.

Playback functions

Interrupting and resuming playback

Touch = to interrupt playback. The screen button changes to l .

Touch l to resume playback.

Playing the previous or next track

Touch < or > .

Fast forwarding and rewinding

Touch and hold < or > . Release to return to normal playback mode.

Alternatively, you can move the slider showing the current track position to the left or right.

Playing tracks randomly

Touch button repeatedly to toggle between the available random modes.

” : play tracks of currently selected list

(album, artist, etc.) in random order.

æ : play all tracks stored on connected device in random order.

Ý : play tracks of currently selected list

(album, artist, etc.) in normal playback mode.

Repeating tracks

Touch button repeatedly to switch repeat mode on or off.

– : repeat tracks of currently selected list

(album, artist, etc.).

Þ : play tracks of currently selected list

(album, artist, etc.) in normal playback mode.

Browse music functions

(only available for devices connected via

USB)

You can have your music files sorted according to different criteria. Two options are available for browsing the music files stored on the connected USB device.

Browsing via main menu

If you want to change the currently active

USB source, select SOURCES and then select the desired source. The respective main menu is displayed.

Select the button showing the currently selected sorting criteria, e.g. Sort:

Album or Sort: Artist , and then select the desired new sorting criteria. A sorting process is performed.

Select List and then select the desired track.

Playback of the selected track is started.

Browsing via device menu

Select OPTIONS and then select Music files .

If you want to change the currently active

USB source, select Other .

Select the desired sorting criteria, e.g.

Albums or Artists , and then select the desired track.

Playback of the selected track is started.

Activating the picture viewer

Connecting the USB device.

If device already connected, but picture viewer not active:

Press b , select OPTIONS and then select Managing photos .

Select the desired picture.

A slide show of all stored picture files starts automatically.

Touch the screen to display the menu bar.

Viewing the previous or next picture

Touch l or m .

Starting or stopping a slide show

Select l to view the pictures stored on the USB device in a slide show.

Touch / to end the slide show.

107

Phone projection

The phone projection applications Apple

CarPlay and Android Auto display selected apps from your smartphone on the Info Display and allow their operation directly via the Infotainment controls.

Check with the device's manufacturer if this function is compatible with your smartphone and if this application is available in the country you are in.

Preparing the smartphone iPhone ® : Make sure Siri ® is activated on your phone.

Android phone: Download the Android

Auto app to your phone from the Google

Play ™ Store.

Connecting the smartphone iPhone

Connect the phone to the USB port.

If the phone is already connected via

Bluetooth, upon connecting to the USB port and launching Apple CarPlay, the

Bluetooth connection will disconnect.

Android phone

Connect the phone via Bluetooth and then connect the phone to the USB port.

Starting phone projection

Press d and then touch Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

The phone projection screen displayed depends on your smartphone and software version.

Returning to the Infotainment screen

Press, e.g., the b button on the control panel.

Navigation

This chapter is about the embedded navigation system which guides to desired destinations.

The current traffic situation is taken into account in the route calculation. For this purpose, the Infotainment system receives traffic announcements in the current reception area via RDS-TMC.

The navigation system cannot, however, take into account traffic incidents, traffic regulations changed at short notice and hazards or problems that arise suddenly

(e.g. road works).

CAUTION

The usage of the navigation system does not release the driver from the responsibility for a correct, vigilant attitude in road traffic. The relevant traffic regulations must always be followed. If a navigation instruction contradicts traffic regulations, the traffic regulations always apply.

Important information

TMC traffic information system and dynamic route guidance

The TMC traffic information system receives all current traffic information from TMC radio stations. This information is included in the calculation of the overall route. During this process, the route is planned so that traffic problems related to pre-selected criteria are avoided.

To be able to use TMC traffic information, the system must receive TMC stations in the relevant region.

Live navigation

When data sharing and the vehicle position are activated, the navigation system will show online traffic information as well as online information for parking, fuel prices and weather. The services can be stopped at anytime by deactivating data sharing and the vehicle position.

Data sharing and the vehicle position can be activated or deactivated via the privacy menu in the System settings .

The privacy menu and the menu for connected services are also accessible via the message icon on the screen.

Map data

All required map data is stored within the

Infotainment system.

108

Map updates are available at the Fiat

Dealership or at the Fiat customer portal.

To download the map updates from the customer portal, an account and an empty USB stick with at least 32 GB memory and FAT 32 formatting are necessary.

Download and save the map data on a computer and unpack the data onto the

USB stick.

To update the map data in the

Infotainment system, connect the USB stick to the Infotainment system, select the navigation function and follow the steps on the Info Display.

The installation of the map update will take up to 1 hour. Do not switch off the engine during the installation process.

Some functions of the Infotainment system, e.g. the navigation function, are not available during the installation process.

Information on the map display

Press c to display the navigation map showing the area around the current location.

Route guidance not active

● The map view is displayed.

● The current location is indicated by an arrow.

● The name of the street you are currently in is displayed at the bottom left of the map view.

Route guidance active

● The map view is displayed.

● The active route is indicated by a coloured line.

● The moving vehicle is marked by an arrow pointing into the direction of travel.

● The next turning manoeuvre is shown in a separate field at the top left of the map view.

Depending on the situation information on lane guidance or the second next turning manoeuvre may be displayed additionally.

● The arrival time and the remaining distance to the destination is shown at the top right of the map view.

Navigation settings

Select MENU in the navigation main menu, and then select Settings to display the respective menu with a variety of navigation related settings.

109

Please explore the different settings.

Some have already been described above, others are described in the following sections.

Selecting an address from the map

Touch the desired location on the map.

The map centres around this location.

A red d is displayed at the respective location and the corresponding address is shown on a label.

To start route guidance, select û .

Quick address or POI search

Select Search… . A menu with a list of recent destinations and a keyboard is displayed.

Storing your favourite addresses

If you want to store the entered address, select ü .

The stored address can then be easily selected as destination address via the destination lists Preferred or Contacts , see below.

Destination lists

Select MENU and then select My destinations .

Detailed address entry

Select MENU and then select Enter address to display a keyboard for address entry.

110

You may store the address as, e.g., your

Home address or your Work address.

Select the desired option, confirm your selection and then enter a name for the address.

Select Recent to display a list of all recently entered destinations.

Select Preferred to display all destinations which were stored before as home address, work address or preferred address.

Select Contacts to display a list with contact names and all related addresses stored before as personal contacts.

To start route guidance to the respective address, select a list entry.

Points of interest

A point of interest (POI) is a specific location that might be of general interest, e.g. a petrol station, a parking area or a restaurant.

The data stored within the navigation system contains a great number of predefined POIs, which are indicated on the map (if activated).

Selecting a POI from the map

Touch the desired POI icon on the map.

The map centres around this location.

Touch the icon again.

A red d is displayed at the respective location and the corresponding address is shown on a label.

To start route guidance, select û .

Showing a list of POIs around a location

Touch the desired location on the map.

The map centres around this location.

A red d is displayed at the respective location and the corresponding address is shown on a label.

Touch and hold d .

A list of POIs around the location is displayed.

Select the desired POI to start route guidance.

Searching for POIs via categories

Select MENU and then select Points of interest .

While under active route guidance, select

MENU and then select Route /

Waypoints .

Searching via keyword

Select MENU , select Search , enter a keyword, e.g., "Station", enter or select a city name and confirm your input.

After the POI search is performed, select the desired POI.

Waypoint trips

A waypoint is an intermediate destination that is considered in the calculation of a route to its final destination. To create a waypoint trip, you may add one or several waypoints.

Enter or select the final destination of your waypoint trip and start route guidance.

Select Add waypoint and then select an option for address entry, e.g. Find POI .

Enter or select a new address. The address is inserted into the list of waypoints.

If desired, enter further waypoints as described above.

If you want to change the order of the waypoints:

Touch Ú and then touch the displayed arrows to move the list entries up or down.

Select Calculate to recalculate the route according to the changed order.

To return to the navigation main menu, select Finish .

To display a detailed route list of the waypoint trip, select the Route tab.

111

Settings for route guidance

Select MENU in the navigation main menu and then select Guidance criteria to display the respective menu.

When the menu is opened, several optional routes are automatically calculated by the navigation system, e.g.

the fastest route or the most ecological route.

112

To show the different optional routes on a map, select See on map .

If you want, e.g., avoid motorways on your route, set the respective option to

OFF.

Take account of traffic

Traffic events are taken into consideration when the system determines a route to a destination.

During active route guidance, the route can be modified according to incoming traffic messages.

Three options are available for Take account of traffic :

If you want the system to automatically modify the route according to new traffic messages, select Automatic .

If you want to be consulted when a route is modified, select Manual .

If you do not want routes to be modified, select None .

Starting, cancelling, resuming route guidance

To start route guidance, enter or select a destination address. Depending on the situation, route guidance may start automatically, or you may have to follow some instructions on the screen.

To cancel route guidance, select

MENU in the navigation main menu and then select STOP NAVIGATION .

To resume a cancelled route guidance, select MENU in the navigation main menu and then select RESUME

GUIDANCE .

Speech recognition

Embedded speech recognition

The embedded speech recognition of the

Infotainment system enables you to operate various functions of the

Infotainment system via voice input. It recognises commands and numeric sequences independently of the relevant speaker. The commands and numeric sequences can be spoken without a voice pause between the individual words.

In the event of incorrect operation or commands, the speech recognition gives visual and / or acoustic feedback and requests you to re-enter the desired command. Apart from this, the speech recognition acknowledges important commands and will enquire if necessary.

In general, there are different ways to speak commands for performing the desired actions.

Note

To ensure that conversations inside the vehicle do not lead to unintentional triggering of the system functions, the speech recognition does not start until it has been activated.

Activating speech recognition

Note

Speech recognition is not available during an active phone call.

Activation via the w button on the steering wheel

Press w on the steering wheel.

The audio system mutes, a voice output message prompts you to say a command, and help menus with the most important commands currently available are shown on the display.

The speech recognition is ready for voice input, after a beep has been given.

You can now say a voice command to initiate a system function (e.g. playing a preset radio station).

Interrupting a voice prompt

As an experienced user, you can interrupt a voice prompt by briefly pressing w on the steering wheel.

A beep is heard immediately, and a command can be stated without having to wait.

Cancelling a dialogue sequence

To cancel a dialogue sequence and to deactivate the speech recognition, press v on the steering wheel.

Voice pass-thru application

The voice pass-thru application of the

Infotainment system allows access to the speech recognition commands on your smartphone.

Voice pass-through is available via the phone projection applications Apple

CarPlay and Android Auto.

Activating speech recognition

Press and hold s on the steering wheel until a speech recognition session is started.

Adjusting the volume of voice prompts

Turn m on the control panel or press volume button on the steering wheel upwards (increase volume) À or downwards (decrease volume) Á .

Deactivating speech recognition

Press v on the steering wheel. The speech recognition session is ended.

Phone

Important information for operation and traffic safety

9 WARNING

Mobile phones have effects on your environment. For this reason safety regulations and directions have been prepared. You should be familiar with the related directions before you use the telephone function.

9 WARNING

Use of the hands-free facility while driving can be dangerous because your concentration is reduced when telephoning. Park your vehicle before you use the hands-free facility. Follow the stipulations of the country in which you find yourself at present.

Do not forget to follow the special regulations that apply in specific areas and always switch off the mobile phone if the use of mobile phones is prohibited, if interference is caused by the mobile phone or if dangerous situations can occur.

Pairing a device

During the pairing process, PIN code exchange between the Bluetooth device and the Infotainment system and connection of the Bluetooth devices to the Infotainment system are carried out.

Important information

● Two paired Bluetooth devices can be connected to the Infotainment system at the same time. One device in hands-free mode, the other in audio streaming mode, see description on Bluetooth profile settings below.

113

However, two devices cannot be used in hands-free mode at the same time.

● Pairing only needs to be carried out once, unless the device is deleted from the list of paired devices. If the device has been connected previously, the Infotainment system establishes the connection automatically.

● Bluetooth operation considerably drains the device's battery.

Therefore, connect the device to the

USB port for charging.

Pairing a new device

1. Activate the Bluetooth function of the

Bluetooth device. For further information, see the operating instructions for the Bluetooth device.

2. If another Bluetooth device is already connected:

Press a , select OPTIONS , select

Bluetooth connection and then touch o Search .

If no Bluetooth device is currently connected:

Press a and then touch Bluetooth search .

A search for all Bluetooth devices in the near environment is performed.

3. Select the Bluetooth device you wish to pair from the displayed list.

114

4. Confirm the pairing procedure:

● If SSP (secure simple pairing) is supported:

Confirm the messages on the

Infotainment system and the

Bluetooth device.

● If SSP (secure simple pairing) is not supported:

On the Infotainment system: a message is displayed asking you to enter a PIN code on your

Bluetooth device.

On the Bluetooth device: enter the PIN code and confirm your input.

5. Activate the functions you want the paired smartphone to perform and confirm your settings. You can change these Bluetooth profile settings at any time, see below.

The Infotainment system and the device are paired.

6. The phone book is downloaded automatically to the Infotainment system. Depending on the phone, the Infotainment system must be allowed access to the phone book. If required, confirm the messages displayed on the Bluetooth device.

If this function is not supported by the

Bluetooth device, a corresponding message is displayed.

Operations on paired devices

Press a , select OPTIONS and then select Bluetooth connection .

A list of all paired devices is displayed.

Changing the Bluetooth profile settings

Touch † next to the desired paired device.

Activate or deactivate the profile settings as desired and confirm your settings.

Connecting a paired device

Devices which are paired but not connected are identified by — .

Select the desired device to connect it.

Disconnecting a device

The currently connected device is identified by “ .

Select the device to disconnect it.

Deleting a paired device

Touch e in the upper right corner of the screen to display e icons next to each paired device.

Touch e next to the Bluetooth device you want to delete and confirm the displayed message.

Phone main menu

Press a to display the phone main menu.

Many functions of the mobile phone can now be controlled via the phone main menu (and associated submenus), and via the phone-specific controls on the steering wheel.

Initiating a phone call

Entering a phone number

Enter a phone number using the keypad in the phone main menu.

As soon as figures are entered, matching entries from the contacts list are displayed in alphabetical order.

Touch the desired list entry to initiate a phone call.

Using the contacts list

The contacts list contains all phone book entries from the connected Bluetooth device and all contacts from the navigation system.

Select Contacts and then select the desired list type.

Modifying or deleting a contact

Select ð next to the contact and then select the desired option.

If you want to add a photo to the contact:

Connect a USB device with the desired photo stored on it to the USB port, touch the photo frame and then select the desired photo.

Confirm your selection to download the selected photo to the system.

Incoming phone call

If an audio mode, e.g. the radio or USB mode, is active at the moment a call comes in, the audio source is muted and stays muted until the call ends.

A message with the caller's phone number or name is displayed.

Searching for a contact

The contacts are ordered by the first name or surname. To change the order, touch ï .

To scroll through the list, touch a letter from the scroll bar, H or I .

To search for a contact via keyboard, touch Search .

To answer the call, touch v .

To reject the call, touch @ .

115

To put the call on hold, touch / . To resume to the call, touch l .

During the ongoing call, the following menu is displayed.

To mute the microphone of the

Infotainment system, touch Micro OFF .

To continue conversation via the mobile phone (private mode), touch ý Private .

To reactivate the conversation via the

Infotainment system, touch ÿ Private .

Note

If you leave the vehicle and lock it while you are still in a private mode phone conversation, the Infotainment system may remain switched on until you leave the

Bluetooth reception area of the Infotainment system.

116

MULTIMEDIA

Introduction

Important information on operation and traffic safety

9 WARNING

Drive safely at all times. Only operate the

Infotainment system if the traffic conditions allow a safe usage.

In the interest of safety, it might be appropriate to stop the vehicle before operating the Infotainment system.

9 WARNING

The usage of a navigation app does not release the driver from the responsibility for a correct, vigilant attitude in road traffic.

Always follow the applicable traffic rules.

117

MULTIMEDIA

Control panel

118

1 X

If switched off: switch power on / off

If switched on: mute system

Turn: adjust volume

2 c

Display navigation app when phone projection is active

3 _

Open vehicle settings menu

4 b

Open audio menu

5 d

Open menu for picture function

6 :

Open settings menu

7 a

Open phone menu

Display phone projection screen when phone projection is active

8 Info Display / touch screen with Home menu (Home menu only visible after 3finger touch on screen)

9 USB port

Steering wheel controls

1 Short press: activate embedded speech recognition

Long press: activate speech recognition in Apple

CarPlay ™ or Android ™ Auto if phone connected via USB port

2 Toggle through the menus of the Driver Information Centre

3 Select next / previous radio station when radio active or select next / previous track when external devices active or select next / previous entry in station list, media list, call / contacts list when operation started via steering wheel controls

Short press: confirm selected item or display the presets

4 Short press: accept incoming call

Long press: reject incoming call, hang up call, open phone menu

If phone call active: open call in progress menu

5 Select audio source

6 Short press: display the radio station list or the list of tracks

Long press: update the list of radio stations

7 Á / À

Increase / decrease volume

Press both buttons to mute the system, press one button to unmute the system

119

Steering column controls

1 Radio: select the previous / next preset radio station

Media: select the previous / next track or select the previous / next item in a menu or a list

2 Short press: display the list of radio stations or folders

Long press: update the list of radio stations or display the available sorting options for media

3 Confirm selected item

4 Short press: select audio source, accept an incoming call or end a call

Long press: display the call list

Buttons on the back side:

120

Increase / decrease volume

Press both buttons to mute or unmute the system

Control elements

The Infotainment system is operated via function buttons, a touch screen and menus that are shown on the display.

Inputs are made optionally via:

● the control panel on the Infotainment system

● the touch screen

● audio controls on the steering wheel

● the speech recognition

Basic operation

The display of the Infotainment system has a touch-sensitive surface that allows direct interaction with the displayed menu controls.

CAUTION

Do not use pointed or hard items like ballpoint pens, pencils or similar for touch screen operation.

Audio settings

Press b , select OPTIONS and then select AUDIO SETTINGS .

The following settings can be adjusted:

● Ambience

● Balance

● Sound

●

●

Voice

Ringtone

System settings

Press : .

The following settings can be adjusted:

● system configuration

● language

● screen configuration

● time and date

Storing your personal settings

To go to the profile settings, touch the top line of the screen and then select

Profiles .

You can store a multitude of settings in a personal profile. For example, all current tone settings, all radio presets and a phone book.

In case you share the vehicle with other people, this enables you to restore your personal settings from your profile at any time.

A maximum of three personal profiles may be stored.

Additionally, a Common profile is available. All settings done at any time are automatically stored in that profile. If no personal profile is activated, the

Common profile is active.

Storing your personal profile

After performing all your personal settings:

Select one of the personal profile tabs.

Select the input field o and enter the desired name of your personal profile.

Finally, confirm your inputs to store them in your personal profile.

Activating your personal profile

Touch the top line of the screen, then select Profiles and then select the tab with the name of your personal profile.

Activating the Common profile

If a personal profile is currently active:

Go to the Common profile tab and then select Activate profile .

Resetting a personal profile

You can at any time reset a personal profile to restore the default factory settings on that profile.

Activate the respective profile and then select Reset the profile .

Resetting the Common profile

You can at any time reset the Common profile to restore the default factory settings on that profile.

Select Common profile and then select

Reset the common profile .

Audio

Activating the radio

Press b . The audio main menu last selected is displayed.

If the radio main menu is not active, select

SOURCES and then select Radio .

121

The station last played will be received.

Selecting a waveband

Select OPTIONS and repeatedly touch i

to toggle between the different wavebands.

Searching for stations

Automatic station search

Briefly touch < or > to play the previous or next receivable station.

Manual station search

Press and hold < or > . Release when the required frequency has almost been reached.

A search is made for the next station that can be received and it is played automatically.

Station lists

In the station lists, all receivable radio stations within the current reception area are available for selection.

To display the station list of the waveband currently active, select List .

Select the desired station.

Update station lists

If the stations stored in the wavebandspecific station list can no longer be received, the station lists must be updated.

To start an update for the currently active waveband, select Ü .

Storing favourite stations

Up to 24 radio stations of all wavebands can be stored as favourites in the

Presets list.

Select Presets to display the preset buttons.

Storing the currently active station

Touch and hold the desired button in the

Presets list for a few seconds. The respective frequency or station name is displayed on the button.

If a station is already stored on a preset button, that station will be overwritten by the new one.

Alternatively, touch ✩ Mem in the radio main menu to store the currently active station.

Storing a station from a station list

Select OPTIONS and then select the desired waveband.

To store a station from the station list, briefly touch ✩ next to the desired station. The station is stored and the number of the preset button will be displayed. To delete a station, touch

; again.

Alternatively, touch and hold the name of the station until it is stored. To delete the station, touch and hold the name of the station again until a corresponding message is displayed.

Retrieving stations

In the radio main menu select Presets and then briefly touch the preset button of the desired station.

Activating RDS

In the radio main menu, select

OPTIONS and activate RDS .

122

If RDS is activated, RDS is displayed in the bottom line of the radio main menu.

Radio text

If RDS is activated, information on the radio programme currently active or the music track currently playing are displayed below the programme name.

To show or hide the information, go to the

OPTIONS menu and activate or deactivate Information .

Traffic announcements

Many RDS stations broadcast traffic news. If the traffic announcements function is activated, radio or media playback is interrupted for the duration of a traffic announcement.

To activate traffic announcements, go to the OPTIONS menu and activate TA .

If TA is activated, TA is displayed in the bottom line of the radio main menu.

FM-DAB Linking

This function enables switching from an

FM station to a corresponding DAB station and vice versa.

Switching from FM to DAB occurs as soon as a corresponding DAB station is available. Therefore, it is recommended to store favourite stations as DAB stations to reduce frequent switching.

Switching from DAB to FM occurs if the signal is too weak to be picked up by the receiver.

Activation

Precondition is that RDS is activated before FM-DAB Linking can be activated.

To activate FM-DAB Linking, select

OPTIONS in the radio main menu and then activate FM-DAB Follow-up .

The following symbol will be displayed when FM-DAB Linking is activated:

Deactivation

To deactivate FM-DAB Linking, select

OPTIONS in the radio main menu and then deselect FM-DAB Follow-up .

FM-DAB Linking will automatically be deactivated when RDS is deactivated.

External devices

A USB port is located on the control panel. Another USB port may be located in the storage compartment next to the

Info Display.

CAUTION

To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.

Note

The USB ports must always be kept clean and dry.

Activating the music function

Connecting the USB or Bluetooth device.

If device already connected, but playback of stored music files not active:

Press b , select SOURCES and then select the respective source.

Playback of the audio tracks starts automatically.

Playback functions

Interrupting and resuming playback

Touch = to interrupt playback. The screen button changes to l .

Touch l to resume playback.

Playing the previous or next track

Touch < or > .

Fast forwarding and rewinding

Touch and hold < or > . Release to return to normal playback mode.

Alternatively, you can move the slider showing the current track position to the left or right.

Playing tracks randomly

Select OPTIONS and touch the

Random icon repeatedly: j : play tracks of currently selected list

(album, artist, etc.) in random order.

123

k : play tracks of currently selected list

(album, artist, etc.) in normal playback mode.

Repeating tracks

Select OPTIONS and touch the

Repeat icon n repeatedly to select one of the following options:

● repeat tracks of currently selected list (album, artist, etc.)

● repeat tracks of currently selected list (album, artist, etc.) once

● play tracks of currently selected list

(album, artist, etc.) in normal playback mode

Activating the picture viewer

Connecting the USB device.

If device already connected, but picture viewer not active:

Press d , select Photos and choose the desired folder and picture.

Touch the screen to display the menu bar.

Viewing the previous or next picture

Touch l or m .

Starting or stopping a slide show

Select l to view the pictures stored on the USB device in a slide show.

Touch / to end the slide show.

Phone projection

The phone projection applications Apple

CarPlay and Android Auto display selected apps from your smartphone on the Info Display and allow their operation directly via the Infotainment controls.

Check with the device's manufacturer if this function is compatible with your smartphone and if this application is available in the country you are in.

124

Preparing the smartphone iPhone ® : Make sure Siri ® is activated on your phone.

Android phone: Download the Android

Auto app to your phone from the Google

Play ™ Store.

Connecting the smartphone iPhone

Connect the phone to the USB port.

If the phone is already connected via

Bluetooth, upon connecting to the USB port and launching Apple CarPlay, the

Bluetooth connection will disconnect.

After disconnecting the USB connection, the phone will be connected via

Bluetooth again.

Android phone

Connect the phone via Bluetooth and then connect the phone to the USB port.

Starting phone projection

If phone projection is not starting automatically, press a and then touch

Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

The phone projection screen displayed depends on your smartphone and software version.

Returning to the Infotainment screen

Press, e.g., the b button on the control panel.

Speech recognition

Embedded speech recognition

The embedded speech recognition of the

Infotainment system enables you to operate various functions of the

Infotainment system via voice input. It recognises commands and numeric sequences independently of the relevant speaker. The commands and numeric sequences can be spoken without a voice pause between the individual words.

In the event of incorrect operation or commands, the speech recognition gives visual and / or acoustic feedback and requests you to re-enter the desired command. Apart from this, the speech recognition acknowledges important commands and will enquire if necessary.

In general, there are different ways to speak commands for performing the desired actions.

Note

To ensure that conversations inside the vehicle do not lead to unintentional triggering of the system functions, the speech recognition does not start until it has been activated.

Activating speech recognition

Note

Speech recognition is not available during an active phone call.

Activation via the w button on the steering wheel

Press w on the steering wheel.

The audio system mutes, a voice output message prompts you to say a command, and help menus with the most important commands currently available are shown on the display.

The speech recognition is ready for voice input, after a beep has been given.

You can now say a voice command to initiate a system function (e.g. playing a preset radio station).

Interrupting a voice prompt

As an experienced user, you can interrupt a voice prompt by briefly pressing w on the steering wheel.

A beep is heard immediately, and a command can be stated without having to wait.

Cancelling a dialogue sequence

To cancel a dialogue sequence and to deactivate the speech recognition, press v on the steering wheel.

Voice pass-thru application

The voice pass-thru application of the

Infotainment system allows access to the speech recognition commands on your smartphone.

Voice pass-through is available via the phone projection applications Apple

CarPlay and Android Auto.

Activating speech recognition

Press and hold s on the steering wheel until a speech recognition session is started.

Adjusting the volume of voice prompts

Turn m on the control panel or press volume button on the steering wheel upwards (increase volume) À or downwards (decrease volume) Á .

Deactivating speech recognition

Press v on the steering wheel. The speech recognition session is ended.

Phone

Important information for operation and traffic safety

9 WARNING

Mobile phones have effects on your environment. For this reason safety regulations and directions have been prepared. You should be familiar with the related directions before you use the telephone function.

9 WARNING

Use of the hands-free facility while driving can be dangerous because your concentration is reduced when

125

telephoning. Park your vehicle before you use the hands-free facility. Follow the stipulations of the country in which you find yourself at present.

Do not forget to follow the special regulations that apply in specific areas and always switch off the mobile phone if the use of mobile phones is prohibited, if interference is caused by the mobile phone or if dangerous situations can occur.

Pairing a device

During the pairing process, PIN code exchange between the Bluetooth device and the Infotainment system and connection of the Bluetooth devices to the Infotainment system are carried out.

Important information

● Two paired Bluetooth devices can be connected to the Infotainment system at the same time. One device in hands-free mode, the other in audio streaming mode, see description on Bluetooth profile settings below.

However, two devices cannot be used in hands-free mode at the same time.

● Pairing only needs to be carried out once, unless the device is deleted from the list of paired devices. If the device has been connected previously, the Infotainment system establishes the connection automatically.

● Bluetooth operation considerably drains the device's battery.

Therefore, connect the device to the

USB port for charging.

Pairing a new device

1. Activate the Bluetooth function of the

Bluetooth device. For further information, see the operating instructions for the Bluetooth device.

2. Press a and then touch Bluetooth search .

A search for all Bluetooth devices in the near environment is performed.

3. Select the Bluetooth device you wish to pair from the displayed list.

4. Confirm the pairing procedure:

● If SSP (secure simple pairing) is supported:

Confirm the messages on the

Infotainment system and the

Bluetooth device.

● If SSP (secure simple pairing) is not supported:

On the Infotainment system: a message is displayed asking you to enter a PIN code on your

Bluetooth device.

On the Bluetooth device: enter the PIN code and confirm your input.

The Infotainment system and the device are paired.

5. The phone book is downloaded automatically to the Infotainment system. Depending on the phone, the Infotainment system must be allowed access to the phone book. If required, confirm the messages displayed on the Bluetooth device.

If this function is not supported by the

Bluetooth device, a corresponding message is displayed.

Operations on paired devices

Press a , select TEL and then select

Bluetooth connection .

A list of all paired devices is displayed.

Changing the Bluetooth profile settings

Touch % next to the desired paired device.

Activate or deactivate the profile settings as desired and confirm your settings.

Connecting a paired device

Devices which are paired but not connected are identified by — .

Select the desired device to connect it.

126

Disconnecting a device

The currently connected device is identified by “ .

Select the device to disconnect it.

Deleting a paired device

Touch e in the upper right corner of the screen to display e icons next to each paired device.

Touch e next to the Bluetooth device you want to delete and confirm the displayed message.

Phone main menu

Press a to display the phone main menu.

Initiating a phone call

Entering a phone number

Enter a phone number using the keypad in the phone main menu.

As soon as figures are entered, matching entries from the contacts list are displayed in alphabetical order.

Touch the desired list entry to initiate a phone call.

Using the contacts list

The contacts list contains all phone book entries from the connected Bluetooth device.

Select Contacts to see the contacts list.

To search for a contact via the first letter, touch r and select the desired letter.

Modifying or deleting a contact

Select ð next to the contact and then select the desired option.

Using the call history

All incoming, outgoing, or missed calls are registered.

Select Recent calls to see the call history.

Select the desired list entry to initiate a call.

Incoming phone call

If an audio mode, e.g. the radio or USB mode, is active at the moment a call comes in, the audio source is muted and stays muted until the call ends.

A message with the caller's phone number or name is displayed.

Many functions of the mobile phone can now be controlled via the phone main menu (and associated submenus), and via the phone-specific controls on the steering wheel.

Searching for a contact

The contacts are ordered by the first name or surname. To change the order, touch OPTIONS and then p

.

To scroll through the list, touch H or

I .

To search for a contact via keyboard, touch * .

127

To answer the call, touch v .

To reject the call, touch @ .

To put the call on hold, touch / . To resume to the call, touch l .

To mute the microphone of the

Infotainment system, touch Micro OFF and 0 will appear. To cancel the mute function, press 0 again.

To continue conversation via the mobile phone (private mode), touch t . To reactivate the conversation via the

Infotainment system, touch t

again.

Note

If you leave the vehicle and lock it while you are still in a private mode phone conversation, the Infotainment system may remain switched on until you leave the

Bluetooth reception area of the Infotainment system.

TOUCHSCREEN RADIO

Introduction

Note

This manual describes all options and features available for the various Infotainment systems. Certain descriptions, including those for display and menu functions, may not apply to this vehicle due to model variant, country specifications, special equipment or accessories.

For additional information including some videos, visit us online.

Important information on operation and traffic safety

9 WARNING

The Infotainment system must be used so that the vehicle can be driven safely at all times. If in doubt, stop the vehicle and operate the Infotainment system while the vehicle is stationary.

Radio reception

Radio reception may be disrupted by static, noise, distortion or loss of reception due to:

● changes in distance from the transmitter

● multipath reception due to reflection

● shadowing

128

TOUCHSCREEN RADIO

Control panel

129

1 )

Press: switch power on / off

2 b

Turn: adjust volume

3 i

Display the radio menu

4 G

Display the media menu for external devices

5 a

Display the phone menu if a mobile phone is connected

Display a list of all paired devices if no phone is connected

6 h

USB port for external devices

7 :

Display the system settings menu

8 _

Display the vehicle settings menu

Steering wheel controls

1 Short press: activate smartphone voice commands via the system

2 Toggle through the menus of the Driver Information Centre

3 Select next / previous preset radio station when radio active or select next / previous track when external devices active or select next / previous entry in station list, media list, call / contacts list when operation started via steering wheel controls

Short press: confirm selected item or display the presets

4 Short press: accept incoming call, end a call or display the call list

Long press: reject incoming call

If phone call active: open call in progress menu

5 Select audio source

6 Short press: display the radio station list or the list of tracks

7 Á / À

Increase / decrease volume

Press both buttons to mute the system, press one button to unmute the system

130

Steering column controls

1 Radio: select the previous / next preset radio station

Media: select the previous / next track or select the previous / next item in a menu or a list

2 Short press: display the list of radio stations or folders

Long press: update the list of radio stations or display the available sorting options for media

3 Confirm selected item

4 Short press: select audio source, accept an incoming call or end a call

Long press: display the call list

Buttons on the back side:

Increase / decrease volume

Press both buttons to mute or unmute the system

Top bar

The top bar on the screen indicates the following information:

● time

● temperature

Basic operation

Screen operations

The display of the Infotainment system has a touch-sensitive surface that allows direct interaction with the displayed menu controls.

CAUTION

Do not use pointed or hard items like ballpoint pens, pencils or similar for touch screen operation.

Use the following finger gestures to control the Infotainment system.

131

Touch

Touch is used to open a menu or select an option.

Touch and hold

Touch and hold can be used to save radio stations.

Returning to the previous screen

To return to the previous screen, touch

3 in the upper left corner of the screen.

When 3 is touched on the home screen, the audio screen will be displayed.

Returning to the home screen

To return to the home screen, touch c .

System settings

To display the system settings menu, go to the home screen and select : .

The following submenus are available:

● Display: Adjust the display brightness and the text scrolling or turn the screen off.

● Date/Time: Adjust the date and the time.

● System: Adjust the privacy settings for data sharing and vehicle position, reset the system to the factory settings, adjust the units and see the system information.

● Languages: Change the system language.

● Bluetooth : Display a list of all paired devices.

● Audio: Activate / deactivate speed compensated volume and touch tones and adjust sound distribution, ambience, bass and treble.

Audio

Overview

%

96.70

/

: Touch to go to the previous station / song or touch and hold for rewinding.

: Touch to enter a frequency.

: Touch to go to the next station / song or touch and hold for fast forwarding.

: Adjust the audio settings.

:

SOURCE : Select the audio source.

n o

: Display the station list / tracklist.

: Display the favourites list.

Sources

Touch SOURCE and select the desired audio source. The currently active audio source will be indicated.

132

When an external device will be connected, the Infotainment system automatically selects the external device as the audio source. When the external device will be disconnected, the previous audio source will be selected.

Station tuning

To tune into a certain radio station, open the station list n and touch ABC . All receivable radio stations are sorted by the first letter.

To tune into a specific frequency, touch the frequency indication on the radio main screen. A new screen will be displayed with a number pad. A frequency can be entered.

Station list

To display the station list, touch n .

The currently active radio station will be indicated by _ .

Favourite radio stations will be indicated by ; .

To update the station list, touch : and select Update list.

Favourites

Up to 16 radio stations can be saved as favourites. Touch o to display the favourites list.

To save the currently active radio station as a favourite, touch and hold the desired row in the favourites list.

Traffic announcement

Traffic announcement is a service of FM radio stations. When traffic programme is activated, the currently playing audio source will be interrupted when an FM radio station is broadcasting traffic news.

The audio source will be switched back when the traffic news are over.

Traffic announcements can be activated or deactivated in the radio settings : .

RDS switching

When RDS switching is activated, the

Infotainment system always tunes into the best receivable broadcasting frequency of the currently active radio station.

RDS switching can be activated or deactivated in the radio settings : .

Note

After switching, the volume might be different.

External devices

A USB port for the connection of external devices is located next to the Info

Display.

When an external audio source (via USB or Bluetooth) is connected and selected as audio source, the following symbols will be displayed on the audio screen:

5 : Interrupt playback.

4 : Resume playback.

n : Display the tracklist.

* : Display the library (folders, artists, albums, playlists, songs).

In the library * , the tracks can be sorted by artist, album etc.

When a folder is selected in the library

*

, only the tracks of the corresponding folder are displayed in the tracklist n .

The following playback functions can be activated in the media settings : :

Repeat : Repeat the tracks of the current list.

Shuffle : Play tracks in random order.

Audio settings

To adjust the audio settings, touch : on the audio screen and select Audio settings. The following settings can be adjusted:

● Activate / deactivate speed compensated volume

● Activate / deactivate touch tones

● Adjust sound distribution

● Adjust ambience, bass and treble

133

Speech recognition

The voice pass-thru application of the

Infotainment system allows access to the speech recognition commands on a smartphone. See the smartphone manufacturer's operating instructions to find out whether the smartphone supports this feature.

In order to use the voice pass-thru application, the smartphone must be connected via Bluetooth.

Activating speech recognition

Press and hold Y on the steering wheel until a speech recognition session is started.

Adjusting the volume of voice prompts

Turn ) on the control panel or press the volume button on the steering wheel upwards (increase volume) Y or downwards (decrease volume) Z .

Deactivating speech recognition

Press 6 on the steering wheel. The speech recognition session is ended.

Phone

Not every mobile phone fully supports the phone function. Therefore, deviations from the range of functions described below are possible.

134

Phone main menu q : Display the call list.

r : Display the contact list.

s : Display the number pad.

t : Call the answering machine if a voicemail number is set.

V : Display a list of all paired devices.

: : Adjust the phone settings.

Note

On some mobile phones, access permissions for contact and call lists may have to be set when connecting the mobile phone to the Infotainment system.

Making a phone call

To make a phone call, either choose a contact from the contact list or dial a phone number via the number pad.

Phone settings

To go to the phone settings menu, go to the phone menu and select : .

The following settings are adjustable:

● Putting phone calls automatically on hold.

● Setting a voicemail number.

Pairing a phone

To pair a mobile phone, proceed as follows:

1. Enable Bluetooth on the mobile phone and ensure it is visible for other devices.

2. On the Info Display, select Telephone

I Manage devices.

3. Touch Add.

Mobile phones are being searched.

4. Select the desired mobile phone.

5. Select the Infotainment system from the Bluetooth device list on the mobile phone.

6. Compare and confirm the shown code on the mobile phone and on the

Info Display. Touch OK on the Info

Display.

Alternatively, a number pad might appear on the Info Display. Enter the code that is shown on the mobile phone.

Some mobile phones require access to certain phone features, follow the instructions.

7. Determine whether the mobile phone is to be connected for the phone function and music streaming.

Once the mobile phone is successfully paired, it will be connected automatically and shown as connected.

If the mobile phone is connected for the phone function, a will be displayed in the list of paired devices.

If the mobile phone is connected for music streaming, p will be displayed in the list of paired devices.

Disconnecting and connecting a mobile phone

1. In the phone menu on the Info

Display, select Bluetooth .

2. To disconnect the currently connected mobile phone, touch the corresponding mobile phone and select Yes.

The mobile phone is disconnected.

3. To connect another paired mobile phone, touch the corresponding mobile phone and select Yes.

The mobile phone is connected.

Deleting a paired mobile phone

1. In the phone menu on the Info

Display, select Bluetooth I Manage devices.

2. Touch Delete.

3. Select the desired mobile phone.

4. Touch Yes.

The mobile phone is deleted.

135

RADIO

Introduction

Important information on operation and traffic safety

9 WARNING

Drive safely at all times when using the

Infotainment system.

If in doubt, stop the vehicle before operating the Infotainment system.

136

RADIO

Control panel

137

1 X

If switched off: short press: switch power on

If switched on: short press: mute system; long press: switch power off

Turn: adjust volume

2 BAND

Short press: toggle between the wavebands

3 TA INFO

Short press: activate or deactivate traffic announcements

Long press: open the TA settings

4 Info Display

5 G

Short press: open menu for tone and volume settings

6 LIST

Radio: short press: display stations list; long press: update stations list

Media: short press: display folders list; long press: display the track listing options

7 ß

Menu: one level back

Input: delete last character or entire entry

8 MENU

Short press: display home page

9 OK

Short press: confirm a setting or open a submenu

10 { / }

Radio: short press: manual station search

Media: short press: select next or previous folder, genre, artist or playlist; long press: scroll in a list

H / I

Radio: short press: automatic station search for the previous or next station; long press: seek up or down

Media: short press: select previous or next track; long press: fast forward or rewind

11 USB port

12 Preset buttons

Short press: select favourites

Long press: save radio stations as favourites

13 Î

Short press: toggle through the different display modes

Long press: turn display off

(while the sound remains active)

14 SRC q

Short press: toggle between the audio sources

Long press: open phone menu if phone connected

138

Steering wheel controls

1 Short press: activate smartphone voice commands via the system

2 Toggle through the menus of the Driver Information Centre

3 Select next / previous preset radio station when radio active or select next / previous track when external devices active or select next / previous entry in station list, media list, call / contacts list when operation started via steering wheel controls

Short press: confirm selected item or display the presets

4 Short press: accept incoming call, end a call or display the call list

Long press: reject incoming call

If phone call active: open call in progress menu

5 Select audio source

6 Short press: display the radio station list or the list of tracks

7 Á / À

Increase / decrease volume

Press both buttons to mute the system, press one button to unmute the system

Steering column controls

1 Radio: select the previous / next preset radio station

Media: select the previous / next track or select the previous / next item in a menu or a list

2 Short press: display the list of radio stations or folders

Long press: update the list of radio stations or display the available sorting options for media

3 Confirm selected item

4 Short press: select audio source, accept an incoming call or end a call

Long press: display the call list

Buttons on the back side:

139

140

Increase / decrease volume

Press both buttons to mute or unmute the system

Control elements

The Infotainment system is operated via function buttons, navigation buttons and menus that are shown on the display.

Inputs are made optionally via:

● the control panel on the Infotainment system

● controls on the steering wheel

Basic operation

OK button

Press OK :

● to confirm or activate the selected option

● to confirm a set value

● to activate or deactivate a function

● to open a menu

ß button

Press ß :

● to exit a menu

● to return from a submenu to the next higher menu level

Audio settings

In the tone and volume settings menu, the tone characteristics and volume settings can be adjusted.

The settings on page 1 can be set individually for each audio source. The settings on page 2 are set for all audio sources.

Press G to open the tone and volume settings menu.

Press G again to display the second tone and volume settings page. Alternatively, select

Audio

Other settings…

System settings

.

Open the settings menu to perform some basic system configurations, e.g.:

● Adjust the display of units for temperature or fuel consumption

● Change the display language

● Adjust date and time

Repeatedly press BAND to toggle between the different wavebands. Select the desired waveband.

As an alternative, repeatedly press

SRC q to toggle between all audio sources and select the desired waveband.

The station last selected in the respective waveband is played.

Automatic station search

Press H or I to play the previous or next station in the station memory.

Manual station search

Press and hold H or I . Release when the required frequency has almost been reached.

A search is made for the next station that can be received and it is played automatically.

Station tuning

Press or press and hold { or } to set the desired frequency manually.

Stations lists

The stations received best in the location you are in are stored in the wavebandspecific stations list.

Displaying the stations list

Press LIST to display the stations list of the waveband currently active.

Scroll through the list and select the desired station.

Note

The station currently playing is marked with

6 .

Updating the stations list

Press and hold LIST until a message indicating the update process is displayed.

The stations list is updated.

Preset buttons

The six favourite radio stations of each waveband can be stored on preset buttons. When pressing one of the preset buttons, the favourites page is displayed.

Note

The station currently playing is marked with

6 .

Storing preset stations

To store a station to a preset button, activate the desired waveband and station. When the station is playing, press and hold one of the preset button 1...6

on which the desired station is to be stored.

The station name or frequency is displayed next to the respective favourite on the screen.

Retrieving preset stations

To retrieve a station stored as a favourite, press the respective preset button 1...6.

Radio data system

If the FM signal of a station is too weak to be picked up by the receiver, the

Infotainment system can automatically tune to an alternative FM frequency to continue the programme.

Activate the FM waveband and then press OK to display the waveband menu.

Activate RDS .

If RDS alternative frequency search is activated, RDS is displayed in the top line of the screen. If a station is not an RDS station, RDS is crossed out.

Note

This function can also be changed via the multimedia menus. Press MENU and then select Multimedia .

Radio text

Radio text contains additional information broadcasted by the radio stations, e.g. station name, title or artist of the song currently playing, news information etc.

Activate the FM waveband and then press OK to display the waveband menu.

Activate RadioText .

141

If the radio text function is activated,

TXT is displayed in the top line of the screen. If a station does not support the radio text function, TXT is crossed out.

Note

This function can also be changed via the multimedia menus. Press MENU and then select Multimedia .

Traffic announcements (TA)

Radio traffic service stations are RDS stations that broadcast traffic news. If this function is activated, only traffic service stations are searched for and played.

Radio and media playback is interrupted for the duration of the traffic announcements.

To activate or deactivate the traffic announcement standby facility of the

Infotainment system, press TA . A corresponding message is displayed confirming your action.

If traffic announcements are activated,

TA is displayed in the top line of the screen. If a station is not a radio traffic service station, TA is crossed out.

Digital audio broadcasting

If the DAB signal of a service is too weak to be picked up by the receiver, the

Infotainment system can automatically tune to an alternative FM frequency to continue the programme.

142

Activate the FM waveband and then press OK to display the waveband menu.

Activate DAB FM tracking .

Note

This function can also be changed via the multimedia menus. Press MENU and then select Multimedia .

If DAB FM automatical tracking is activated, DAB FM is displayed in the top line of the screen. If a station does not support this function, DAB FM is crossed out.

DAB station details

Activate the FM waveband and then press OK to display the waveband menu.

Select DAB details to display detailed information on the DAB station currently playing.

External devices

On the control panel, there is a USB port for the connection of external audio data sources.

Note

The socket must always be kept clean and dry.

CAUTION

Avoid disconnecting the device during playback. This may damage the device or the Infotainment system.

Activating the USB music function

If the device is not yet connected to the

Infotainment system, connect the device.

The Infotainment system automatically switches to USB music mode.

If the device is already connected, repeatedly press SRC q to change to

USB music mode.

Playback of the audio tracks starts automatically.

Playing the next or previous track

Press I to play the next track.

Press H to play the previous track.

Fast forwarding and rewinding

Press and hold H or I . Release to return to normal playback mode.

Playing the next or previous folder/ artist/playlist

Press } to play the next folder, artist, album, or playlist depending on the track listing options.

Press { to play the previous folder, artist, album, or playlist depending on the track listing options.

Browse menu

Using the browse menu, you can search for a track via categories.

Browse function

To display the browse list, press LIST .

The tracks are sorted in categories of folders, genres, artists, and playlists.

Select the desired categories and choose a track. Select the track to start playback.

Choice of track listing

Press and hold LIST to display a selection menu. Scroll through the list and select the desired track listing option. The browse menu is changed accordingly.

Note

Depending on the metadata stored on the device, not all track listing options may be available.

Note

This function can also be changed via the multimedia menus. Press MENU and then select Multimedia .

USB music menu

In the USB music menu, you can set the play mode for the tracks on the device connected.

Activate the USB music mode and then press OK to display the USB music menu.

Activate the desired play mode.

Normal : The songs of the album, folder or playlist chosen are played in the usual order.

Random : The songs of the album, folder or playlist chosen are played in random order.

Random all : All tracks stored on the device connected are played in random order.

Repeat : The album, folder or playlist chosen is played repeatedly.

Bluetooth music

Press MENU and then select

Connections . Select Connections management and then choose the desired Bluetooth device to enter a submenu.

To serve as audio source, the device must be connected as media player.

Select Connect media player or

Connect telephone + media player as desired. The device is connected.

Select Disconnect media player to disconnect the device only as Bluetooth audio source. In this case, the connection for the telephone function remains active.

To completely disconnect the device, select Disconnect telephone + media player .

Select Yes in the message and press

OK .

Speech recognition

The voice pass-thru application of the

Infotainment system allows access to the speech recognition commands on a smartphone. See the smartphone manufacturer's operating instructions to find out whether the smartphone supports this feature.

In order to use the voice pass-thru application, the smartphone must be connected via Bluetooth.

Activating speech recognition

Press and hold s on the steering wheel until a speech recognition session is started.

Adjusting the volume of voice prompts

Turn m on the control panel or press the volume button on the steering wheel upwards (increase volume) À or downwards (decrease volume) Á .

Deactivating speech recognition

Press v on the steering wheel. The speech recognition session is ended.

143

Phone

Important information for operation and traffic safety

9 WARNING

Mobile phones have effects on your environment. For this reason safety regulations and directions have been prepared. You should be familiar with the related directions before you use the telephone function.

9 WARNING

Use of the hands-free facility while driving can be dangerous because your concentration is reduced when telephoning. Park your vehicle before you use the hands-free facility. Follow the stipulations of the country in which you find yourself at present.

Do not forget to follow the special regulations that apply in specific areas and always switch off the mobile phone if the use of mobile phones is prohibited, if interference is caused by the mobile phone or if dangerous situations can occur.

Pairing a Bluetooth device

Activate the Bluetooth function of the

Bluetooth device. For further information, see the operating instructions for the

Bluetooth device.

144

Press MENU , select Connections and press OK .

Select Search for a device and press

OK . As soon as the device is detected, the list Devices detected is displayed.

● If SSP (secure simple pairing) is supported: Confirm the messages on the Infotainment system and the

Bluetooth device.

● If SSP (secure simple pairing) is not supported: On the Infotainment system: a message is displayed asking you to enter a PIN code on your Bluetooth device. On the

Bluetooth device: enter the PIN code and confirm your input.

The device is automatically connected. In the top line of the display, the Bluetooth symbol is changed: The X of the symbol is suppressed and N is shown.

Note

Your mobile phone book will be downloaded automatically. The presentation and order of the telephone book entries may be different on the Infotainment system's display and the mobile phone's display.

If the Bluetooth connection has been successfully performed: in case another

Bluetooth device had been connected to the Infotainment system, this device is now disconnected from the system.

If the Bluetooth connection failed: start the procedure described above again or consult the operating instructions for the

Bluetooth device.

Initiating a phone call

Entering a number manually

Press MENU , select Telephone and then select

Select Dial .

Call .

Enter the desired number: Select the desired digits and confirm each digit with

OK .

To start dialling, select OK

Using the phone book

on the display.

The phone book contains contact names and numbers.

Press MENU and then select

Telephone .

Select Call and then select Directory .

To start dialling, scroll through the list and select the desired entry name.

Using the call list

All incoming, outgoing, or missed calls are registered in the call list.

Press MENU and then select

Telephone .

Select Call and then select Calls list .

To start dialling, scroll through the list and select the desired entry.

Sending contacts from a mobile device to the Infotainment system

With certain telephones connected by

Bluetooth, you can send a contact to the directory of the Infotainment system.

Contacts imported this way are saved in a permanent directory visible to all, irrespective of the telephone connect.

To enter this directory, press MENU and then select Telephone .

Select Directory management .

The menu for this directory is not accessible if it is empty.

Putting incoming calls automatically on hold

For safety reasons the Infotainment system can put all incoming calls on hold by default.

To activate this function, press MENU and then select Telephone .

Select Telephone management and then select Telephone parameters .

To activate the Automatic on hold function, press OK .

Incoming phone call

If an audio mode, e.g. the radio or CD mode, is active at the time of an incoming call, the relating audio source will be muted and stay muted until the call ends.

To answer the call, select Yes in the message shown in the display.

To reject the call, select No in the message shown in the display or press and hold G on the steering wheel.

To put an incoming call on hold, select

On hold in the message shown in the display.

Second incoming phone call

If a second phone call comes in during an ongoing call, a message is displayed.

To answer the second call and end the ongoing call: select Yes in the message shown in the display.

To reject the second call and continue the ongoing call: select No in the message shown in the display.

Functions during a phone call

During an ongoing phone call, you can use the functions of the contextual menu.

Press OK to open the contextual menu.

To end the call, select Hang up .

To switch off the microphone, activate

Micro OFF . To switch the microphone on, deselect Micro OFF .

To transfer the call to the telephone (for example to leave the vehicle while continuing the conversation), activate

Telephone mode . To transfer the call to the Infotainment system, deselect

Telephone mode .

To put the call on hold, select On hold during an ongoing call. If a call has been put on hold, the menu item On hold changes to Resume . To return to a call put on hold, select Resume .

To switch between two calls, select

Switch .

145

CLIMATE CONTROL

Climate control systems ................. 146

Heating and ventilation system ..... 146

Air conditioning system ................ 147

Electronic climate control system . 149

Parking heater ............................. 152

Temperature preconditioning ....... 153

Air vents ......................................... 155

Adjustable air vents ...................... 155

Fixed air vents .............................. 156

Maintenance .................................. 156

Air intake ...................................... 156

Air conditioning regular operation . 156

Service ........................................ 156

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEMS

Heating and ventilation system

Controls for:

● temperature n

● air distribution l , M and K

● fan speed Z

● air recirculation u

● heated rear window and exterior mirrors e

● heated seats ß

Heated rear window e 3 23.

Heated exterior mirrors e 3 20.

Heated seats ß 3 30.

Temperature

Adjust the temperature by turning n to the desired temperature.

HI : warm

LO : cold

Heating will not be fully effective until the engine has reached normal operating temperature.

Air distribution l : to windscreen and front door windows

M : to head area via adjustable air vents

K : to foot well and windscreen

All combinations are possible.

Fan speed

Adjust the air flow by turning x to the desired speed.

clockwise : increase anticklockwise : decrease

Air recirculation system u

146

Press u to activate air recirculation mode. The LED in the button illuminates to indicate activation.

Press u again to deactivate air recirculation mode.

9 WARNING

The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. In operation without cooling the air humidity increases, so the windows may mist up from inside. The quality of the passenger compartment air deteriorates, which may cause the vehicle occupants to feel drowsy.

In warm and very humid ambient air conditions, the windscreen may mist up from outside when cold air is directed towards it. If windscreen mists up from outside, activate windscreen wiper and deactivate l .

Demisting and defrosting

● Press l : the air distribution is directed towards the windscreen.

● Set temperature controller n to warmest level.

● Set fan speed x to highest level.

● Switch on heated rear window e .

● Open side air vents as required and direct them towards the door windows.

Heated rear window, windscreen and exterior mirrors b 3 23.

Heated seats ß 3 30.

Air conditioning system

Heated exterior mirrors e 3 20.

Temperature n

Adjust the temperature by turning n to the desired temperature.

HI : warm

LO : cold

Heating will not be fully effective until the engine has reached normal operating temperature.

Air distribution l , M , K l : to windscreen and front door windows

M : to head area via adjustable air vents

K : to foot well

All combinations are possible.

Fan speed x

Adjust the air flow by turning x to the desired speed.

clockwise : increase anticlockwise : decrease

Controls for:

● temperature n

● air distribution l , M and K

● fan speed x

● cooling A/C

● air recirculation q

● heated rear window and exterior mirrors e

Heated rear window e 3 23.

147

Cooling A/C Air recirculation system q Maximum cooling

Press A/C to switch on cooling. The LED in the button illuminates to indicate activation. Cooling is only functional when the engine is running and fan is switched on.

Press A/C again to switch off cooling.

The air conditioning system cools and dehumidifies (dries) as soon as the outside temperature is slightly above the freezing point. Therefore, condensation may form and drip from under the vehicle.

If no cooling or drying is required, switch off the cooling system for fuel saving reasons.

Activated cooling may inhibit Autostops.

Stop-start system 3 161.

Press u to activate air recirculation mode. The LED in the button illuminates to indicate activation.

Press u again to deactivate air recirculation mode.

9 WARNING

The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. In operation without cooling the air humidity increases, so the windows may mist up from inside. The quality of the passenger compartment air deteriorates, which may cause the vehicle occupants to feel drowsy.

In warm and very humid ambient air conditions, the windscreen may mist up from outside when cold air is directed towards it. If windscreen mists up from outside, activate windscreen wiper and deactivate l .

148

Briefly open the windows so that hot air can disperse quickly.

● Switch on cooling A/C .

● Press q for air recirculation system on.

● Press M for air distribution.

● Set temperature control n to coldest level.

● Set fan speed x to highest level.

● Open all vents.

Heated rear window, windscreen and exterior mirrors b 3 23.

Heated seats ß 3 30.

Demisting and defrosting the windows

Electronic climate control system

The dual zone climate control allows different temperatures for driver side and front passenger side.

In automatic mode, temperature, fan speed and air distribution are regulated automatically.

Activated functions are indicated by the

LED in the respective control.

The electronic climate control system is only fully operational when the engine is running.

Make sure the sun sensor used by the electronic climate control system is not covered 3 61.

Automatic mode AUTO

● Set fan speed x to highest level.

● Set temperature controller n to warmest level.

● Switch on cooling A/C , if required.

● Switch on heated rear window e .

● Open side air vents as required and direct them towards the door windows.

Note

If the settings for demisting and defrosting are selected, an Autostop may be inhibited.

If the settings for demisting and defrosting are selected while the engine is in an

Autostop, the engine will restart automatically. Stop-start system 3 161.

Stop-start system 3 161.

Controls for:

● manual air recirculation u

● air distribution w

● rocker switch for adjusting the temperature on driver side and front passenger side

● demisting and defrosting h

● cooling A/C

● automatic mode AUTO

● dual zone temperature synchronisation MONO

● heated rear window and exterior mirrors e

● fan speed r s

Heated rear window Ü 3 23.

Heated exterior mirrors Ü 3 20.

Basic setting for maximum comfort:

● Press AUTO , the air distribution and fan speed are regulated automatically.

● Open all air vents to allow optimised air distribution in automatic mode.

149

● Air conditioning must be activated for optimal cooling and demisting.

Press A/C to switch on air conditioning. The LED in the button indicates activation.

● Set the preselected temperatures for driver and front passenger using the left and right rotary ring.

Recommended temperature is

22 °C.

Press successively AUTO to select the desired automatic settings:

● Soft Auto for a soft and silent air distribution.

● Auto for thermal comfort and silent air distribution.

● Auto Fast for a dynamic and efficient air distribution.

Manual settings

Climate control system settings can be changed by activating the following functions:

Fan speed rs

Press r to increase or s to decrease the air flow.

To return to automatic mode, press

AUTO .

Air distribution w

Press w sucessively until the desired direction of the air distribution is displayed: t : to windscreen and front door windows u : to head area and rear seats via adjustable air vents v : to front and rear foot well w : to windscreen and front door windows, to head area and rear seats via adjustable air vents, to front and rear foot well

Combinations of different air distribution options can be select by pressing w sucessively.

To return to automatic air distribution, press AUTO .

Temperature preselection

Set the preselected temperatures separately for the driver and the front passenger to the desired value using the left and right switch for adjustusting the temperature.

150

Recommended temperature is 22 °C.

Temperature is indicated in the display beside the switches for adjusting the temperature.

If the minimum temperature Lo is set, the climate control system runs at maximum cooling, if cooling A/C is switched on.

If the maximum temperature Hi is set, the climate control system runs at maximum heating.

Note

If A/C is switched on, reducing the set cabin temperature can cause the engine to restart from an Autostop or inhibit an Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 161.

Dual zone temperature synchronisation MONO

Press MONO to link passenger side temperature setting to the driver side / to remove the linking of the passenger side temperature setting to the driver side.

The passenger side temperature setting is linked to the driver side if the LED in the button MONO is not illuminated.

Air conditioning A/C

Press A/C to switch on cooling. Cooling is only functional when the engine is running and climate control fan is switched on.

Press A/C again to switch off cooling.

The air conditioning system cools and dehumidifies (dries) when outside temperature is above a specific level.

Therefore condensation may form and drip from under the vehicle.

If no cooling or drying is required, switch off the cooling system for fuel saving reasons.

Manual air recirculation u

Press u to activate the air recirculation mode. u is shown in the display to indicate activation.

Press u again to deactivate recirculation mode.

9 WARNING

The exchange of fresh air is reduced in air recirculation mode. In operation without cooling, the air humidity increases, so the windows may mist up from inside. The quality of the passenger compartment air deteriorates, which may cause the occupants to feel drowsy.

In warm and very humid ambient air conditions, the windscreen may mist up from outside, when cold air is directed towards it. If windscreen mists up from outside, activate windscreen wiper and deactivate l .

151

Demisting and defrosting the windows h

● Press h . The LED in the button illuminates to indicate activation.

● Air conditioning and automatic mode are automatically switched on.

The LED in the button A/C illuminates, AUTO is shown in the display.

● Temperature and air distribution are set automatically and the fan runs at high speed.

● Switch on heated rear window e .

● Switch on heated windscreen , .

● To return to previous mode, press h again.

Note

If V is pressed while the engine is running, an Autostop will be inhibited until V is pressed again.

152

If V is pressed while the engine is in an

Autostop, the engine will restart automatically.

Stop-start system 3 161.

Deactivation of electronic climate control system

Press s subsequently until the electronic climate control system is deactivated.

Parking heater

The parking heater allows to heat the vehicle's interior and to ventilate the vehicle's interior with ambient air.

The operating status of the parking heater is shown by an indicator with a

LED.

● LED illuminates: A timer has been set.

● LED flashes: The system is operating.

The LED is extinguished at the end of the heating operation or when the parking heater is stopped using the remote control.

The parking heater can be programmed using the Graphic Info Display / Colour

Info Display. Additionally, the parking heater can be switched on and off using a remote control.

Graphic Info Display

Press MENU to open the menu page.

Press Heating or Ventilation.

Press H or I to select the desired timer. Confirm with OK .

Set the required time of the timer: Press

{ or } to set the desired value. Confirm with OK .

To set the timer, press H or I to select OK on the display. Confirm with

OK .

Touch screen Info Display

Press d .

Press Car Apps .

Press Temperature conditioning .

Close pop-up messages with Ù .

Programme the parking heater

Press Settings .

Select Heating or Ventilation and then press ü .

Two starting times for the operation of the parking heater can be programmed.

Press Time 1 or Time 2 to select the desired timer and then press ü .

Define the time by pressing z

Time 1 for the timer one or z

Time 2 for the timer two.

Press ü to save the settings.

Activate / deactivate the programming

Press State .

Activate or deactivate Temperature conditioning by pressing ON or

OFF and then press ü .

Only one starting time can be activated.

Parking heater via remote control

The parking heater can be switched on or off using a remote control.

Press ì . The parking heater is activated.

Press OFF . The parking heater is deactivated.

Replacing the battery in the remote control

If the indicator light of the remote control turns yellow, the charging status of the battery is weak. If the indicator light does not illuminated anymore, the battery is discharged and has to be replaced.

1. Remove the cap of the remote control by unscrewing it with a coin and remove the battery

2. Replace battery with a battery of the same type. Pay attention to the installation position.

3. Screw the cap in its place .

Temperature preconditioning

The temperature preconditioning allows to heat the vehicle's interior and to ventilate the vehicle's interior with ambient air.

The temperature preconditioning can be programmed using the Infotainment system or the app.

The operating status of the temperature preconditioning is shown by an indicator with an LED.

153

● LED illuminates: A timer has been set.

● LED flashes: The system is operating.

The LED is extinguished at the end of the heating /ventilation operation or when the temperature preconditioning is stopped using the remote control.

Operating conditions

The temperature preconditioning can be activated both when the vehicle is charged and when is not charged. When the vehicle is not charged, the function is only activated if the charging level of the high voltage battery is above 50 percent.

The temperature preconditioning is only activated when the ignition is off and the vehicle is locked.

Programming via Infotainment system

The temperature preconditioning can be programmed using the Infotainment system. Two timers can be defined. A timer defines the time at which the vehicle's interior is to be heated / ventilated to a factory-set temperature.

Restrictions:

● Only one timer can be activated.

● If two timers are defined and the activated timer is cancelled, the inactive timer is not activated automatically. The timer has to be activated manually.

● If only one timer is defined and activated and the vehicle is not started, the timer will be cancelled for the following day. The timer has to be activated again.

Graphic Info Display

Press MENU to open the menu page.

Press Heating or Ventilation.

Press H or I to select the desired timer. Confirm with OK .

Set the required time of the timer: Press

7 or 8 to set the desired value.

Confirm with OK .

To set the timer, press H or I to select OK on the display. Confirm with

OK .

Touch screen Info Display

Press d .

Press Temperature conditioning .

Activate Temperature conditioning by pressing ON .

Press Settings .

Select Heating or Ventilation .

Press Time 1 or Time 2 to select the desired timer.

Define the time of the selected timer.

Press 6 to save the settings and set the timer.

154

AIR VENTS

Adjustable air vents

Air vents in the instrument panel

Outer air vents in the instrument panel

Direct the flow of air by tilting and swivelling the slats.

To close the vent, swivel the slats inwards.

Direct the flow of air by tilting and swivelling the slats.

To close the vent, swivel the slats outwards.

At least two air vents must be open while cooling is on.

9 WARNING

Do not attach any objects to the slats of the air vents. Risk of damage and injury in case of an accident.

Rear air vents in the centre console

To activate the distribution of climatised / heated air via the rear air vents, press

E .

Direct the flow of air by tilting and swivelling the slats.

Adjust the air flow to select the desired speed.

x : increase air flow x : decrease air flow

Air vent in the glovebox

Turn the slider up or down in order to close or open the air vent.

155

Fixed air vents

Additional air vents are located beneath the windscreen, the door windows and in the foot wells.

MAINTENANCE

Air intake

The air intake in front of the windscreen in the engine compartment must be kept clear to allow air intake. Remove any leaves, dirt or snow.

Air conditioning regular operation

In order to ensure continuously efficient performance, cooling must be operated for a few minutes once a month, irrespective of the weather and time of year. Operation with cooling is not possible when the outside temperature is too low.

Service

For optimal cooling performance, it is recommended to annually check the climate control system, starting three years after initial vehicle registration, including:

● functionality and pressure test

● heating functionality

● leakage check

● check of drive belts

● cleaning of condenser and evaporator drainage

● performance check

156

DRIVING AND OPERATING

Driving hints ................................... 158

Control of the vehicle ................... 158

Steering ....................................... 158

Starting and operating .................... 158

New vehicle running-in ................. 158

Ignition switch positions ............... 158

Power button ............................... 158

Starting the engine ....................... 159

Overrun cut-off ............................ 160

Stop-start system ........................ 161

Parking ........................................ 162

Engine exhaust .............................. 163

Exhaust filter ................................ 163

Catalytic converter ....................... 164

AdBlue ......................................... 164

Electric drive unit ............................ 167

Automatic transmission .................. 168

Transmission display .................... 168

Gear selection .............................. 168

Manual mode ............................... 170

Electronic driving programmes ..... 170

Fault ............................................ 171

Eco mode .................................... 171

Manual transmission ...................... 171

Drive systems ................................. 172

Drive modes ................................ 172

Brakes ........................................... 172

Antilock brake system .................. 172

Parking brake .............................. 173

Brake assist ................................. 175

Hill start assist .............................. 175

Regenerative braking ................... 175

Ride control systems ...................... 175

Electronic Stability Control and

Traction Control system .............. 175

Descent control system ............... 176

Selective ride control .................... 177

Driver assistance systems .............. 178

Cruise control .............................. 178

Speed limiter ................................ 181

Adaptive cruise control ................ 183

Forward collision alert .................. 188

Active emergency braking ............ 189

Front pedestrian protection .......... 191

Parking assist .............................. 191

Advanced parking assist .............. 194

Side blind spot alert ..................... 197

Passenger side camera ............... 198

Panoramic view system ............... 199

Rear view camera ........................ 201

Lane keep assist .......................... 203

Driver alert ................................... 205

Charging ........................................ 206

General information ...................... 206

Charging types ............................ 207

Charging cable ............................ 207

Programmable charging ............... 211

Charging status ........................... 212

Fuel ................................................ 213

Fuel for petrol engines .................. 213

Fuel for diesel engines .................. 213

Refuelling ..................................... 214

Fuel consumption - CO

2

-

Emissions ................................... 215

Trailer hitch .................................... 215

General information ...................... 215

Driving characteristics and towing tips ............................................. 215

Trailer towing ............................... 216

Towing equipment ....................... 216

Trailer stability assist .................... 218

157

DRIVING HINTS

Control of the vehicle

9 WARNING

Do not drive on an easily ignitable surface.

The high temperature of the exhaust system or other systems could ignite the surface.

Never coast with engine not running

Many systems will not function in this situation (e.g. brake servo unit, power steering). Driving in this manner is a danger to yourself and others.

All systems function during an Autostop.

Stop-start system 3 161.

Pedals

To ensure the pedal travel is uninhibited, there must be no mats in the area of the pedals.

Use only floor mats, which fit properly and are fixed by the retainers on the driver side.

Steering

If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops or due to a system malfunction, the vehicle can be steered but may require increased effort.

STARTING AND OPERATING

New vehicle running-in

Do not brake unnecessarily hard for the first few journeys.

During the first drive, smoke may occur because of wax and engine oil evaporating off the exhaust system. Park the vehicle in the open for a while after the first drive and avoid inhaling the fumes.

During the running-in period, fuel and engine oil consumption may be higher.

Additionally, the cleaning process of the exhaust filter may take place more often.

Exhaust filter 3 163.

Ignition switch positions

Turn key:

0 : ignition off: some functions remain active until key is removed or driver's door is opened, provided the ignition was on previously

1 : ignition on power mode: ignition is on, diesel engine is preheating, control indicators illuminate and most electrical functions are operable

2 : engine start: release key after engine has been started

Steering wheel lock

Remove key from ignition switch and turn steering wheel until it engages.

9 DANGER

Never remove the key from ignition switch during driving as this will cause steering wheel lock.

Power button

158

The electronic key must be inside the vehicle.

Engine start

Operate the clutch pedal (manual transmission), the brake pedal and press

Start/Stop .

Ignition on power mode without starting the engine

Press Start/Stop without operating clutch or brake pedal. Control indicators illuminate and most electrical functions are operable.

Engine and ignition off

Press Start/Stop briefly in each mode or when engine is running and vehicle is stationary. Some functions remain active until driver's door is opened, provided the ignition was on previously.

Emergency shut off during driving

Press Start/Stop for about three seconds 3 159. Steering wheel locks as soon as vehicle is stationary.

Steering wheel lock

The steering wheel lock activates automatically when:

● The vehicle is stationary.

● The ignition has been switched off.

To release steering wheel lock, open and close driver's door and switch the ignition on power mode or start the engine directly.

9 WARNING

If the vehicle battery is discharged, the vehicle must not be towed or tow-started as the steering wheel lock cannot be disengaged.

Operation on vehicles with electronic key system in case of failure

If either the electronic key fails or the battery of the electronic key is weak, a message may be displayed in the Driver

Information Centre.

Hold the electronic key with buttons outside at the marking on the steering column cover as shown in the illustration.

Operate the clutch pedal (manual transmission), the brake pedal and press

Start/Stop .

This option is intended for emergencies only. Replace the electronic key battery as soon as possible 3 8.

For unlocking or locking the doors, see fault in radio remote control unit or electronic key system 3 9.

Starting the engine

Vehicles with ignition switch

Turn key to position 1 to release the steering wheel lock.

Manual transmission: operate clutch and brake pedal.

Automatic transmission: operate brake pedal and move selector lever to P or N .

Do not operate accelerator pedal.

Diesel engines: wait until control indicator !

extinguishes.

Turn key briefly to position 2 and release after engine has been started.

159

Manual transmission: during an

Autostop, the engine can be started by depressing the clutch pedal 3 161.

Automatic transmission: during an

Autostop, the engine can be started by releasing the brake pedal 3 161.

Vehicles with power button

● Manual transmission: operate clutch and brake pedal.

● Automatic transmission: operate brake pedal and move selector lever to P or N .

● Do not operate accelerator pedal.

● Press Start/Stop button.

● Release button after starting procedure begins. Diesel engine starts after control indicator !

for preheating extinguishes.

● Before restarting or to switch off the engine when vehicle is stationary, press Start/Stop once more briefly.

To start the engine during an Autostop:

● Manual transmission: during an

Autostop, the engine can be started by depressing the clutch pedal

3 161.

● Automatic transmission: during an

Autostop, the engine can be started by releasing the brake pedal 3 161.

Emergency shut off during driving

If the engine needs to be switched off during driving in case of emergency, press Start/Stop for five seconds.

9 DANGER

Switching off the engine during driving may cause loss of power support for brake and steering systems. Assistance systems and airbag systems are disabled. Lighting and brake lights will extinguish. Therefore power down the engine and ignition while driving only when required in case of emergency.

Starting the vehicle at low temperatures

Starting the engine without additional heaters is possible down to -25 °C for diesel engines and -30 °C for petrol engines. Required is an engine oil with the correct viscosity, the correct fuel, performed services and a sufficiently charged vehicle battery. With temperatures below -30 °C the automatic transmission requires a warming phase of approx. five minutes.

The selector lever must be in position P .

Heating functionalities

Note

Individual heating functionalities, such as heated seats or heated steering wheel, may be temporarily unavailable in the event of electrical loading constraints. Functions will be resumed after some minutes.

Turbo engine warm-up

Upon start-up, engine available torque may be limited for a short time, especially when the engine temperature is cold. The limitation is to allow the lubrication system to fully protect the engine.

Overrun cut-off

The fuel supply is automatically cut off during overrun, i.e. when the vehicle is driven with a gear engaged but accelerator pedal is released.

160

Depending on driving conditions, the overrun cut-off may be deactivated.

Stop-start system

The stop-start system helps to save fuel and to reduce the exhaust emissions.

When conditions allow, it switches off the engine as soon as the vehicle is at a low speed or at a standstill, e.g. at a traffic light or in a traffic jam.

Activation

The stop-start system is available as soon as the engine is started, the vehicle starts-off and the conditions as stated below in this section are fulfilled.

The system is ready to operate when the

LED in the button Ò is not illuminated. To activate the system when the system is deactivated, press Ó .

If the stop-start system is temporarily not available and the button Ò is pressed, the

LED in the button flashes.

Deactivation

Deactivate the stop-start system manually by pressing Ò . The deactivation is indicated when the LED in the button illuminates.

Autostop

Vehicles with manual transmission

An Autostop can be activated at a standstill or at a speed below 20 km/h /

12 mph.

Activate an Autostop as follows:

● Depress the clutch pedal.

● Set the selector lever to neutral.

● Release the clutch pedal.

The engine will be switched off while the ignition stays on.

Vehicles with automatic transmission

If the vehicle is at a standstill with depressed brake pedal, Autostop is activated automatically.

The engine will be switched off while the ignition stays on.

The stop-start system will be disabled on inclines of 12% or more.

Indication

An Autostop is indicated by control indicator D .

During an Autostop, the heating and brake performance will be maintained.

Conditions for an Autostop

The stop-start system checks if each of the following conditions is fulfilled.

● The stop-start system is not manually deactivated.

● The driver's door is closed or the driver's seat belt is fastened.

● The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged and in good condition.

● The engine is warmed up.

161

● The engine coolant temperature is not too high.

● The engine exhaust temperature is not too high, e.g. after driving with high engine load.

● The ambient temperature is not too low.

● The climate control system allows an

Autostop.

● The brake vacuum is sufficient.

● The self-cleaning function of the exhaust filter is not active.

● The vehicle was driven at least at walking speed since the last

Autostop.

Otherwise an Autostop will be inhibited.

Note

The Autostop may be inhibited for several hours after a battery replacement or reconnection.

Certain settings of the climate control system may inhibit an Autostop.

Climate control 3 147.

Immediately after higher speed driving an

Autostop may be inhibited.

New vehicle running-in 3 158.

Vehicle battery discharge protection

To ensure reliable engine restarts, several vehicle battery discharge protection features are implemented as part of the stop-start system.

162

Power saving measures

During an Autostop, several electrical features such as auxiliary electric heater or rear window heating are disabled or switched to a power saving mode. The fan speed of the climate control system is reduced to save power.

Restart of the engine by the driver

Vehicles with manual transmission

Depress the clutch pedal without depressing the brake pedal to restart the engine.

Vehicles with automatic transmission

The engine is restarted if

● the brake pedal is released while the selector lever is in position D or M

● or the brake pedal is released or the selector lever is in position N when the selector lever is moved to position D or M

● or the selector lever is moved to position R .

Restart of the engine by the stopstart system

The selector lever must be in neutral to enable an automatic restart.

If one of the following conditions occurs during an Autostop, the engine will be restarted automatically by the stop-start system:

● The stop-start system is manually deactivated.

● The driver's seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened.

● The engine temperature is too low.

● The charging level of the vehicle battery is below a defined level.

● The brake vacuum is not sufficient.

● The vehicle is driven at least at walking speed.

● The climate control system requests an engine start.

● The air conditioning is manually switched on.

If an electrical accessory, e.g. a portable

CD player, is connected to the power outlet, a brief power drop during the restart might be noticeable.

Parking

9 WARNING

● Do not park the vehicle on an easily ignitable surface. The high temperature of the exhaust system could ignite the surface.

● Always apply the parking brake.

● If the vehicle is on a level surface or uphill slope, engage first gear or set the selector lever to position

P . On an uphill slope, turn the front wheels away from the kerb.

If the vehicle is on a downhill slope, engage reverse gear or set the selector lever to position P . Turn the front wheels towards the kerb.

● Close the windows.

● Switch off the engine.

● Remove the ignition key from the ignition switch or switch off ignition on vehicles with power button.

Turn the steering wheel until the steering wheel lock is felt to engage.

● Lock the vehicle.

● Activate the anti-theft alarm system.

● The engine cooling fans may run after the engine has been switched off 3 222.

CAUTION

After running at high engine speeds or with high engine loads, operate the engine briefly at a low load or run in neutral for approx. 30 seconds before switching off, in order to protect the turbocharger.

Note

In the event of an accident with airbag deployment, the engine is switched off automatically if the vehicle comes to a standstill within a certain time.

In countries with extremely low temperatures it may be necessary to park the vehicle without applied parking brake. Make sure to park the vehicle on a level surface.

ENGINE EXHAUST

9 DANGER

Engine exhaust gases contain poisonous carbon monoxide, which is colourless and odourless and could be fatal if inhaled.

If exhaust gases enter the interior of the vehicle, open the windows. Have the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop.

Avoid driving with an open load compartment, otherwise exhaust gases could enter the vehicle.

Exhaust filter

Automatic cleaning process

The exhaust filter system filters soot particles out of the exhaust gases.

The start of saturation of the exhaust filter is indicated by the temporary illumination of % or

C

, accompanied by a message in the Driver Information

Centre.

As soon as the traffic conditions permit, regenerate the filter by driving at a vehicle speed of at least 60 km/h / 40 mph until the control indicator extinguishes.

Note

On a new vehicle, the first exhaust filter regeneration operations may be accompanied by a burning smell, which is normal. Following prolonged operation of the vehicle at very low speed or at idle, water

163

vapour can be emitted at the exhaust on acceleration. This does not affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the environment.

Cleaning process not possible

If % or C stays on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, this indicates that the exhaust filter additive level is too low.

The reservoir must be topped-up without delay. Seek the assistance of a workshop.

Catalytic converter

The catalytic converter reduces the amount of harmful substances in the exhaust gases.

CAUTION

Fuel grades other than those listed on pages 3 213, 3 271 could damage the catalytic converter or electronic components.

Unburnt petrol will overheat and damage the catalytic converter. Therefore avoid excessive use of the starter, running the fuel tank dry and starting the engine by pushing or towing.

In the event of misfiring, uneven engine running, a reduction in engine performance or other unusual problems, have the cause of the fault rectified by a workshop as soon as possible. In an

164 emergency, driving can be continued for a short period, keeping vehicle speed and engine speed low.

AdBlue

General information

The selective catalytic reduction

(BlueInjection) is a method to substantially reduce the nitrogen oxides in the exhaust emission. This is achieved by injecting a Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) into the exhaust system. The ammonia released by the fluid reacts with nitrous gases (NO x

) from the exhaust and turns it into nitrogen and water.

The designation of this fluid is AdBlue ® . It is a non-toxic, non-flammable, colourless and odourless fluid which consists of

32% urea and 68% water.

9 WARNING

Avoid contact of your eyes or skin with

AdBlue.

In case of eye or skin contact, rinse off with water.

CAUTION

Avoid contact of the paintwork with

AdBlue.

In case of contact, rinse off with water.

AdBlue freezes at a temperature of approx. -11 °C. As the vehicle is equipped with an AdBlue preheater, the emissions reduction at low temperatures is ensured. The AdBlue preheater works automatically.

In some circumstances below the mentioned temperature, an error message appears in the Driver

Information Centre. In this event, park the vehicle in a space with a higher ambient temperature until AdBlue is liquefied.

Note

Frozen and again liquefied AdBlue is usable without quality loss.

The typical AdBlue consumption is approx. 2 l per 1000 km / 600 miles, but can also be higher depending on driving behaviour (e.g. high load or towing).

Level warnings

Depending on the calculated range of

AdBlue, different messages are displayed in the Driver Information

Centre. The messages and the restrictions are a legal requirement.

1. The first possible warning is Top up emissions additive: Starting prevented in 2400 km / 1500 mi.

When switching on the ignition, this warning will show up once briefly with the calculated range. Additionally, control indicator u will illuminate and

a chime will sound. Driving is possible without any restrictions.

2. The next warning level is entered with a range below 800 km / 500 miles.

The message with the current range will always be displayed when ignition is switched on. Additionally, control indicator u will illuminate and a chime will sound. Refill AdBlue before entering the next warning level.

When driving, the chime sounds and the message is displayed every

100 km / 60 miles until the additive tank has been topped-up.

3. The next warning level is entered with a range below 100 km / 60 miles. The message with the current range will always be displayed when ignition is switched on. Additionally, control indicator u will flash and a chime will sound. Refill AdBlue as soon as possible before the AdBlue tank is completely empty. Otherwise, a restart of the engine will not be possible.

When driving, the chime sounds and the message is displayed every

10 km / 6 miles until the additive tank has been topped-up.

4. The last warning level is entered when the AdBlue tank is empty. Restart of the engine is not possible. The following warning message will be displayed:

Top up emissions additive: Starting prevented

Additionally, control indicator u will flash and a chime will sound.

Refill the tank to a level of at least 5 l of AdBlue, otherwise restarting of the engine is not possible.

Note

For D16DT engines, different levels apply.

High emission warnings

In the event of a fault with the emissions control system, different messages are displayed in the Driver Information

Centre. The messages and the restrictions are a legal requirement.

1. If a fault is detected for the first time, the warning Emissions fault is displayed.

Additionally, control indicators u ,

R and Z will illuminate and a chime will sound. Driving is possible without any restrictions.

If it is a temporary fault, the alert disappears during the next journey, after self-diagnosis of the emissions control system.

2. If the fault is confirmed by the emission control system, the following message will be displayed:

Emissions fault: Starting prevented in

1100 km / 650 miles.

Additionally, control indicators u ,

C and Z will illuminate and a chime will sound.

When driving, the message is displayed every 30 s while the fault persists.

3. If the last warning level is entered, the following warning message will be displayed:

Emissions fault: Starting prevented

Additionally, control indicators u ,

C and Z will illuminate and a chime will sound.

Consult a workshop for assistance.

Refilling AdBlue

CAUTION

Only use AdBlue that complies with

European standards DIN 70 070 and

ISO 22241-1.

Do not use additives.

Do not dilute AdBlue.

Otherwise the selective catalytic reduction system could be damaged.

Note

Whenever a filling pump with a nozzle for passenger cars is not available at a filling station, use only AdBlue bottles or canisters with a sealed refill adapter for refilling, to prevent splashback and overspill, and in

165

order to ensure that the fumes from the

AdBlue tank are captured and do not emerge.

Since AdBlue has a limited durability, check the date of expiry before refilling.

Note

Refill the AdBlue tank to a level of at least

5 l to ensure that the new AdBlue level is being detected.

In case AdBlue refill is not successfully detected:

1.

2.

Continuously drive the vehicle for ten minutes making sure that vehicle speed is always higher than

20 km/h / 12 mph.

If AdBlue refill is detected successfully, AdBlue supply-driven warnings or limitations will disappear.

If AdBlue refill is still not detected, seek the assistance of a workshop.

If AdBlue must be refilled at temperatures below -11 °C, the refilling of AdBlue may not be detected by the system. In this event, park the vehicle in a space with a higher ambient temperature until AdBlue is liquified.

Note

When unscrewing the protective cap from the filler neck, ammonia fumes may emerge.

Do not inhale as the fumes have a pungent smell. The fumes are not harmful by inhalation.

The AdBlue tank should be filled completely. This must be done if the warning message regarding prevention of an engine restart is already displayed.

The vehicle must be parked on a level surface.

The filler neck for AdBlue is located behind the fuel filler flap, which is located at left rear side of the vehicle.

If the vehicle is equipped with an electronic key system, the fuel filler flap can only be opened if the vehicle is unlocked.

1. Remove key from ignition switch.

2. Close all doors to avoid ammonia fumes entering the interior of the vehicle.

3. Release the fuel filler flap by pushing the flap 3 214.

5. Open AdBlue canister.

6. Mount one end of the hose on the canister and screw the other end on the filler neck.

7. Lift the canister until it is empty, or until the flow from the canister has stopped. This can take up to five minutes.

8. Place the canister on the ground to empty the hose, wait 15 s.

9. Unscrew the hose from the filler neck.

10. Mount the protective cap and turn clockwise until it engages.

Note

Dispose of AdBlue canister according to environmental requirements. Hose can be reused after flushing with clear water before

AdBlue dries out.

4. Unscrew protective cap from the filler neck.

166

ELECTRIC DRIVE UNIT

The vehicle uses an electric drive unit with a 1-gear transmission.

P : park position

R : reverse mode

N : neutral mode

D : automatic mode

B : automatic mode with one-pedal driving

After selecting a mode, the selector will return to the centre position. The selected mode is indicated in the Driver

Information Centre.

Do not accelerate while selecting a mode. Never depress the accelerator pedal and brake pedal at the same time.

When a driving mode is selected, the vehicle slowly begins to creep when the brake is released.

CAUTION

If the vehicle seems to accelerate slowly or not respond when you try to go faster, do not continue your journey. The electric drive unit could be damaged. Consult a workshop as soon as possible.

CAUTION

Spinning the tyres or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the electric drive unit. If you are stuck, do not spin the tyres. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.

Park position P

To shift into P , press button P when vehicle is stationary. In P , the front wheels of the vehicle are blocked.

To shift out of P , depress the brake pedal and select the desired mode.

The vehicle automatically shifts into P when

● the ignition is switched off

● the driver's door is opened while the vehicle's speed is below 2 km/h /

1 mph

Reverse mode R

To shift into and out of R , the vehicle must be at standstill and the brake pedal has to be depressed.

CAUTION

Shifting into R while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the automatic transmission. Only shift into R after the vehicle has been stopped.

Neutral mode N

In this mode, the propulsion system does not transfer torque to the wheels. To restart the propulsion system when the vehicle is already moving, use D only.

When N is selected, P is engaged after a short time.

If the driver's door is opened while N is selected, an audible signal is given and P is engaged. The audible signal stops when the driver's door is closed.

Automatic mode D

Note

In slippery conditions, operate the vehicle in

D for enhanced riding and handling performance.

Automatic mode B with one-pedal driving

In this mode, vehicle speed is significantly reduced by releasing the accelerator pedal without operating the brake pedal.

Use B when driving down steep hills, in deep snow, in mud or in stop-and-go traffic.

167

9 WARNING

In the case of extreme temperatures or if the high voltage battery is almost fully charged, the brake force of the regenerative braking may be temporarily reduced. If the braking force is not sufficient, the driver has to be prepared to use the brake pedal.

To activate B , shift into D and press button B .

To deactivate B , press button B .

Regenerative braking 3 175

Free wheeling

In certain situations such as in an automatic car wash etc., it is necessary that the wheels can move freely when the engine is switched off.

To enable free wheeling, the vehicle has to be stationary, the engine has to be running and the driver's door has to be closed. Proceed as follows:

1. Depress the brake pedal and select

N .

2. Within five seconds depress and hold the brake pedal.

3. Switch off the ignition and move the selector forwards or backwards.

4. Take your foot off the brake pedal and switch on the ignition.

5. Depress and hold the brake pedal and push the electric parking brake to release it.

6. Take your foot off the brake pedal and switch off the ignition.

A message is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre indicating that the wheels are unblocked for the next 15 minutes.

To revert to normal operation, depress the brake pedal and switch on the engine.

Parking brake 3 173.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

The automatic transmission permits automatic gearshifting (automatic mode) or manual gearshifting (manual mode).

Manual shifting is possible in manual mode by pressing M and shifting with the paddles + and on the steering wheel

3 170.

Stop-start system 3 161.

Transmission display

The mode or selected gear is shown in the Driver Information Centre.

Gear selection

P : park position

R : reverse mode

N : neutral mode

D : automatic mode

M : manual mode

168

Do not accelerate while selecting a mode. Never depress the accelerator pedal and brake pedal at the same time.

When a driving mode is selected, the vehicle slowly begins to creep when the brake is released.

The engine can only be started with the gear selector in position P or N . When position N is selected, press the brake pedal or apply the parking brake before starting.

Type A

Turn the selector.

Park position P

To shift into P , turn the selector to P when vehicle is stationary. In P , the front wheels of the vehicle are blocked.

To shift out of P , depress the brake pedal and select the desired mode.

Reverse mode R

To shift into and out of R , the vehicle must be at standstill and the brake pedal has to be depressed.

CAUTION

Shifting into R while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the automatic transmission. Only shift into R after the vehicle has been stopped.

Neutral mode N

In this mode, the propulsion system does not transfer torque to the wheels. To restart the propulsion system when the vehicle is already moving, use D only.

Automatic mode D

Note

In slippery conditions, operate the vehicle in

D for enhanced riding and handling performance.

Manual mode M

In this mode, gears can be selected manually by using the steering wheel paddles.

M can be activated from D in each driving situation and speed.

When in D press button M .

Type B

After selecting a mode, the selector will return to the centre position.

Park position P

To shift into P , press button P when vehicle is stationary. In P , the front wheels of the vehicle are blocked.

To shift out of P , depress the brake pedal and select the desired mode.

The vehicle shifts automatically into P when

● the engine is switched off

● the driver's door is opened while the vehicle's speed is below 2 km/h /

1 mph

Reverse mode R

To shift into and out of R , the vehicle must be at standstill and the brake pedal has to be depressed.

169

CAUTION

Shifting into R while the vehicle is moving forward could damage the automatic transmission. Only shift into R after the vehicle has been stopped.

Neutral mode N

In this mode, the propulsion system does not transfer torque to the wheels. To restart the propulsion system when the vehicle is already moving, use D only.

Automatic mode D

Note

In slippery conditions, operate the vehicle in

D for enhanced riding and handling performance.

Manual mode M

In this mode, gears can be selected manually by using the steering wheel paddles.

M can be activated from D in each driving situation and speed.

When in D press button M .

Engine braking

To utilise the engine braking effect, select a lower gear when driving downhill.

Rocking the vehicle

Rocking the vehicle is only permissible if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud or snow.

Move the gear selector between D and

R in a repeat pattern. Do not race the engine and avoid sudden acceleration.

Manual mode

Manual mode M can be activated from position D in each driving situation and speed.

Depending on version, different variants are available.

Press button M .

Pull steering wheel paddles to select gears manually.

Pull right paddle + to shift to a higher gear.

Pull left paddle - to shift to a lower gear.

Multiple pulls allow gears to be skipped.

170

If a higher gear is selected when vehicle speed is too low, or a lower gear when vehicle speed is too high, the shift is not executed. This can cause a message in the Driver Information Centre.

In manual mode, no automatic shifting to a higher gear takes place at high engine revolutions.

Gear shifting indication 3 78.

Electronic driving programmes

● Following a cold start, the operating temperature programme increases engine speed to quickly bring the catalytic converter to the required temperature.

● Special programmes automatically adapt the shifting points when driving up inclines or down hills.

● In snowy or icy conditions or on other slippery surfaces, the electronic transmission control enables the driver to select manually first, second or third gear for starting off.

Kickdown

Pressing down the accelerator pedal beyond the kickdown detent will lead to maximum acceleration independent of selected driving mode. The transmission shifts to a lower gear depending on engine speed.

Fault

In the event of a fault a message is displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 88.

Electronic transmission control enables only third gear. The transmission no longer shifts automatically.

Do not drive faster than 100 km/h /

62 mph.

Have the cause of the fault remedied by a workshop.

Eco mode

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

To engage reverse on 5-speed transmission, with the vehicle stationary and engine at idle depress the clutch pedal and move the selector lever to the right and rear.

To engage reverse on 6-speed transmission, with the vehicle stationary and engine at idle depress the clutch pedal, pull the ring under the selector lever and move the selector lever quite to the left and front.

If the gear does not engage, set the selector lever to neutral, release the clutch pedal and depress again. Then repeat gear selection.

Do not slip the clutch unnecessarily.

When operating, depress the clutch pedal completely. Do not use the pedal as a foot rest.

When clutch slip is detected for a specific time, the engine power will be reduced.

A warning is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre. Release the clutch.

CAUTION

It is not advisable to drive with the hand resting on the selector lever.

Gear shift indication 3 78.

Stop-start system 3 161.

This mode adjusts the settings of the systems for a more economic fuel consumption, e.g. by optimising the automatic transmission shift points and adapting the sensitivity of the accelerator pedal.

171

DRIVE SYSTEMS

Drive modes

Following drive modes are selectable:

● Normal mode

● Power mode

● Eco mode

Each drive mode corresponds to a different vehicle setting.

To select the respective drive mode, use the shown toggle switch.

Normal mode

Optimises range and dynamic performance. This mode is automatically selected everytime the vehicle is started.

Power mode

Provides the same performance as

Normal mode, however, when the vehicle is fully loaded.

172

Eco mode

Optimises energy consumption by reducing the performance of heating and air conditioning as well as reducing the performance of the electric engine.

BRAKES

The brake system comprises two independent brake circuits.

If a brake circuit fails, the vehicle can still be braked using the other brake circuit.

However, braking effect is achieved only when the brake pedal is depressed firmly. Considerably more force is needed for this. The braking distance is extended. Seek the assistance of a workshop before continuing the journey.

When the engine is not running, the support of the brake servo unit disappears once the brake pedal has been depressed once or twice. Braking effect is not reduced, but braking requires significantly greater force. It is especially important to bear this in mind when being towed.

Control indicator m 3 77.

Antilock brake system

Antilock brake system (ABS) prevents the wheels from locking.

ABS starts to regulate brake pressure as soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock. The vehicle remains steerable, even during hard braking.

ABS control is made apparent through a pulse in the brake pedal and the noise of the regulation process.

For optimum braking, keep the brake pedal fully depressed throughout the braking process, despite the fact that the pedal is pulsating. Do not reduce the pressure on the pedal.

When braking in an emergency, the hazard warning flashers are switched on automatically depending on the force of deceleration. They are switched off automatically the first time you accelerate.

After starting off, the system performs a self-test which may be audible.

Parking brake

9 WARNING

Before leaving the vehicle, check parking brake status. Control indicator j illuminate constantly when electric parking brake is applied.

Manual parking brake

Control indicator R 3 77.

Electric parking brake

Control indicator u 3 78.

Fault

9 WARNING

If there is a fault in the ABS, the wheels may be liable to lock due to braking that is heavier than normal. The advantages of

ABS are no longer available. During hard braking, the vehicle can no longer be steered and may swerve.

Have the cause of the fault remedied by a workshop.

9 WARNING

Always apply parking brake firmly without operating the release button, and apply as firmly as possible on a downhill or uphill slope.

To release the parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, press the release button and fully lower the lever.

To reduce the operating forces of the parking brake, depress the foot brake at the same time.

Applying when vehicle is stationary

9 WARNING

Pull switch m for a minimum of one second until control indicator m illuminates constantly and electric parking brake is applied 3 77. The electric parking brake operates automatically with adequate force.

Before leaving the vehicle, check the electric parking brake status. Control indicator m 3 77.

The electric parking brake can always be activated, even if the ignition is off.

Do not operate electric parking brake system too often without engine running as this will discharge the vehicle battery.

173

Releasing

Switch on ignition. Keep foot brake pedal depressed and then push switch j .

Drive away function

Depressing the clutch pedal and then slightly releasing the clutch pedal and slightly depressing the accelerator pedal releases the electric parking brake automatically. This is only possible if the automatic operation of the electric parking brake is activated. It is not possible when switch j

is pulled at the same time.

Braking when vehicle is moving

When the vehicle is moving and the switch j is kept pulled, the electric parking brake system will decelerate the vehicle. As soon as the switch j is released, braking will be stopped.

The antilock brake system and the

Electronic Stability Control stabilise the vehicle while the switch j is kept pulled.

If an error of the electric parking brake occurs, a warning message is displayed in the driver information centre. If the antilock brake system and the Electronic

Stability Control fail, one or both indicators i and J illuminate in the instrument cluster. In this case, stability can only be provided by repeatedly pulling and pushing the switch j until the vehicle is immobilised.

Automatic operation

Automatic operation includes automatic application and automatic release of the electric parking brake.

The electric parking brake can also be applied or released manually by using the switch j

.

Automatic application:

● The electric parking brake is automatically applied when the vehicle is stationary and the ignition is switched off.

● j illuminates in the instrument cluster and a display message pops up to confirm the application.

Automatic release:

● Parking brake releases automatically after moving off.

● j

extinguishes in the instrument cluster and a display message pops up to confirm the release.

If the vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission and the brake is not released automatically, make sure the front doors are correctly closed.

Deactivation of automatic operation

1. Start the engine.

2. If the parking brake is released, apply the parking brake pulling the switch j .

3. Take your foot off the brake pedal.

174

4. Press the switch j for at least 10 s and maximum 15 s.

5. Release the switch j .

6. Press and hold the brake pedal.

7. Pull the switch j for 2 s.

The deactivation of the automatic operation of the electric parking brake is confirmed by o illuminating in the instrument cluster 3 77. The electric parking brake can only be applied and released manually.

To reactivate the automatic operation, repeat the steps described above.

Functionality check

When the vehicle is not moving, the electric parking brake might be applied automatically. This is done to check the system.

Fault

Failure mode of electric parking brake is indicated by a control indicator j and by a vehicle message which is displayed in the Driver Information Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 88.

Control indicator j

flashes: electric parking brake is not fully applied or released. When continuously flashing, release electric parking brake and retry applying.

Brake assist

If brake pedal is depressed quickly and forcefully, maximum brake force is automatically applied.

Operation of brake assist might become apparent by a pulse in the brake pedal and a greater resistance when depressing the brake pedal.

Maintain steady pressure on the brake pedal as long as full braking is required.

Maximum brake force is automatically reduced when brake pedal is released.

Hill start assist

The system helps prevent unintended movement when driving away on inclines.

When releasing the brake pedal after stopping on an incline, brakes remain on for further 2s. The brakes release automatically as soon as the vehicle begins to accelerate.

Regenerative braking

9 WARNING

In the case of extreme temperatures or if the high voltage battery is almost fully charged, the brake force of the engine braking may be temporarily reduced. If the braking force is not sufficient, the driver has to be prepared to use the brake pedal.

9 WARNING

Depending on the engine braking force the brake lights are illuminated.

Regenerative braking generates electrical energy resulting from engine braking to charge the high voltage battery.

Electric drive unit 3 167.

RIDE CONTROL SYSTEMS

Electronic Stability Control and

Traction Control system

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) improves driving stability when necessary, regardless of the type of road surface or tyre grip.

As soon as the vehicle starts to swerve

(understeer / oversteer), engine output is reduced and the wheels are braked individually.

ESC operates in combination with the

Traction Control system (TC). It prevents the driven wheels from spinning.

The TC is a component of the ESC.

Traction Control improves driving stability when necessary, regardless of the type of road surface or tyre grip, by preventing the driven wheels from spinning.

As soon as the driven wheels starts to spin, engine output is reduced and the wheel spinning the most is braked individually. This considerably improves the driving stability of the vehicle on slippery road surfaces.

175

ESC and TC are operational after each engine start as soon as the control indicator b extinguishes.

When ESC and TC operate, b flashes.

9 WARNING

Do not let this special safety feature tempt you into taking risks when driving.

Adapt speed to the road conditions.

Control indicator b 3 78.

Deactivation

ESC and TC can be deactivated, everytime it is required: press a .

The LED in the button a illuminates.

A status message appears in the Driver

Information Centre when ESC and TC are deactivated.

176

ESC and TC are reactivated by pressing the a button again, by applying the brake or in the case that the vehicle is driven faster than 50 km/h / 30 mph.

The LED in the button a extinguishes when ESC and TC are reactivated.

ESC and TC are also reactivated the next time the ignition is switched on.

Fault

If there is a fault in the system, the control indicator b illuminates continuously and a message appears in the Driver

Information Centre. The system is not operational.

Have the cause of the fault remedied by a workshop.

Descent control system

The descent control system allows the vehicle to travel at a low speed without depressing the brake pedal. The vehicle will automatically decelerate to a low speed and remain at that speed when the system is activated. Some noise or vibration from the brake system may be apparent when the system is active.

CAUTION

Use only when descending steep grades while driving off-road. Do not use when driving on normal road surfaces.

Unnecessary usage of the DCS function, such as while driving on normal roads, may damage the brake system and the ESC function.

Activation

Note

If hill descent control is active, active emergency braking is automatically deactivated.

The systems is only available for slopes greater than 5%.

At speeds below approx. 50 km/h /

30 mph, press ò . The system can also be activated when the vehicle is stationary with the engine running. The control indicator ò in the instrument cluster is illuminated in green to show the system is activated.

When the vehicles starts its descent, the system controls the speed of the vehicle; accelerator and brake pedals can be released.

● If the gearbox is in first or second gear, the speed decreases and the control indicator in the instrument cluster flashes rapidly.

● If the gearbox is in neutral or the clutch pedal is depressed, the speed decreases and the control indicator in the instrument cluster flashes slowly.

If the system is operating, the brake lights automatically come on.

If the speed exceeds 30 km/h / 18 mph, regulation is paused. The ò indicator light in the instrument cluster changes to grey. However, the LED of the ò button is still illuminated. Regulation is automatically resumed if the speed falls below 30 km/h, the slope is greater than

5% and the pedal release conditions are met.

Deactivation

Press ò again until the LED in the button extinguishes. The green control indicator u in the instrument cluster extinguishes, too.

If the speed exceeds 70 km/h / 43 mph, the system is automatically deactivated.

The LED in the button estinguishes.

Fault

If the green control indicator ò does not illuminate or flash after pressing the button, there is a fault in the system.

Seek the assistance of a workshop.

Selective ride control

CAUTION

The vehicle is designed to drive principally on-road, but it also enables driving offroad occasionally.

However, do not drive on terrain where the vehicle could be damaged due to obstacles, such as stones among others and on terrain with steep inclines and poor grip.

Do not cross waters.

CAUTION

When driving off-road, sudden motion and manoeuvres can cause a collision or losing control.

Selective ride control is designed to optimise traction in low-grip conditions

(snow, mud and sand).

It adapts to the terrain by acting on the front wheels, in doing so this saves the weight normally associated with a more conventional four wheel drive system.

Selective ride control allows to choose between five driving modes by turning the control:

●

ESC off mode 9

● standard mode 2

● snow mode 3

● mud mode 4

● sand mode 1

An LED illuminates and a status message appears in the Driver Information Centre to confirm the chosen mode.

ESC off mode 9

The ESC and Traction Control are deactivated in this mode.

ESC and Traction Control are reactivated automatically from 50 km/h / 30 mph or everytime the ignition is switched on.

177

Standard mode 2

This mode is calibrated for a low level of wheel spin, based on the different types of grip generally encountered in normal day to day driving.

Everytime the ignition is switched off, the system is automatically reset to this mode.

Snow mode 3

This mode adapts to the grip conditions encountered by each wheel when starting.

When advancing, the system optimises wheel spin to guarantee the best acceleration based on the available traction. Recommended in cases of deep snow and steep inclines.

This mode is active up to a speed of

50 km/h / 30 mph.

Mud mode 4

This mode allows considerable wheel spin at start-up for the wheel with the least grip, this removes mud and reestablishes traction.

Simultaneously, the wheel with the most grip is provided with the most torque possible.

This mode is active up to a speed of

80 km/h / 50 mph.

Sand mode 1

This mode allows a small amount of simultaneous wheel spin on the two drive wheels, enabling the vehicle to advance and reduce the risk of sinking.

This mode is active up to a speed of

120 km/h / 75 mph.

CAUTION

Do not use the other modes on sand as the vehicle may become stuck.

DRIVER ASSISTANCE SYSTEMS

9 WARNING

Driver assistance systems are developed to support the driver and not to replace the driver's attention.

The driver accepts full responsibility when driving the vehicle.

When using driver assistance systems, always take care regarding the current traffic situation.

Cruise control

The cruise control can store and maintain speeds above 40 km/h / 25 mph.

Additionally at least the third gear must be engaged on manual transmission, on automatic transmission position D or the second or a higher gear in position M must be selected.

Deviations from the stored speeds may occur when driving uphill or downhill.

The system maintains the vehicle speed at the preset speed by the driver, without any action on the accelerator pedal.

The preset speed can be exceeded temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal firmly.

The status and preset speed is displayed in the Driver Information Centre.

Do not use the cruise control if it is not advisable to maintain a constant speed.

178

Control indicator m 3 80.

Switching on the system

Activation of the functionality

Setting the speed manually

Turn to CRUISE , the symbol v

and a message are displayed in the Driver

Information Centre. The system is still not active.

Accelerate to the desired speed and press SET/+ or SET/. The current speed is stored and maintained.

Accelerator pedal can be released.

The preset speed can then be changed by pressing SET/+ to increase or SET/to decrease the speed. Short press changes speed in small steps, long press in large steps.

Speed value is indicated in the Driver

Information Centre.

Adopting speed by the speed limit recognition

The intelligent speed adaptation informs the driver when a speed limit is detected by the speed limit recognition. The detected speed limit can be used as new value for the cruise control.

Using a camera at the top of the windscreen, this system detects and reads speed limit and end of speed limit signs. The system also takes account of information on speed limits from the navigation map data.

The function can be deactivated or activated in the personalisation menu

3 89.

If the cruise control is active, the recognised speed limit will be displayed in the Driver Information Centre and

MEM illuminates.

179

The displayed information depends on the Driver Information Centre version.

In the Driver Information Centre, speed limit sign is shown in the display and

MEM illuminates for a few seconds.

Press MEM to request saving of the suggested speed.

Press MEM once more to confirm and save the new speed setting.

This speed is the new value for the cruise control.

Exceeding the set speed

Vehicle speed can be increased by depressing the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is released, the previously stored speed is resumed.

Deactivation of the functionality

Press button to deactivate the functionality. The cruise control is in pause mode and a message is displayed.

The vehicle is driven without cruise control.

Cruise control is deactivated, but not switched off. Last stored speed remains in memory for later speed resume.

Cruise control is deactivated automatically:

● The brake pedal is depressed.

● The clutch pedal has been depressed for a few seconds

(depending on the manual transmission).

● Vehicle speed is below 40 km/h /

25 mph.

● The Traction Control system or

Electronic Stability Control is operating.

● The selector lever is in N (automatic transmission) / the first or second gear (manual transmission).

Resume stored speed

Press the button at a speed above

40 km/h / 25 mph to return to the stored speed.

Switching off the system

Turn to 0 to switch off the system.

180

Fault

In the event of a cruise control fault, the speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the dashes.

The cruise control may not operate correctly if traffic signs do not comply with the Vienna Convention on Road

Signs and Signals.

Speed limiter

The speed limiter prevents the vehicle exceeding a preset maximum speed.

The maximum speed can be set at speeds above 30 km/h / 18 mph.

The driver can accelerate the vehicle up to the preset speed. Deviations from the limited speed may occur when driving downhill.

The preset speed can be exceeded temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal firmly.

The status and preset speed limit are displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

Switching on the system

Turn to message are displayed in the Driver

Information Centre. The system is still not active.

LIMIT , the symbol 5 and a

Activation of the functionality

Press the button to activate the system with the last programmed speed.

Press the button once again to pause the activation of the system.

Setting speed by the driver

To set the speed, the system does not have to be activated.

181

Following the preset speed can be set by pressing SET/+ to increase or SET/ to decrease the desired maximum speed.

Short press changes the preset speed in small steps, long press in large steps.

The speed value is indicated in the Driver

Information Centre.

Adopting speed by the traffic sign assistant

The intelligent speed adaptation informs the driver when a speed limit is detected by the traffic sign assistant. The detected speed limit can be used as new value for the speed limiter.

Using a camera at the top of the windscreen, this system detects and reads speed limit and end of speed limit signs. The system also takes account of information on speed limits from the navigation map data.

The function can be activated or deactivated in the personalisation menu

3 89.

If the speed limiter is active, the recognised speed limit will be displayed in the Driver Information Centre and

MEM illuminates.

The displayed information depends on the Driver Information Centre version.

In the Driver Information Centre, speed limit sign is shown and MEM illuminates for a few seconds.

Press MEM to request saving of the suggested speed.

Press MEM once more to confirm and save the new speed setting.

This speed is the new value for the speed limiter.

Exceeding the speed limit

In the event of an emergency, it is possible to exceed the speed limit by depressing the accelerator pedal firmly nearly to the final point.

Release the accelerator pedal and the speed limiter function is reactivated once a speed lower than the limit speed is obtained.

Deactivation of the functionality

Press the button to deactivate the functionality. The speed limiter is in pause mode and a message is displayed. The vehicle is driven without speed limit.

The speed limiter is deactivated, but not switched off. The last stored speed remains in memory for later speed resume.

182

Resume limit speed

Press the button to return to the stored speed limit.

Switching off the system

Turn to 0 to switch off the system.

Fault

In the event of a speed limiter fault, the speed is cleared resulting in flashing of the dashes.

The speed limiter may not operate correctly if traffic signs do not comply with the Vienna Convention on Road

Signs and Signals.

Adaptive cruise control

The adaptive cruise control is an enhancement to the conventional cruise control with the additional feature of maintaining a certain following distance to the vehicle ahead. It uses a camera at the top of the windscreen and camera sensors to detect the vehicles ahead. If no vehicle is detected in the driving path, the adaptive cruise control will behave like a conventional cruise control.

The adaptive cruise control automatically decelerates the vehicle when approaching a slower moving vehicle. It then adjusts the vehicle speed to follow the vehicle ahead at the selected following distance. The vehicle speed increases or decreases to follow the vehicle ahead, but will not exceed the set speed. It may apply limited braking with activated brake lights.

If the vehicle ahead accelerates or changes lane, the adaptive cruise control progressively accelerates the vehicle to return to the stored set speed. If the driver operates the turn lights to overtake a slower vehicle, the adaptive cruise control allows the vehicle to temporarily approach the vehicle ahead to help passing it. However, the set speed will never be exceeded.

The adaptive cruise control can store set speeds for manual transmission. If the vehicle ahead is moving too slowly and the selected following distance cannot be maintained anymore, a warning chime is given and a message is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre. The message prompts the driver to take back control of the vehicle. On vehicles with automatic transmission, the system can brake the vehicle until a full stop.

The adaptive cruise control can store set speeds over 30 km/h / 19 mph for manual transmission. If the vehicle ahead is moving too slowly and the selected following distance cannot be maintained anymore, a warning chime is given and a message is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre. The message prompts the driver to take back control of the vehicle. On vehicles with automatic transmission, the system can brake the vehicle until a full stop.

9 WARNING

The complete driver attention is always required while driving with adaptive cruise control. The driver stays fully in control of

183

the vehicle because the brake pedal, the accelerator pedal and the cancel switch have priority over any adaptive cruise control operation.

Switching on the system

The adaptive cruise control can be switched on at a speed between

40 km/h / 25 mph and 150 km/h /

93 mph.

A precondition is that adaptive cruise control is not deactivated in the vehicle personalisation menu 3 89.

Activation

Setting the speed manually

The preset speed can then be changed by pressing SET/+ to increase or SET/to decrease the speed. Short press changes speed in small steps, long press in large steps.

Turn to CRUISE , the symbol w

and a message are displayed in the Driver

Information Centre. The system is still not active.

Accelerate to the desired speed and press SET/+ or SET/. The current speed is stored and maintained.

Accelerator pedal can be released.

Speed value is indicated in the Driver

Information Centre.

Adopting the speed by the speed limit recognition

The intelligent speed adaptation informs the driver when a speed limit is detected by the speed limit recognition. The detected speed limit can be used as new value for the adaptive cruise control.

Using a camera at the top of the windscreen, this system detects and reads speed limit and end of speed limit signs. The system also takes account of information on speed limits from the navigation map data.

184

The function can be deactivated or activated in the personalisation menu

3 89.

If the adaptive cruise control is active, the recognised speed limit will be displayed in the Driver Information Centre and

MEM illuminates.

The displayed information depends on the Driver Information Centre version.

In the Driver Information Centre, the speed limit sign is shown in the display and MEM illuminates for a few seconds.

Press MEM to request saving of the suggested speed.

Press MEM once more to confirm and save the new speed setting.

This speed is the new value for the adaptive cruise control.

Exceeding the set speed

Vehicle speed can be increased by depressing the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is released, the previously stored speed is resumed. If a slower moving vehicle is ahead, the following distance selected by the driver is restored.

If the set speed is exceeded, the indicated speed setting flashes in the

Driver Information Centre and a warning message appears.

Resume stored speed

Press the button at a speed above

40 km/h / 25 mph to return to the stored speed.

Setting the following distance

When adaptive cruise control detects a slower moving vehicle in the driving path, it will adjust the vehicle speed to maintain the following distance selected by the driver.

The following distance can be set to close (1 bar), normal (2 bars) or far

(3 bars).

If the engine is running and the adaptive cruise control is enabled (grey), you can modify the following distance setting:

Press GAP , the current setting is shown in the Driver Information Centre.

Press GAP again to change the following distance: The new setting is displayed in the Driver Information Centre.

The selected following distance is indicated by full bars in the adaptive cruise control page.

9 WARNING

The driver accepts full responsibility for the appropriate following distance based on traffic, weather and visibility conditions.

Following distance must be adjusted or the system switched off when required by the prevailing conditions.

Detecting the vehicle ahead

If the system does not detect a vehicle in the driving path, U is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre. The system operates as conventional cruise control.

If the system detects a vehicle in the driving path, V is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre.

If the system detects a vehicle in the driving path which is too close or too slow, it adjusts the speed accordingly.

W is displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

If the system approaches the limit of adjusting the speed to maintain the following distance, the driver is warned that an automatic deactivation of the system is imminent. X and w flash in the Driver Information Centre.

185

If the system reaches the limit of adjusting the speed to maintain the following distance and the driver does not react to this situation, the system is automatically deactivated and X is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre.

If the set speed is temporarily exceeded by the driver, the system is automatically deactivated and Z is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre.

Deactivation of the functionality

The adaptive cruise control is deactivated automatically when:

● The brake pedal is depressed.

● The vehicle accelerates above

180 km/h / 112 mph or slows down below 30 km/h / 19 mph.

● The electric parking brake is applied.

● The Traction Control system or

Electronic Stability Control is deactivated or operating.

● The selector lever of automatic transmissions is neither in D nor in

M .

● A fault is detected in the Electronic

Stability Control.

Switching off the system

Press button to deactivate the functionality. The cruise control is in pause mode and a message is displayed.

The vehicle is driven without cruise control.

The adaptive cruise control is deactivated, but not disabled. The last stored set speed remains in memory for later usage.

Turn to 0 to switch off the system.

Driver's attention

● Use the adaptive cruise control carefully on bends or mountain roads, as it can lose the vehicle ahead and needs time to detect it again.

● Do not use the system on slippery roads as it can create rapid changes in tyre traction (wheel spinning), so that you could lose control of the vehicle.

● Do not use the system when the spare wheel is in use.

System limits

9 WARNING

The system's automatic brake force does not permit hard braking and the braking level may not be sufficient to avoid a collision.

● After a sudden lane change, the system needs a certain time to detect the next preceding vehicle.

So if a new vehicle is detected, the system may accelerate instead of braking.

● The adaptive cruise control does ignore the oncoming traffic.

● The adaptive cruise control does not consider pedestrians and animals for braking and driving off.

186

● The adaptive cruise control considers stopped vehicles only at low speed.

● Do not use the adaptive cruise control when towing a trailer.

● Do not use the adaptive cruise control on roads with an incline of more than 10%.

Bends speed before entering a bend and in general to adapt the speed to the road type and to existing speed limits.

The adaptive cruise control calculates a predicted path based on the centrifugal force. This predicted path considers the current bend characteristic, but cannot consider a future bend change. The system may lose the current vehicle ahead or consider a vehicle which is not in the actual lane. This can happen when entering or exiting a bend or if the bend gets stronger or weaker. If it no longer detects any vehicle ahead, then control indicator A will extinguish.

If the centrifugal force is too high in a bend, the system slows down the vehicle slightly. This braking level is not designed to avoid spinning-off the bend. The driver is responsible for reducing the selected

Motorways

On motorways, adapt the set speed to the situation and the weather. Always consider that adaptive cruise control has a limited visibility range, a limited braking level and a certain reaction time to verify if a vehicle is on the driving path or not.

Adaptive cruise control may not be able to brake the vehicle in time to avoid a collision with a much slower vehicle or after a lane change. This is particularly true while driving fast or if the visibility is reduced due to weather conditions.

While entering or exiting a motorway, adaptive cruise control may lose the vehicle ahead and accelerate up to the set speed. For this reason, decrease the set speed before the exit or before the entry.

Vehicle path changes

If another vehicle enters your driving path, adaptive cruise control will first consider the vehicle when it is completely in your path. Be ready to take action and depress the brake pedal, if you need to brake more quickly.

Hill considerations

9 WARNING

Do not use the adaptive cruise control on steep hill roads.

System performance on hills depends on vehicle speed, vehicle load, traffic conditions and the road incline. It may not detect a vehicle in your path while driving on hills. On steep hills, you may have to use the accelerator pedal to maintain

187

your vehicle speed. When going downhill you may have to brake to maintain or reduce your speed.

Note that applying the brake deactivates the system.

Fault

In the event of a fault with the adaptive cruise control, you are alerted by the illumination of a warning light and the display of a message in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal.

The adaptive cruise control may not operate correctly if traffic signs do not comply with the Vienna Convention on

Road Signs and Signals.

Have the system checked by a dealer or a qualified workshop.

As a safety measure, do not use the system if the brake lights are faulty.

Forward collision alert

The forward collision alert may help to avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes.

The forward collision alert uses the front camera in the windscreen to detect a preceding vehicle directly ahead, in your path.

If a vehicle directly ahead is approached too quickly, a warning chime and alert in the Driver Information Centre is provided.

188

9 WARNING

Forward collision alert is just a warning system and does not apply the brakes.

When approaching a vehicle ahead too rapidly, it may not provide you enough time to avoid a collision.

The driver accepts full responsibility for the appropriate following distance based on traffic, weather and visibility conditions.

The complete attention of the driver is always required while driving. The driver must always be ready to take action and apply the brakes.

Activation

Forward collision alert detects vehicles and operates automatically at all speeds between 5 km/h / 3 mph and 85 km/h /

53 mph. The system detects stationary vehicles if the speed does not exceed

80 km/h / 50 mph.

Alerting the driver

The driver is warned by following alerts:

●

Symbol warning message is displayed in the

Driver Information Centre when the distance to the vehicle ahead gets to small.

, illuminates and a

● Symbol , illuminates, a warning message is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre and a warning chime sounds, when a collision is imminent and immediate driver's action is required.

9 WARNING

Forward collision alert is just a warning system and does not apply the brakes.

When approaching a vehicle ahead too rapidly, it may not provide you enough time to avoid a collision.

The driver accepts full responsibility for the appropriate following distance based on traffic, weather and visibility conditions.

The complete attention of the driver is always required while driving. The driver must always be ready to take action and apply the brakes.

CAUTION

The colour lighting of this control indicator does not correspond to local traffic laws on following distance. The driver bears full responsibility for maintaining safe following distance according to applicable traffic rules, weather and road conditions etc. at all times.

Selecting the alert sensitivity

The alert sensitivity has to be set to close, normal or distant in the vehicle personalisation menu 3 89.

The chosen setting will remain until it is changed. The alert timing will vary based on vehicle speed. The faster the vehicle

speed, the farther away the alert will occur. Consider traffic and weather conditions when selecting the alert timing.

Deactivation

The system can only be deactivated by deactivating the active emergency braking in the vehicle personalisation

3 89.

System limitations

Forward collision alert is designed to warn on vehicles only, but may react also to other objects.

In the following cases, forward collision alert may not detect a vehicle ahead or sensor performance is limited:

● driving on winding or hilly roads

● driving during nighttime

● weather limits visibility, such as fog, rain, or snow

● the sensor in the windscreen is blocked by snow, ice, slush, mud, dirt etc.

● the windscreen is damaged or affected by foreign objects, e.g.

stickers

Active emergency braking

Active emergency braking can help to reduce the damage and injury from crashes with vehicles, pedestrians and obstacles directly ahead, when a collision can no longer be avoided either by manual braking or by steering. Before the active emergency braking applies, the driver is warned by the forward collision alert or the front pedestrian protection alert.

Forward collision alert 3 188

Front pedestrian protection 3 191

The feature uses various inputs (e.g.

camera sensor, brake pressure, vehicle speed) to calculate the probability of a frontal collision.

9 WARNING

This system is not intended to replace the driver responsibility for driving the vehicle and looking ahead. Its function is limited to supplemental use only to reduce the vehicle speed before a collision.

The system may not react to animals. After a sudden lane change, the system needs a certain time to detect the next preceding vehicle.

The driver must always be ready to take action and apply the brakes and steer to avoid collisions.

Functionality

Active emergency braking is equipped with a front camera and operates in forward gear in the range between walking speed and 85 km/h / 53 mph.

The system detects stationary vehicles only if the speed does not exceed

80 km/h / 50 mph.

A precondition is that active emergency braking is not deactivated in the vehicle personalisation menu 3 89.

If deactivated, m illuminates in the instrument cluster and a warning message is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre

If the system has been deactivated manually, it is reactivated automatically the next time the ignition is switched on.

The system includes:

● emergency automatic braking

● forward collision alert

● front pedestrian protection

Emergency automatic braking

After activation of brake preparation system and just before the imminent collision, this function automatically applies limited braking to reduce the impact speed of the collision or prohibit a crash.

If active emergency braking is applied, m flashes in the instrument cluster.

Depending on the situation, the vehicle may automatically brake moderately or hard.

189

Front automatic braking can only occur if a vehicle or a pedestrian ahead is detected.

Forward collision alert 3 188

Front pedestrian protection 3 191

Below a speed of 30 km/h / 19 mph, emergency automatic braking may slow down the vehicle to a complete stop. If the speed exceeds 30 km/h / 19 mph, emergency automatic braking reduces the speed. However, the driver must apply the brake.

Emergency automatic braking may slow the vehicle to a complete stop to try to avoid a potential crash.

● Automatic transmission: If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, automatic braking is maintained for up to two seconds. Keep the brake pedal depressed to prevent the vehicle from starting off again.

● Manual transmission: If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, the engine may stall.

Operation of the function may be felt by a slight vibration in the brake pedal.

9 WARNING

Emergency automatic braking is an emergency crash preparation feature and is not designed to avoid crashes. Do not rely on the system to brake the vehicle.

Emergency automatic braking will not

190 brake outside of its operating speed range and only responds to detected vehicles and pedestrians.

System limitations

In some cases, the active emergency braking system may provide an automatic braking in situations that seem to be unnecessary, for instance in parking garages, due to traffic signs in a curve or due to vehicles in another lane.

This is normal operation, the vehicle does not need service. Firmly apply the accelerator pedal to override the automatic braking if the situation and the surroundings permit.

In the following cases, active emergency braking performance is limited:

● driving on winding or hilly roads

● detecting all vehicles, especially vehicles with a trailer, tractors, muddy vehicles, etc.

● detecting a vehicle when weather limits visibility, such as in fog, rain, or snow

● driving during nighttime

● windscreen damaged or stickered

Complete attention is always required while driving, and you should be ready to take action and apply the brakes and / or steer the vehicle to avoid crashes.

We recommend to deactivate the system in the vehicle personalisation in the following cases:

● when towing a trailer or caravan

● when carrying long objects on roof bars or a roof rack

● when the vehicle is being towed with the engine running

● when a spare wheel is fitted that is smaller than the other wheels

● before using an automatic car wash with the engine running

● before placing the vehicle on a rolling road in a workshop

● if the windscreen has been damaged close to the camera

● if the front bumper has been damaged

● if the brake lights are not working

Fault

In case the system requires a service, m is illuminated in the instrument cluster, a message is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre and an audible signal is given.

If the system does not work as it should do, vehicle messages are displayed in the Driver Information Centre.

Vehicle messages 3 88.

Front pedestrian protection

Front pedestrian protection may help to avoid or reduce the harm caused by front-end crashes with pedestrians when driving forward.

The system uses the front camera in the windscreen to detect a pedestrian directly ahead in your path.

Front pedestrian protection can detect and alert to pedestrians in a forward gear at speeds between 5 km/h / 3 mph and

60 km/h / 37 mph.

During nighttime driving, system performance is limited.

9 DANGER

Front pedestrian braking does not provide an alert or automatically brake the vehicle, unless it detects a pedestrian.

The system may not detect pedestrians, including children, when the pedestrian is not directly ahead, not fully visible, not standing upright, or when part of a group.

Front pedestrian protection includes:

● detecting front pedestrian ahead

● front pedestrian alert

Front pedestrian protection is activated together with forward collision alert.

Forward collision alert 3 188.

Detecting front pedestrian ahead

A pedestrian ahead up to a distance of approx. 40 m is indicated by a symbol in the instrument cluster.

Front pedestrian alert

When approaching a detected pedestrian too quickly, a warning message is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre. A warning chime is provided.

Cruise control or Adaptive cruise control may be disengaged when the front pedestrian alert occurs.

System limitations

In the following cases, front pedestrian protection may not detect a pedestrian ahead or sensor performance is limited:

● vehicle speed is out of range from

5 km/h / 3 mph to 60 km/h /

37 mph in forward gear

● the distance to an pedestrian ahead is more than 40 m

● driving on winding or hilly roads

● driving during nighttime

● weather limits visibility, such as fog, rain, or snow

● the sensor in the windscreen is blocked by snow, ice, slush, mud, dirt etc.

● the windscreen is damaged or affected by foreign objects, e.g.

stickers

Parking assist

General information

When attaching a trailer or bicycle carrier to the trailer hitch, the parking assist is deactivated.

9 WARNING

The driver bears full responsibility for the parking manoeuvre.

Always check the surrounding area when driving backwards or forwards while using parking assist system.

Rear parking assist

The system warns the driver with acoustic signals against potentially hazardous obstacles behind the vehicle in a distance range up to 50 cm while reverse gear is engaged.

The system operates with ultrasonic parking sensors in the rear bumper.

191

Activation

Rear parking assist is activated when reverse gear is engaged and ignition is switched on. This is confirmed by an accoustic chime.

Graphic Info Display: The system is ready to operate when the LED in the parking assist button ¼ is not illuminated.

Colour Info Display: Activate the parking assist in the vehicle personalisation

3 89.

Indication

Depending on which side of the vehicle is closer to an obstacle, you will hear acoustic warning signals in the vehicle on the respective side. The interval between the sounds becomes shorter as the vehicle gets closer to that obstacle.

When the distance is less than approx.

30 cm, the sound is continuous.

Additionally, the distance to rear obstacles is displayed by changing distance lines in the Info Display 3 84.

When the obstacle is very close, 9 for danger is displayed.

Deactivation

The system is switched off when reverse gear is disengaged. Press ¼ to deactivate the system manually. The LED in the button illuminates when the system is deactivated. If the system has been deactivated manually, it is not reactivated automatically the next time the ignition is switched on.

Graphic Info Display: The system is switched off when the LED in the parking assist button ¼ is illuminated.

Colour Info Display: Deactivate the parking assist in the vehicle personalisation 3 89. The state of the system

192

Front-rear parking assist

The front-rear parking assist measures the distance between the vehicle and obstacles in front and behind the vehicle.

It informs and warns the driver by giving acoustic signals and display indication.

It uses two different acoustic warning signals for the front and rear monitoring areas, each with a different tone frequency.

The system operates with ultrasonic parking sensors in the rear and front bumper.

Activation

In addition to the rear parking assist, the front parking assist is triggered when an obstacle is detected in front and the speed of the vehicle is below 10 km/h /

6 mph.

Graphic Info Display: The system is ready to operate when the LED in the parking assist button ¼ is not illuminated.

Colour Info Display: Activate the parking assist is in the vehicle personalisation

3 89.

Indication

Depending on which side of the vehicle is closer to an obstacle, you will hear acoustic warning signals in the vehicle on the respective side. The interval between the sounds becomes shorter as the

vehicle gets closer to that obstacle.

When the distance is less than approx.

30 cm, the sound is continuous.

Additionally, the distance to rear and front obstacles is displayed by changing distance lines in the Info Display 3 84.

If the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in a forward gear, if automatic transmission is in P or if no further obstacles are detected, no acoustic warning signals are given.

Deactivation

The system is deactivated automatically when vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h /

6 mph, by applying the electric parking brake or by pressing the parking assist button ¼ .

Graphic Info Display: The system is switched off when the LED in the parking assist button ¼ is illuminated.

Colour Info Display: Deactivate the parking assist in the vehicle personalisation 3 89.

Front-rear-lateral parking assist

The front-rear-lateral parking parking assist measures the distance between the vehicle and obstacles in front, behind and at the sides of the vehicle. It informs and warns the driver by giving acoustic signals and display indication.

The system operates with ultrasonic parking sensors in the rear and front bumper and on the flanks of the vehicle.

Activation

In addition to the rear parking assist and the front-rear assist, the front-rear-lateral parking assist is triggered when the system detects fixed obstacles located to one or both sides of the vehicle.

Graphic Info Display: The system is ready to operate when the LED in the parking assist button ¼ is not illuminated.

Colour Info Display: Activate the parking assist is in the vehicle personalisation

3 89.

Indication

Depending on which side of the vehicle is closer to an obstacle, you will hear acoustic warning signals in the vehicle on the respective side. The interval between the sounds becomes shorter as the vehicle gets closer to that obstacle.

When the distance is less than approx.

30 cm, the sound is continuous.

Additionally, the distance to rear, front and lateral obstacles is displayed by changing distance lines in the Colour Info

Display 3 84.

Deactivation

The system is deactivated automatically when vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h /

6 mph, by applying the electric parking brake or by pressing the parking assist button ¼ .

Graphic Info Display: The system is switched off when the LED in the parking assist button ¼ is illuminated.

Colour Info Display: Deactivate the parking assist in the vehicle personalisation 3 89.

193

System limitations

In the event of a fault or if the system does not work temporarily, e.g. because of high external noise level or other interference factors, C illuminates in the instrument cluster. A message is displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

9 WARNING

Under certain circumstances, various reflective surfaces on objects or clothing as well as external noise sources may cause the system to fail to detect obstacles.

Special attention must be paid to low obstacles which can damage the lower part of the bumper.

CAUTION

Performance of the system can be reduced when sensors are covered, e.g.

by ice or snow.

Performance of the parking assist system can be reduced due to heavy loading.

Special conditions apply if there are taller vehicles in the vicinity (e.g. off-road vehicles, mini vans, vans). Object identification and correct distance indication in the upper part of these vehicles cannot be guaranteed.

Objects with a very small reflection crosssection, e.g. objects of narrow size or soft materials, may not be detected by the system.

Parking assist systems do not detect objects outside the detection range.

Advanced parking assist

9 WARNING

The driver bears full responsibility for accepting the parking slot suggested by the system and the parking manoeuvre.

Always check the surrounding area in all directions when using the advanced parking assist.

The advanced parking assist measures a suitable parking slot while passing, calculates the trajectory and automatically steers the vehicle while parking.

Advanced parking assist provides assistance for the following manoeuvres:

● entry into a parallel parking slot

● entry into a perpendicular parking slot

● exit from a parallel parking slot

The driver must control acceleration, braking and gear shifting, while steering is done automatically. The driver can take control at any time by gripping the steering wheel.

194

It may be necessary to move forwards and backwards more than once.

Instructions are given in the Info Display

3 84.

Advanced parking assist can only be activated when driving forwards.

Entry into a parallel parking slot

Activation

Slow down the vehicle speed below

30 km/h / 19 mph.

Colour Info Display: to search for a parking slot, activate the system by pressing Í . Select Driving functions on the Info Display and then Park Assist.

Select Enter parallel parking space.

Select parking side by switching on the turn light on the respective side.

The allowed parallel distance between the vehicle and a row of parked cars is between 0.5 m and 1.5 m.

For entering into a parallel parking slot, the minimum length of the slot must be equal to the length of your vehicle plus

0.6 m. The system will not identify slots that are clearly smaller or larger than the vehicle.

When a free slot is detected, a visual feedback on the Info Display and a first acoustic signal is given. Drive slowly forwards. When the second acoustic signal is given, stop the vehicle, select reverse gear, release the steering wheel and start moving slowly. A visual feedback is given on the Info Display.

Move forwards and backwards while observing the warnings of the Parking assist until the end of manoeuvre is indicated.

Entry into a perpendicular parking slot

Activation

Colour Info Display: when searching for a parking slot, activate the system by pressing Í . Select Driving functions on the Info Display and then Park Assist.

Select Enter bay parking space.

Slow down the vehicle speed below

30 km/h / 19 mph.

Select parking side by switching on the turn light on the respective side.

The allowed parallel distance between the vehicle and a row of parked cars is between 0.5 m and 1.5 m.

For entering into a perpendicular parking slot, the minimum width of the slot must be equal to the width of your vehicle plus

0.7 m. When several successive slots are found, the vehicle will be directed towards the last one.

When a free slot is detected, a visual feedback on the Info Display and an acoustic signal is given. Stop the vehicle, select reverse gear, release the steering wheel and start moving without exceeding 7 km/h / 4 mph.

Move forwards and backwards as instructed by observing the warnings of the parking assist and paying attention to

195

the acoustic signals until the end of manoeuvre is indicated. When finished,

$ extinguishes in the instrument cluster.

During the parking manoeuvre, the system is automatically deactivated once the rear of the vehicle is within 50 cm of an obstacle.

Exiting a parallel parking slot

Activation

Colour Info Display: when exiting a parallel parking slot, activate the system by pressing Í . Select Driving functions on the Info Display and then Park Assist.

Select Exit parallel parking space.

Select exit side by switching on the respective turn light.

Engage reverse or forward gear, release the steering wheel and start moving without exceeding 5 km/h / 3 mph.

Move forwards and backwards while observing the warnings of the Parking assist until the end of manoeuvre is indicated. The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's front wheels are out of the parking slot.

After deactivation check control over the vehicle.

Display indication

The instructions on the display show:

● general hints and warning messages

● the demand to stop the vehicle, when a parking slot is detected

● the direction of driving during the parking manoeuvre

● the demand to shift into reverse or first gear

● the demand to stop or to drive slowly

● the successful completion of the parking manoeuvre indicated by a pop-up symbol and a chime

● the cancelling of a parking manoeuvre

Deactivation

The current park assist manoeuvre is cancelled via the button to return to the previous screen in the Info Display. To deactivate the system completely, press

¼ in the centre console.

The system is deactivated automatically:

● if the ignition is switched off

● if stalling the engine

● if no manoeuvre is started within 5 minutes of selection of the type of manoeuvre

● after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during a manoeuvre

● if the Electronic Stability Control is triggered

● if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the stated limit

● when the driver interrupts movement of the steering wheel

● after seven manoeuvres for entering a perpendicular parking slot (a manoeuvre consists of one rear move or one forward move)

● after ten manoeuvres for entering or exiting a parallel parking slot

● on opening a door or the load compartment

● if one of the front wheels encounters an obstacle

● parking manoeuvre successfully ended

Deactivation by the driver or by the system during manoeuvring will be indicated on the display. Additionally, an acoustic signal sounds.

196

The system is switched off automatically when towing an electrically connected trailer, bicycle carrier, etc.

Contact your dealer to switch off the system for a prolonged period.

Fault

In the event of a fault, a message is displayed in the Colour Info Display, accompanied by an acoustic signal.

In the event of a fault in the power steering,

C

illuminates and a message is displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

9 WARNING

Under certain circumstances, various reflective surfaces on objects or clothing as well as external noise sources may cause the system to fail to detect obstacles.

Special attention must be paid to low obstacles which can damage the lower part of the bumper.

CAUTION

Performance of the system can be reduced when sensors are covered, e.g.

by ice or snow.

Performance of the parking assist system can be reduced due to heavy loading.

Special conditions apply if there are taller vehicles in the vicinity (e.g. off-road vehicles, mini vans, vans). Object identification and correct distance indication in the upper part of these vehicles cannot be guaranteed.

Objects with a very small reflection crosssection, e.g. objects of narrow size or soft materials, may not be detected by the system.

Parking assist systems do not detect objects outside the detection range.

Note

It is possible that the sensor detects a nonexisting object caused by echo disturbance from external acoustic noise or mechanical misalignments (sporadic false warnings may occur).

Make sure that the front number plate is properly mounted (not bent and no gaps to the bumper on the left or right side) and the sensors are firmly in place.

Advanced parking assist system may not respond to changes in the available parking space after initiating a parking manoeuvre.

The system may recognize an entry, a gateway, a courtyard or even a crossing as a parking slot. After selecting reverse gear the system will start a parking manoeuvre.

Take care regarding the availability of the suggested parking slot.

Surface irregularities, e.g. on construction zones, are not detected by the system. The driver accepts responsibility.

Side blind spot alert

The side blind spot alert system detects and reports objects on either side of the vehicle, within a specified blind spot zone. The system displays a visual alert in each exterior mirror, when detecting objects that may not be visible in the interior and exterior mirrors.

Side blind spot alert uses some of the advanced parking assist sensors which are located in the front and rear bumper on both sides of the vehicle.

9 WARNING

Side blind spot alert does not replace driver vision.

The system does not detect:

● vehicles outside the side blind zones which may be rapidly approaching

● pedestrians, cyclists or animals

Before changing a lane, always check all mirrors, look over the shoulder and use the turn signal.

Activation

Colour Info Display: press Í . Select

Driving functions on the Info Display and then Blind spot sensors. Activate the function.

B illuminates continously green in the instrument cluster to confirm the function.

197

Functionality

When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind zone while driving forwards, an

LED will illuminate in the relevant exterior mirror.

The LED comes on immediately when being passed.

The LED comes on after a delay when passing another vehicle slowly.

Operation conditions

The following conditions must be fulfilled for proper operation:

● all vehicles are moving in the same direction and in adjacent lanes

● the speed of your vehicle is between

12 km/h / 7 mph and 140 km/h /

87 mph

● passing a vehicle with a speed difference of less than 10 km/h /

6 mph

198

● another vehicle is passing with a speed difference of less than

25 km/h / 15 mph

● the traffic flow is normal

● driving on a straight or slightly curved road

● the vehicle is not pulling a trailer

● the sensors are not covered by mud, ice or snow

● the warning zones in the door mirrors or the detection zones on front and rear bumper ar not covered with adhesive labels or other objects

No alert will be given in the following situations:

● in the presence of non-moving objects, e.g. parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps, road signs

● in very dense traffic, when moving vehicles might be confused with a stationary object

● with vehicles moving in the opposite direction

● driving on a winding road or a sharp corner

● when passing or being passed by a very long vehicle, e.g. lorry, coach, which is at the same time detected at the rear in the blind spot angle and present in the driver's forward field of vision

● when passing too quickly

Deactivation

The system is deactivated in the vehicle personalisation 3 89. B extinguishes in the instrument cluster. Additionally, an acoustic signal sounds.

The state of the system is stored when switching off the ignition.

The system is automatically deactivated when towing an electrically connected trailer.

Due to adverse weather conditions such as heavy rain, false detections may occur.

Fault

In the event of a fault, B flashes for a few moments in the instrument panel, accompanied by C and a display message. Have the cause of the fault remedied by a workshop.

Passenger side camera

The passenger side camera monitors the side of the vehicle.

Guidelines

The camera is mounted at the bottom of the exterior mirror on the passenger side.

The area displayed by the camera is limited. The distance of the image that appears on the display differs from the actual distance.

Camera with view to the rear

The camera shows the blind spot area of the passenger side.

The passenger side view is displayed in the rear view display 3 87.

Switching on

The camera is switched on when the vehicle is running in forward gear and the passenger side view is selected from the rear view display.

The line represents a distance of about

4 m beyond the edge of vehicle's rear bumper.

Switching off

The camera is deactivated when another view type is selected.

System limitations

The passenger side camera may not operate properly when:

● the surrounding is dark

● the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lenses

● weather limits visibility, such as fog, rain, or snow

● the camera lenses are blocked by snow, ice, slush, mud, dirt. Clean the lense, rinse with water, and wipe with a soft cloth

● there are extreme temperature changes

Panoramic view system

This system allows views of the vehicle's surroundings to be displayed as a nearly

180° picture in the Info display, like a bird's eye view.

The system uses:

● rear camera, installed in the tailgate

● ultrasonic parking sensors in the rear bumper

The screen in the Info display is divided into two parts. On the right there is a view from above the vehicle, and on the left there is the view from the rear displayed.

199

The parking sensors complete the information on the view from above the vehicle.

Change the volume of the acoustic signals by pressing C in the right lower zone of the display.

Activation

Panoramic view system is activated by:

● engaging reverse gear

● driving up to 10 km/h / 6 mph

Functionality

Different views can be selected in the left part of the display. Change the type of view at any time during a manoeuvre by pressing the touch field in the left lower zone of the display:

● Standard view

● AUTO Mode

● Zoom view

● 180° view

The display is immediately updated with the type of view selected.

AUTO Mode is activated by default. In this mode, the system selects the best view, standard or zoom, to display according to the information from the parking sensors.

The state of the system is not kept in memory when the ignition is switched off.

Rear view / Standard view

The area behind the vehicle is displayed in the screen. The vertical lines represent the width of the vehicle with mirrors unfolded. The direction of the lines changes with the position of the steering wheel.

The first horizontal line represents a distance of about 30 cm beyond the edge of vehicle's rear bumper. The upper horizontal lines represent distances of about 1 and 2 m beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear bumper.

This view is available in AUTO Mode or in the view selection menu.

Rear zoom view / Zoom view

The camera records the vehicle's surroundings during the manoeuvre in order to reconstruct a view from above the rear of the vehicle in its near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be manoeuvred around obstacles nearby.

This view is available with AUTO Mode or in the view selection menu.

Rear side view / 180° view

200

The 180° view facilitates reversing out of a parking bay, making it possible to see the approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists. This view is not recommended for carrying out a complete manoeuvre. It is made up of three areas: left 1, centre 2 and right 3.

This view is available from the view selection menu only.

Deactivation

Panoramic view system is deactivated when:

● driving faster than 10 km/h / 6 mph

● seven seconds after disengaging reverse gear

● by pressing the icon Ù in the left upper corner of the touch screen and then

&

● opening the tailgate

● attaching a trailer or a bike carrier

General information

9 WARNING

The panoramic view system does not replace driver vision. It will not display children, pedestrians, cyclists, crossing traffic, animals, or any other objects outside of the camera view area, e. g.

below the bumper, or underneath the vehicle.

Do not drive or park the vehicle using only the panoramic view system.

Always check the surrounding of the vehicle before and during driving.

Displayed images may be further or closer than they appear. The area displayed is limited and objects that are close to either edge of the bumper or under the bumper are not displayed on the screen.

System limitations

CAUTION

For optimal operation of the system, it is important to keep the lense of the camera in the tailgate between the number plate lights always clean. Rinse the lense with water and wipe with a soft cloth.

Do not clean the lense with a steam-jet or high-pressure jet cleaner.

The panoramic view system may not operate properly when:

● The surrounding is dark.

● The sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lenses.

● During nighttime driving.

● Weather limits visibility, such as fog, rain, or snow.

● The camera lenses are blocked by snow, ice, slush, mud, dirt.

● The vehicle is towing a trailer.

● The vehicle had an accident.

● There are extreme temperature changes.

Rear view camera

Depending on version, camera is mounted above the license plate in the tailgate / left rear door or at the top of the left rear door.

9 WARNING

The rear view camera does not replace driver vision. Note that objects that are outside the camera's field of view and the parking assist sensors, e.g. below the bumper or underneath the vehicle, are not displayed.

Do not reverse or park the vehicle using only the rear view camera.

Always check the surrounding of the vehicle before and during driving.

201

Camera above the license plate on the tailgate / left rear door

The view of the camera is displayed in the

Info Display 3 84.

The area displayed by the camera is limited. The distance of the image that appears on the display differs from the actual distance.

Switching on

Rear view camera is automatically activated when reverse gear is engaged.

Guidelines

Dynamic guidelines are horizontal lines at one metre intervals projected onto the picture to define the distance to displayed objects.

Trajectory lane of the vehicle is shown in accordance with the steering angle.

Switching off

The camera is switched off when a forward gear is engaged.

Camera at top of the left rear door

Switching on

The rear view camera is automatically switched on.

The standard rear view is activated when a forward gear is engaged.

The close rear view is activated when selected via p in the rear view display or when the reverse gear is engaged.

When operating with a trailer, the close rear view is no longer operable.

Guidelines

Standard rear view

The horizontal line represents a distance of about 4 m beyond the edge of vehicle's rear bumper.

The view of the camera is displayed in the rear view display 3 87.

202

Close rear view

The lower horizontal line represents a distance of about 30 cm beyond the edge of vehicle's rear bumper. The upper horizontal lines represent a distance of about 1 m and 2 m.

Trajectory lane of the vehicle is shown in accordance with the steering angle.

Additionally the opening radius of the rear doors are shown in the rear view display.

Switching off

The rear view camera is switched off when the rear view display is switched off.

System limitations

The rear view camera may not operate properly when:

● the surrounding is dark

● the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lenses

● weather limits visibility, such as fog, rain, or snow

● the camera lenses are blocked by snow, ice, slush, mud, dirt. Clean the lense, rinse with water, and wipe with a soft cloth

● the tailgate will be opened

● the vehicle is towing an electrically connected trailer, bicycle carrier, etc.

● the vehicle had a rear end accident

● there are extreme temperature changes

Lane keep assist

Lane keep assist helps to avoid crashes due to unintentional lane departures. A front camera located at the top of the windscreen observes the lane markings between which the vehicle is driving. If the vehicle approaches a lane marking, the steering wheel is gently turned to position the vehicle back into the lane.

The driver will then notice a turning movement of the steering wheel. Turn steering wheel in same direction, if system steers not sufficient. Turn steering wheel gently into opposite direction, if lane change is intended.

When the system steers to correct the trajectory of the vehicle, a flashes yellow in the instrument cluster.

A warning message in the Driver

Information Centre accompanied by a warning chime alerts the driver when immediate driver´s action is required.

Unintended lane departure is not assumed by the system when the turn lights are operated and during 20 s after turn lights have been switched off.

Note

The system may be switched off if it detects lanes which are too narrow, too wide or too curved.

Following preconditions have to be fullfilled:

● vehicle speed must be between

65 km/h / 40 mph and 180 km/h /

112 mph

● the driver must hold the steering wheel with both hands

203

● the change of trajectory is not accompanied by operation of the turn signals

● the Electronic Stability Control is activated and not in operation

● the vehicle is not connected to a trailer or an electric bicycle carrier

● normal driving behaviour (system detects dynamic driving style, i.e.

pressure on the brake or accelerator pedal)

● roads with poor lane markings

● no spare wheel is used

● the driver needs to be active during the correction

● the vehicle is not driven in a tight corner

Activation

If the system is activated, the LED in the button Ó is not illuminated. To activate the system when the system is deactivated, press Ó .

The system is operational at vehicle speeds between 65 km/h / 40 mph and

180 km/h / 112 mph and if lane markings are detectable. The driver must hold the steering wheel with both hands. The

Electronic Stability Control system must be activated.

The control indicator a flashes yellow during trajectory correction.

If the driver wishes to maintain the trajectory of the vehicle, he can prevent the correction by keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, e.g. during an avoiding manoeuvre. The correction is interrupted if the turn lights are operated.

There is no correction triggered when the turn lights are operated and during a few seconds after turn lights have been switched off.

If the system detects that the driver is not holding the steering wheel firmly enough during an automatic correction of trajectory, it interrupts the correction. A warning message in the Driver

Information Centre accompanied by a warning chime alerts the driver when immediate driver´s action is required.

Deactivation

To deactivate the system, press and hold

Ó . Deactivation of the system is confirmed by the illuminated LED in the button. In the Driver Information Centre solid grey lines are displayed.

Recommended deactivation

It is recommended to deactivate the system in the following situations:

● Road surface in poor condition

● Unfavourable climatic conditions

● Slippery surfaces, e.g., ice

The system is not designed for driving in the following situations:

● Driving on a speed circuit

● Driving with a trailer

● Driving on a rolling stand

● Driving on unstable surfaces

Fault

In the event of a fault, a and C appear in the instrument panel, accompanied by a display message and a warning chime. Contact a dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.

204

System limitations

The system performance may be affected by:

● windscreen not clean or affected by foreign objects, e.g. stickers

● close vehicles ahead

● banked roads

● narrow, winding or hilly roads

● road edges

● sudden lighting changes

● adverse environmental conditions, e.g. heavy rain or snow

● vehicle modifications, e.g. tyres

Switch off the system if the system is disturbed by tar marks, shadows, road cracks, temporary or construction lane markings, or other road imperfections.

9 WARNING

Always keep your attention on the road and maintain proper vehicle position within the lane, otherwise vehicle damage, injury or death could occur.

Lane keep assist does not continuously steer the vehicle.

The system may not keep the vehicle in the lane or give an alert, even if a lane marking is detected.

The steering of the lane keep assist may not be sufficient to avoid a lane departure.

The system may not detect hands-off driving due to external influences like road condition and surface and weather. The driver has full responsibility to control the vehicle and is always required to keep the hands on the steering wheel while driving.

Using the system while towing a trailer or on slippery roads could cause loss of control of the vehicle and a crash. Switch the system off.

Driver alert

The driver alert system monitores the driving time and the vigilance of the driver. Monitoring the vigilance of the driver is based on the trajectory variations of the vehicle compared to the lane markings.

The system cannot replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. Taking a break is recommended as soon as feeling tired or at least every two hours.

Do not take the steering wheel when feeling tired.

Activation or Deactivation

The system can be activated or deactivated in the vehicle personalisation

3 89.

The state of the system stays in memory when the ignition is switched off.

Driving time alert

The driver gets notified by a pop-up reminder symbol € in the Driver

Information Centre simultaneously with an acoustic alert if the driver has not taken a break after 2 hours of driving at a speed above 65 km/h / 40 mph. The alert is repeated hourly until the vehicle is stopped, no matter how vehicle speed evolves.

The counting of driving time alert is reset if one of the following conditions is met:

● The vehicle has been stationary for more than 15 minutes with the engine running.

● The ignition has been switched off for a few minutes.

● The driver's seat belt has been unfastened and the driver's door is open.

Note

If the vehicle speed drops below 65 km/h /

40 mph, the system is paused. The driving time is counted again once the speed is above 65 km/h / 40 mph.

Driver drowsiness detection

The system monitors the driver's level of vigilance. A camera at the top of the windscreen detects variations in trajectory compared to the lane markings. This system is particularly suited to fast roads (speed higher than

65 km/h / 40 mph).

205

If the trajectory of the vehicle suggests a certain level of drowsiness or inattention by the driver, the system triggers the first level of alert. The driver is notified by a message and an audible signal is given.

After three first level alerts, the system triggers a new alert with a message, accompanied by a more pronounced audible signal.

In certain driving conditions (poor road surface or strong winds), the system may give alerts independent of the driver's level of vigilance.

The driver drowsiness detection is reinitialised when the ignition has been switched off for a few minutes or the speed remains below 65 km/h / 40 mph for a few minutes.

System limitations

In the following situations, the system may not operate properly or even not operate at all:

● poor visibility caused by inadequate lighting of the roadway, falling snow, heavy rain, dense fog etc.

● dazzle caused by headlights of oncoming vehicles, low sun, reflections on damp roads, leaving a tunnel, alternating shade and light etc.

● windscreen area in front of the camera covered by dirt, snow, stickers etc.

206

● no lane markings detected or multiple lane markings due to roadworks

● close vehicles ahead

● winding roads or narrow roads

CHARGING

General information

9 WARNING

Persons with a pacemaker should consult a doctor for possible precautions.

Charging the vehicle's high voltage battery depends upon several factors:

● high voltage battery of the vehicle

● internal onboard charger (OBC)

● external charging device

● charging cable

The charging cable connects the vehicle with an external charging device providing electric power. This may be a domestic electrical outlet, a Green'Up socket, a wall box or a public charging station.

The high voltage battery is charged with direct current (DC) only. When charging the vehicle alternating current (AC) has to be converted into DC. This is done by the

vehicle's onboard charger. The onboard charger is available with 7.4 kW (singlephase) and 11 kW (3-phase)

If the vehicle is charged at a public DC charging station, no DC conversion is required. The high voltage battery can be directly charged with DC provided by the

DC charging station.

The speed of charging the vehicle's high voltage battery depends upon the weakest element of the charging chain.

To achieve the maximum charging speed, charging cable and charging device have to be attuned to each other.

Note

Make sure that the charging cable used fits to the vehicle's onboard charger.

Charging types 3 207.

Charging cable 3 212.

Electric power consumption and range

The electric power consumption

(combined) is within a range of 22.5 to

19.8 kWh/100 km, CO

2

emission 0 g/km.

The range is up to 280 km / 174 miles for the passenger and 275 km / 170 miles for the cargo version.

For the values specific to your vehicle, refer to the EEC Certificate of Conformity provided with your vehicle or other national registration documents.

The determination of electric power consumption is regulated by directive R

(EC) No. 715/2007 and No. 2017/1151

(in the latest applicable version).

Charging types

There are different types of charging the vehicle. Charging times refer to charging an empty battery until it is completely charged.

Charging at wall boxes / AC charging stations

A wall box / AC charging station may or may not provide a charging cable which has to be connected to the vehicle's charging port.

Charging time may take approx. 5 hours with a charging power of 11 kW with

16 A or 7.5 hours with a charging power of 7.4 kW with 32 A.

Charging at DC charging stations

DC charging stations provide the fastest charging. Connect the charging cable to the vehicle's charging port.

Up to approx. 80% of battery capacity may be charged in approx. 30 minutes at a charging power of 100 kW.

Charging at domestic electrical outlets

Connect the charging cable to the vehicle's charging port and to the domestic electrical outlet.

Charging time may take approx. 30 hours with a charging power of 1.8 kW.

Charging cable

Depending on the charging type, different charging cables are used.

9 WARNING

Improper use of portable charging cables may cause a fire, electrical shock, or burns, and may result in damage to property, serious injury, or death.

● Do not use extension cables, multi-outlet power strips, splitters, grounding adaptors, surge protectors, or similar devices.

● Do not use an electrical socket that is worn or damaged, or one that will not hold the plug firmly in place.

● Do not immerse the charging cable into any liquid.

● Do not use an electrical socket that is not properly grounded.

● Do not use an electrical socket that is on a circuit with other electrical loads.

207

9 WARNING

Read all the safety warnings and instructions before using this product.

Failure to follow the warnings and the instructions may result in electric shock, fire, and / or serious injury.

Never leave children unattended near the vehicle while the vehicle is charging and never allow children to play with the charging cable.

If the plug provided does not fit the electrical outlet, do not modify the plug.

Arrange for a qualified electrician to inspect the electrical outlet.

Do not put fingers into the electric vehicle connector.

9 DANGER

There is a risk of electric shock that may cause personal injury or death.

Do not use the charging cable if any part of the charging cable is damaged.

Do not open or remove the charging cable cover.

Service by qualified personnel only.

Connect the charging cable to a properly grounded outlet with cables that are not damaged.

Basic domestic cable (mode 2) / enhanced domestic cable (mode 2)

1. Vehicle plug

2. Status indicators

3. Wall plug

Basic domestic cables (mode 2) are used for charging at domestic electrical outlets. A basic domestic cable (mode 2) consists of a vehicle plug, a control box and a plug for the domestic electrical outlet. The control box has an intergrated charge controller and several LEDs indicating the charging status.

Enhanced domestic cables (mode 2) are similar to basic domestic cables (mode

2). However, the charging performance of enhanced domestic cables (mode 2 charging) is better than the charging performance of basic domestic cables

(mode 2). Enhanced domestic cables

(mode 2) are used at Green'Up sockets which have to be installed by a certified electrician at the customer's site.

Charging cable status indicators

After plugging in the charging cable, it will perform a quick self test and all status indicators illuminate for a moment. For the functions of the status indicators, refer to the manual of the charging cable manufacturer.

Important information about portable electric vehicle charging

● Charging an electric vehicle can stress a building's electrical system more than a typical household appliance.

● Before you plug in to any electrical outlet, have a qualified electrician inspect and verify the electrical system (electrical outlet, wiring, junctions and protection devices) for heavy-duty service at a 10 A continuous load.

● Electrical outlets may wear out with normal usage or be damaged over time, making them unsuitable for electric vehicle charging.

● Check the electrical outlet / plug while charging and discontinue use if the electrical outlet / plug is hot, then have the electrical outlet serviced by a qualified electrician.

208

● When outdoors, plug into an electrical outlet that is weather-proof while in use.

● Mount the charging cable to reduce strain on the electrical outlet / plug.

Mode 3 charging cable

1. Vehicle plug

2. Plug for wall box / AC charging station

Mode 3 charging cables are used for charging at wall boxes and AC charging stations. A mode 3 charging cable provides a vehicle plug and a plug for the wall box / AC charging station. Wall boxes / AC charging stations may provide an integrated mode 3 charging cable. For more information on the mode

3 charging cable, refer to the manual of the charging cable manufacturer.

Mode 4 charging cable

Note

Only use DC charging cables shorter than 30 metres.

Mode 4 charging cables are used for DC charging. Since mode 4 charging cables are integrated within DC charging stations, they only provide a vehicle plug.

Charging

9 WARNING

Persons with a pacemaker or similar devices should consult a doctor for possible precautions.

If in doubt, during charging do not remain inside or near the vehicle, near the charging cable or the charging unit.

In order to ensure the compatibility of plug and outlet, different labels are used.

The labels are located on the inside of the vehicle's charging port flap. Make sure to connect only a cable of the same type.

Type 2 plug or outlet used for AC charging

FF plug or outlet used for DC charging

9 WARNING

Avoid any entry of fluids into the charging port of the vehicle, the vehicle plug of the charging cable and the domestic electrical outlet.

When charging at a public AC charging station / public DC charging station, follow the instructions for the use of the respective charging station. Public AC charging stations may not provide an integrated charging cable. In this case, a portable mode 3 charging cable is required.

9 WARNING

Do not work in the engine compartment.

Some areas remain very hot, even an hour after charging and the fan may start at any time.

209

9 WARNING

When charging at a domestic electrical outlet, only use an outlet which is properly grounded and protected by a 30 mA differential switch.

Only use a domestic electrical outlet protected by a circuit breaker adapted to the amperage of the electrical circuit.

Have a qualified electrician check the electrical installation to be used. The installation has to be in compliance with national standards and compatible with the vehicle.

When using a dedicated domestic electrical outlet, have it installed by a qualified electrician.

Make sure that the electrical outlet, the plug and the cable do not support the weight of the control box.

1. Shift into P and switch off the vehicle.

2. Push the charging port flap to release it.

3. If necessary, take the charging cable out of the load compartment.

4. If necessary, plug in the plug of the charging cable into the corresponding port of the external power source.

Charging cable 3 212.

5. Plug in the vehicle plug of the charging cable into the charging port of the vehicle.

Charging status 3 212.

The start of charging is indicated by the green flashing of the status indicator at the charging port and at the control box of the charging cable if available.

Once charging, the vehicle plug will be locked to the charging port and cannot be disconnected while charging is active.

indicator illuminates.

Charging types 3 207.

210

Cancelling the charging process

Note

At public charging stations, the cancelling and subsequent resuming of the charging process may cause additional costs.

Once the charging process has started, only the driver's door can be unlocked without cancelling the charging process. Therefore, activate the driver's door only function in the vehicle personalisation.

Press < on the remote control to cancel the charging process at any time.

Press < twice to cancel the charging process at any time if the function driver's door only is activated in the vehicle personalisation.

Central locking system 3 9.

Vehicle personalisation 3 89.

Stop charging

The high voltage battery is fully charged if the status indicator on the charging port permanently illuminates green.

1. Unlock the vehicle before removing the vehicle plug from the charging port.

If the vehicle is already unlocked, lock the vehicle and unlock it again.

2. Disconnect the vehicle plug of the charging cable from the charging port within 30 seconds after unlocking.

3. Close the charging port flap by pressing firmly in the centre to latch properly.

4. Disconnect the charging cable from the external power source.

5. If necessary, store the charging cable in the load compartment.

While the charging cable is plugged into the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be driven.

Programmable charging

By default, charging starts as soon as the charging cable is connected to the charging port of the vehicle. It is also possible to schedule the charging by using the Info Display or the app.

Programmable charging is only possible when charging at a domestic electrical outlet / Green'Up socket or a wall box.

Note

On vehicles without integrated navigation system, programmable charging can only be used via the app.

1. Press

2. Select m .

Charge .

3. Press / .

211

4. Define the number of hours and minutes after which the loading process starts.

5. Press OK .

6. Plug in the vehicle.

Charging status

7. Within one minute, press b to activate programmable charging.

8. Depending on version, lock the vehicle.

The status indicator illuminates blue indicating that programmable charging is active.

Charging 3 209.

Charging status 3 212.

If the vehicle is plugged in and the ignition is switched off, the charging status indicator indicates the following:

● Illuminates white: welcome lighting when charging port flap is opened

● Illuminates green: charging complete

● Flashes green: charging in process

● Illuminates red: charging fault

● Illuminates blue: programmable charging active

A charging fault has occured if the vehicle is plugged in and the charging status indicator is off.

Further charging status indicators are located on the control box of the basic domestic cable (mode 2) / enhanced domestic cable (mode 2).

Charging cable 3 207.

212

Programmable charging 3 211.

FUEL

Fuel for petrol engines

The petrol engines are compatible with bio-fuels that conform to current and future European standards and and can be obtained from filling stations:

The engine specific requirements regarding octane rating are given in the engine data overview 3 271. A countryspecific label at the fuel filler flap can supersede the requirement. In certain countries, the use of a particular fuel, e.g.

a specific octane rating, may be required to ensure proper engine operation.

Fuel for diesel engines

The diesel engines are compatible with bio-fuels that conform to current and future European standards and and can be obtained from filling stations:

Diesel fuel that meets standard

EN16734 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard EN14214 (possibly containing up to 10% Fatty Acid Methyl Ester)

Paraffinic diesel fuel that meets standard

EN15940 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard EN14214 (possibly containing up to 7% Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).

Petrol that meets the EN228 standard, mixed with a biofuel meeting the

EN15376 standard.

Use fuel with the recommended octane rating. A lower octane rating can reduce engine power and torque and slightly increases fuel consumption.

CAUTION

Do not use fuel or fuel additives that contain metallic compounds such as manganese-based additives. This may cause engine damage.

CAUTION

Use of fuel with a lower octane rating than the lowest possible rating could lead to uncontrolled combustion and engine damage.

Diesel fuel that meets standard EN590 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard

EN14214 (possibly containing up to 7 %

Fatty Acid Methyl Ester)

The use of B20 or B30 fuel meeting standard EN16709 is possible in your diesel engines. However, this use, even occasional, requires strict application of the special servicing conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions".

For more information, contact a dealer or a qualified workshop.

213

CAUTION

The use of any other type of (bio) fuel

(vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, domestic fuel etc.) is strictly prohibited (risk of damage to the engine and fuel system).

Note

The only diesel additives authorised for use are those that meet the B715000 standard.

Low temperature operation

At temperatures below 0 °C, some diesel products with biodiesel blends may clog, freeze or gel, which may affect the fuel supply system. Starting and engine operation may not work properly. Make sure to fill winter grade diesel fuel at ambient temperatures below 0 °C.

Arctic grade diesel fuel can be used at extremely low temperatures below

-20 °C. Using this fuel grade in warm or hot climates is not recommended and may cause engine stalling, poor starting or damage on the fuel injection system.

Refuelling

9 DANGER

Before refuelling, switch off ignition and any external heaters with combustion chambers.

Follow the operating and safety instructions of the filling station when refuelling.

9 DANGER

Fuel is flammable and explosive. No smoking. No naked flames or sparks.

If you can smell fuel in your vehicle, have the cause of this remedied immediately by a workshop.

A label with symbols at the fuel filler flap is indicating the allowed fuel types. In

Europe the pump nozzles of the filling stations are marked with these symbols.

Refuel only the allowed fuel type.

CAUTION

In case of misfuelling, do not switch on ignition.

Fuel filler flap is located at left rear side of vehicle.

If the vehicle is equipped with an electronic key system, the fuel filler flap can only be opened if the vehicle is unlocked. Depending on the version, release the fuel filler flap by pushing the flap or pulling at the right bottom corner.

Petrol and diesel refuelling

Depending on the version, place the key in the lock and unlock the cap.

To open, turn the cap slowly anticlockwise.

214

The fuel filler cap can be attached to the hook on the fuel filler flap.

Place the nozzle in straight position to the filler neck and press with slight force to insert.

To refuel, switch on pump nozzle.

After the automatic cut-off, the tank can be topped up by operating the pump nozzle a maximum of two more times.

CAUTION

Wipe off any overflowing fuel immediately.

To close, turn the fuel filler cap clockwise until it clicks.

Close the flap and allow it to engage.

Fuel filler cap

Only use genuine fuel filler caps.

Diesel-engined vehicles have special fuel filler caps.

Fuel consumption - CO

2

-Emissions

The fuel consumption (combined) is within a range of 5.9 to 4.3 l/100 km / 47 to 65 mpg.

The CO

2

emission is within a range of 137 to 106 g/km.

General information

For the values specific to your vehicle, refer to the EEC Certificate of Conformity provided with your vehicle or other national registration documents.

The determination of fuel consumption is regulated by directive R (EC) No.

715/2007 and No. 2017/1151 (in the latest applicable version).

The specification of CO

2

emission is also a constituent of the directive.

The figures given must not be taken as a guarantee for the actual fuel consumption of a particular vehicle.

Furthermore, fuel consumption is dependent on personal driving style as well as road and traffic conditions.

All values are based on the EU base model with standard equipment.

The calculation of fuel consumption takes into account the vehicle's kerb weight, ascertained in accordance with the regulations. Optional equipment may result in slightly higher fuel consumption and CO

2

emission levels and a lower maximum speed.

TRAILER HITCH

General information

Only use towing equipment that has been approved for your vehicle.

Entrust retrofitting of towing equipment to a workshop. It may be necessary to make changes that affect the cooling system, heat shields or other equipment.

The bulb outage detection function for trailer brake light cannot detect a partial bulb outage e.g. in case of four bulbs with a power of 5 W each, the function only detects lamp outage when only a single

5 W lamp remains or none remain.

Fitting of towing equipment could cover the opening of the towing eye. If this is the case use the coupling ball bar for towing. Always keep the coupling ball bar in the vehicle to have it on hand if needed.

Driving characteristics and towing tips

Before attaching a trailer, lubricate the coupling ball. However, do not do so if a stabiliser, which acts on the coupling ball, is being used to reduce snaking movements.

During trailer towing do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h / 50 mph. A maximum speed of 100 km/h / 60 mph is only appropriate if an oscillation damper is

215

used and the permissible gross trailer weight does not exceed the vehicle’s curb weight.

For trailers with low driving stability and caravan trailers, the use of an oscillation damper is strongly recommended.

If the trailer starts snaking, drive more slowly, do not attempt to correct the steering and brake sharply if necessary.

When driving downhill, drive in the same gear as if driving uphill and drive at a similar speed.

Adjust tyre pressure to the value specified for full load 3 272.

Trailer towing

Trailer loads

The permissible trailer loads are vehicle and engine-dependent maximum values which must not be exceeded. The actual trailer load is the difference between the actual gross weight of the trailer and the actual coupling socket load with the trailer coupled.

The permissible trailer loads are specified in the vehicle documents. In general, they are valid for inclines up to 12%.

The permissible trailer load applies up to the specified incline and at sea level.

Since engine power decreases as altitude increases due to the air becoming thinner, therefore reducing climbing ability, the permissible gross

216 train weight also decreases by 10% for every 1000 metres of altitude. The gross train weight does not have to be reduced when driving on roads with slight inclines

(less than 8%, e.g. motorways).

The permissible gross train weight must not be exceeded. This weight is specified on the identification plate 3 267.

Vertical coupling load

The vertical coupling load is the load exerted by the trailer on the coupling ball.

It can be varied by changing the weight distribution when loading the trailer.

The maximum permissible vertical coupling load is specified on the towing equipment identification plate and in the vehicle documents.

Always aim for the maximum vertical coupling load, especially in the case of heavy trailers. The vertical coupling load should never fall below 25 kg.

Rear axle load

When the trailer is coupled and the towing vehicle fully loaded, the permissible rear axle load (see identification plate or vehicle documents) may be exceeded by 60 kg, the gross vehicle weight rating must not be exceeded. If the permissible rear axle load is exceeded, a maximum speed of

100 km/h / 60 mph applies.

Towing equipment

Depending on version the vehicle can be fitted with a detachable or a fixed coupling ball bar.

Type A

CAUTION

When operating without a trailer, remove the coupling ball bar.

Fitting the coupling ball bar

1. Place the key in the lock and unlock the coupling ball bar. Move the lever to the rear position.

2. Clean the contact points with a soft clean cloth.

4. Lock the coupling ball bar by turning the key. Remove the key and close the protective flap.

5. Attach the trailer.

6. Fold the socket forward.

9 WARNING

Towing a trailer is permitted only when a coupling ball bar is fitted correctly. If the coupling ball bar does not engage correctly, seek the assistance of a workshop.

Dismounting coupling ball bar

1. Disconnect the trailer plug.

2. Unfasten the breakaway stopping cable.

3. Remove the trailer.

4. Open the protective flap and unlock the coupling ball bar with the key.

7. Connect the trailer plug to the socket.

3. Insert the coupling ball bar in the opening and push firmly up to the stop.

Secure the coupling ball bar correctly by moving the lever to the locked position, shown in the picture.

8. Attach the breakaway stopping cable to the eye on the carrier.

5. Move the lever of the coupling ball bar to the rear position. Remove the coupling ball bar by pulling it.

217

Type C

6. Move the lever of the coupling ball bar to the front position.

Type B

1. Remove the safety splint.

1. Connect the trailer plug to the socket and fasten the breakaway stopping cable to the eye on the carrier.

2. Attach the trailer.

2. Pull the lever and open the towing ring.

3. Attach the trailer, close the towing ring and fix the splint.

218

4. Connect the trailer plug to the socket and attach the breakaway stopping cable to the eye on the carrier.

Trailer stability assist

If the system detects snaking movements, engine power is reduced and the vehicle / trailer combination is selectively braked until the snaking ceases. While system is working keep steering wheel as still as possible.

Trailer stability assist is a function of the

Electronic Stability Control 3 175.

VEHICLE CARE

General Information ........................ 219

Accessories and vehicle modifications .............................. 219

Vehicle storage ............................ 220

End-of-life vehicle recovery .......... 221

Vehicle checks ............................... 222

Performing work .......................... 222

Bonnet ......................................... 222

Engine oil ..................................... 223

Engine coolant ............................. 224

Washer fluid ................................. 224

Brakes ......................................... 224

Brake fluid ................................... 224

Vehicle battery ............................. 225

High voltage battery ..................... 226

Diesel fuel system bleeding .......... 227

Wiper blade replacement ............. 227

Bulb replacement ........................... 228

Halogen headlights ...................... 228

LED headlights ............................ 229

Front fog lights ............................. 229

Front turn lights ............................ 230

Tail lights ...................................... 231

Side turn lights ............................. 232

Number plate light ....................... 233

Interior lights ................................ 233

Electrical system ............................ 234

Fuses ........................................... 234

Vehicle tools ................................... 234

Tools ........................................... 234

Wheels and tyres ........................... 235

Winter tyres ................................. 235

Tyre designations ......................... 235

Tyre pressure ............................... 235

Tyre deflation detection system .... 236

Tread depth ................................. 237

Changing tyre and wheel size ...... 237

Wheel covers ............................... 237

Tyre chains .................................. 238

Tyre repair kit ............................... 238

Wheel changing ........................... 240

Spare wheel ................................. 242

Jump starting ................................. 244

Towing ........................................... 246

Towing the vehicle ....................... 246

Towing another vehicle ................ 247

Appearance care ............................ 247

Exterior care ................................ 247

Interior care ................................. 249

Floor mats ................................... 249

GENERAL INFORMATION

Accessories and vehicle modifications

We recommend the use of genuine parts and accessories and factory approved parts specific for your vehicle type. We cannot assess or guarantee reliability of other products - even if they have a regulatory or otherwise granted approval.

Any modification, conversion or other changes made to standard vehicle specifications (including, without limitation, software modifications, modifications of the electronic control units) may invalidate the offered warranty. Furthermore, such changes may affect driver assistance systems, may impact fuel consumption, CO

2 emissions and other emissions of the vehicle and cause the vehicle to no longer conform to the operating permit, impacting the validity of your vehicle registration.

CAUTION

Access to the diagnostic socket associated with the on-board electronics is reserved for qualified technicians and approved tools.

219

CAUTION

When transporting the vehicle on a train or on a recovery vehicle, the mud flaps might be damaged.

Cold protection covers

In order to prevent the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan, it is recommended to install removable protection covers.

The protection covers must be professionally installed, consult a workshop.

CAUTION

The cold protection covers must be removed when one of the following conditions occurs:

● The ambient temperature is above

10 °C.

● The vehicle is towing a trailer.

● The vehicle is driven at speeds above 120 km/h / 75 mph.

Vehicle storage

Storage for a long period of time

If the vehicle is to be stored for several months:

● Wash the vehicle.

● Have the wax in the engine compartment and underbody checked.

● Clean and preserve the rubber seals.

● Fill up fuel tank completely.

● Change the engine oil.

● Drain the washer fluid reservoir.

● Check the coolant antifreeze and corrosion protection.

● Adjust tyre pressure to the value specified for full load.

1. Park the vehicle in a dry, well ventilated place. Engage first or reverse gear or set selector lever to

P. Prevent the vehicle from rolling.

2. Do not apply the parking brake.

3. Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers.

4. Wait four minutes.

5. Open the bonnet, close all doors and lock the vehicle.

6. Lift the plastic cover of the vehicle battery's positive terminal in the engine compartment.

7. Raise the lever fully and remove clamp from the terminal.

Storage for a long period of time

(electric vehicle)

If the vehicle is to be stored for several months:

● Wash and wax the vehicle.

● Have the wax in the engine compartment and underbody checked.

● Clean and preserve the rubber seals.

● Drain the washer fluid reservoir.

● Check the coolant antifreeze and corrosion protection.

● Adjust tyre pressure to the value specified for full load.

● Park the vehicle in a dry, well ventilated place. Engage first or reverse gear or set selector lever to

P. Prevent the vehicle from rolling.

● Do not apply the parking brake.

● Open the bonnet, close all doors and lock the vehicle.

Up to four weeks

Plug in the charging cable.

220

Four weeks to twelve months

● Discharge the high voltage battery until 30 percent remain on the battery range indicator (battery symbol) on the instrument cluster.

● Do not plug in the charging cable.

● Always store the vehicle in a place with temperatures between −10 °C and 30 °C.

● Vehicle storage at extreme temperatures may cause damage to the high voltage battery.

● Remove the black negative (−) cable from the 12 V vehicle battery and attach a trickle charger to the vehicle battery terminals or keep the 12 V vehicle battery cables connected and trickle charge from the positive

(+) and negative (−) terminals in the engine compartment.

● Every three months, check the battery's state of charge. If the state of charge is below 30 percent, recharge the battery to 30 percent.

Putting back into operation

When the vehicle is to be put back into operation:

1. Connect the clamp to the positive terminal of the vehicle battery in the engine compartment.

2. Initialise the power windows 3 22.

● Check tyre pressure.

● Fill up the washer fluid reservoir.

● Check the engine oil level.

● Check the coolant level.

● Fit the number plate if necessary.

Putting back into operation (electric vehicle)

When the vehicle is to be put back into operation:

● Connect the clamp to the negative terminal of the vehicle battery.

Initialise the power windows 3 22.

● Check tyre pressure.

● Fill up the washer fluid reservoir.

● Check the coolant level.

● Fit the number plate if necessary.

End-of-life vehicle recovery

Information on end-of-life vehicle recovery centres and the recycling of end-of-life vehicles is available on our website, where legally required. Only entrust this work to an authorised recycling centre.

High voltage battery

The high voltage battery is designed for the life of the vehicle if the recommendations are followed. If it becomes necessary to replace the high voltage battery, contact a workshop for instructions on its disposal. Improper disposal carries the risk of severe burns, electric shock, and damage to the environment.

Recommendations 3 226.

221

VEHICLE CHECKS

Performing work

Electric vehicle Bonnet

Opening

Open the left front door.

9 WARNING

Only perform engine compartment checks when the ignition is off.

The cooling fan may start operating even if the ignition is off.

9 DANGER

The ignition system uses extremely high voltage. Do not touch.

9 DANGER

Never try to perform maintenance work on high voltage components yourself. You may be injured and the vehicle may be damaged. Service and repair of these high voltage components should only be performed by a trained service technician with proper knowledge and tools.

Exposure to high voltage may cause shock, burns, and even death. The high voltage components in the vehicle can only be serviced by technicians with special training.

High voltage components are identified by labels. Do not remove, open, take apart, or modify these components. High voltage cable or wiring has orange covering. Do not probe, tamper with, cut, or modify high voltage cable or wiring.

CAUTION

Even small amounts of contamination to the liquids can cause damage to vehicle systems. Do not allow contaminants to contact the fluids, reservoir caps, or dipsticks.

Pull the release lever and return it to its original position.

Push the safety catch upwards and open the bonnet.

222

The maximum engine oil consumption is

0.6 l per 1000 km / 600 miles.

Check with the vehicle on a level surface.

The engine must be at operating temperature and switched off for at least

5 min.

Different dipsticks are used depending on engine variant.

Secure the bonnet support.

Closing

Before closing the bonnet, press the support into the holder.

Lower the bonnet and let it fall into the latch from a low height (20-25 cm).

Check that the bonnet is engaged.

CAUTION

Do not press the bonnet into the latch to avoid dents.

Engine oil

Check the engine oil level manually on a regular basis to prevent damage to the engine. Ensure that the correct specification of engine oil is used.

Recommended fluids and lubricants

3 266.

Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, reinsert it fully, pull out and read the engine oil level.

When the engine oil level has dropped to the MIN mark, top up the engine oil.

We recommend the use of the same grade of engine oil that was used at last change.

The engine oil level must not exceed the

MAX mark on the dipstick.

CAUTION

Overfilled engine oil must be drained or suctioned out. If the engine oil exceeds the maximum level, do not start the vehicle and contact a workshop.

Capacities 3 269.

Fit the cap on straight and tighten it.

223

Engine coolant

The factory filled coolant provides freeze protection down to approx. -37 °C.

CAUTION

Only use approved antifreeze.

Coolant and antifreeze 3 266.

Coolant level

CAUTION

Too low a coolant level can cause engine damage.

9 WARNING

Allow the engine to cool before opening the cap. Carefully open the cap, relieving the pressure slowly.

To top up, use a 1:1 mixture of released coolant concentrate mixed with clean tap water. If no coolant concentrate is available, use clean tap water. Install the cap tightly. Have the coolant concentration checked and have the cause of the coolant loss remedied by a workshop.

Washer fluid

CAUTION

Only washer fluid with a sufficient antifreeze concentration provides protection at low temperatures or a sudden drop in temperature.

Washer fluid 3 266.

Brakes

In the event of minimum thickness of the brake lining, a squealing noise sounds during braking.

Continued driving is possible but have the brake lining replaced as soon as possible.

Once new brake linings are installed, do not brake unnecessarily hard for the first few journeys.

Brake fluid

9 WARNING

Brake fluid is poisonous and corrosive.

Avoid contact with eyes, skin, fabrics and painted surfaces.

If the cooling system is cold, the coolant level should be above the MIN mark. Top up if the level is low.

Fill with clean water mixed with a suitable quantity of approved windscreen washer fluid which contains antifreeze.

The washer fluid level has to be underneath the MAX mark.

224

The brake fluid level must be between the

DANGER and MAX marks.

If fluid level is below DANGER , seek the assistance of a workshop.

Brake and clutch fluid 3 266.

Vehicle battery

The vehicle battery is maintenance-free provided that the driving profile allows sufficient charging of the battery. Shortdistance-driving and frequent engine starts can discharge the battery. Avoid the use of unnecessary electrical consumers.

Batteries do not belong in household waste. They must be disposed of at an appropriate recycling collection point.

Laying up the vehicle for more than four weeks can lead to battery discharge.

Disconnect the clamp from the negative terminal of the vehicle battery.

Ensure the ignition is switched off before connecting or disconnecting the vehicle battery.

Battery discharge protection 3 97.

Replacing the vehicle battery

Note

Any deviation from the instructions given in this section may lead to temporary deactivation or disturbance of the stop-start system.

When the vehicle battery is being replaced, please ensure that there are no open ventilation holes in the vicinity of the positive terminal. If a ventilation hole is open in this area, it must be closed off with a dummy cap, and the ventilation in the vicinity of the negative terminal must be opened.

Ensure that the battery is always replaced by the same type of battery.

The vehicle battery has to be replaced by a workshop.

Stop-start system 3 161.

Charging the vehicle battery

9 WARNING

On vehicles with stop-start system, ensure that the charging potential does not exceed 14.6 V when using a battery charger. Otherwise the vehicle battery may be damaged.

Jump starting 3 244.

Discharge protection

Battery voltage

When the vehicle battery voltage is running low, a warning message will appear in the Driver Information Centre.

When the vehicle is being driven, the load reduction function temporarily deactivates certain functions, e.g. the heated rear window.

The deactivated functions are reactivated automatically as soon as conditions permit.

Idle boost

If charging of the vehicle battery is required due to battery condition, the power output of the generator must be increased. This will be achieved by an idle boost which may be audible.

A message appears in the Driver

Information Centre.

225

Power outlet

The power outlets are deactivated in the event of low vehicle battery voltage.

Warning label

Meaning of symbols:

● No sparks, naked flames or smoking.

● Always shield eyes. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.

● Keep the vehicle battery out of reach of children.

● The vehicle battery contains sulphuric acid which could cause blindness or serious burn injuries.

● See the Owner's Manual for further information.

● Explosive gas may be present in the vicinity of the vehicle battery.

Power saving mode

This mode deactivates electrical consumers to avoid excessive discharging of the vehicle battery. These consumers, such as the infotainment system, windscreen wipers, low beam headlights, courtesy light, etc. can be used for a total maximum time of about

40 minutes after ignition is switched off.

Changing into power saving mode

When power saving mode is activated, a message appears in the Driver

Information Centre indicating Power saving mode.

An active telephone call using the handsfree option will be maintained for around

10 minutes longer.

Deactivating power saving mode

Power saving mode is deactivated automatically when the engine is restarted. Run the engine for a sufficient charge:

● for less than 10 minutes to use the consumers for approx. 5 minutes

● for more than 10 minutes to use the consumers for up to approx.

30 minutes

Heating functionalities

Note

Individual heating functionalities, such as heated seats or heated steering wheel, may be temporarily unavailable in the event of electrical loading constraints. Functions will be resumed after some minutes.

High voltage battery

To preserve the range and the durability of the high voltage battery, the following is recommended:

● Whenever possible do not charge the high voltage battery more than

80%.

● Do not completely discharge the high voltage battery.

● Do not store the vehicle for a long period of non-use (more than twelve hours) when the high voltage battery has a low or high charge level. Prefer a charge level between 20 and 40%.

● Limit the use of fast charging.

● Do not expose the vehicle to temperatures below -30 °C and above 60 °C for more than 24 hours.

● Avoid charging the vehicle at low temperatures (except if the vehicle ran more than 20 minutes) or above

30 °C.

● Do not use the high voltage battery as a generator of energy.

● Do not use a generator to recharge the high voltage battery.

226

Vehicle storage 3 220.

Leakage

Damage to the high voltage battery could result in the leakage of toxic gases or fluids either immediately or later. The following is recommended:

● Always inform the fire and emergency services in the event of an incident, that the vehicle is equipped with a high voltage battery.

● Never touch the liquids leaking from the high voltage battery.

● Do not inhale the gases emitted by the high voltage battery which are toxic.

● Move away from the vehicle in the event of incident or accident, the gases emitted being flammable and could cause a fire.

● Too low a coolant level must be topped up and the cause of the coolant loss remedied by a workshop.

Diesel fuel system bleeding

If the tank has been run dry, the diesel fuel system must be bled. Switch on the ignition three times for 15 seconds at a time. Then crank the engine for a maximum of 40 seconds. Repeat this process after no less than five seconds.

If the engine fails to start, seek the assistance of a workshop.

Wiper blade replacement

Windscreen

Switch off the ignition.

Within one minute after switching off the ignition, operate the wiper lever to positon the wiper blades vertically on the windscreen.

Lift the wiper arm until it stays in the raised position, press button to disengage the wiper blade and remove.

Attach the wiper blade to the wiper arm and push until it engages.

Lower the wiper arm carefully.

Rear window

Lift the wiper arm. Disengage the wiper blade as shown in the illustration and remove.

Attach the wiper blade slightly angled to the wiper arm and push until it engages.

Lower the wiper arm carefully.

227

BULB REPLACEMENT

Before replacing a bulb, ensure that all exterior and interior lights and the ignition are switched off. All doors have to be closed.

Only hold a new bulb at the base. Do not touch the bulb glass with bare hands.

Use only the same bulb type for replacement.

Replace headlight bulbs from within the engine compartment.

Bulb check

After a bulb replacement switch on the ignition, operate and check the lights.

Halogen headlights

Halogen headlights with separate bulbs for low beam and high beam.

High beam (2) inner bulb

Low beam (1)

1. Remove the protective cover by pulling.

3. Detach the bulb from the bulb socket and replace the bulb.

4. Insert the bulb socket into the reflector housing.

5. Fit the protective cover on.

High beam (2)

2. Withdraw the bulb socket from the reflector housing.

1. Remove the protective cover by pulling.

Low beam (1) outer bulb

228

2. Disengage the spring clip from the retainer by moving it to the righthand side. Swivel the spring clip downwards.

Withdraw the bulb socket from the reflector housing.

4. Insert the bulb socket into the reflector housing.

5. Fit the protective cover on.

Sidelight / daytime running light with bulbs

1. Rotate the bulb socket anticlockwise to disengage and withdraw from the reflector.

2. Remove the bulb from the bulb socket by pulling.

3. Replace and insert the new bulb into the bulb socket.

4. Insert the bulb socket into the light assembly and turn clockwise.

Sidelight / daytime running light with

LEDs

In case of defective LEDs, have them replaced by a workshop.

LED headlights

Daytime running lights are designed as

LEDs and can not be changed.

Have lights repaired by a workshop in case of failure.

Front fog lights

3. Detach the bulb from the bulb socket and replace the bulb.

229

1. Wrap a cloth around the tip of a flat screwdriver to prevent paint damage.

Insert the screwdriver in the recess at the edge of the cover. Release the cover by levering it out carefully.

3. Turn the bulb socket anticlockwise and remove it from the light assembly.

Front turn lights

2. Unscrew and remove the two screws and remove the light assembly to the front.

4. Disengage the plug connector by pulling the retaining lug.

5. Remove and replace the bulb unit and attach the plug connector. Note that the bulb and the socket are one unit and have to be changed together.

6. Insert the bulb socket into the light assembly by turning clockwise and engage.

7. Mount the light assembly by tightening the two screws.

8. Attach and engage the cover.

1. Rotate the bulb socket anticlockwise to disengage and withdraw from the reflector.

2. Slightly press down the bulb, turn it anticlockwise and remove it from the socket.

230

3. Replace and insert the new bulb into socket by turning clockwise.

4. Insert the bulb socket into the reflector and turn clockwise.

Tail lights

Light assembly in the body

Vehicle with tailgate

1. Unscrew and remove the two screws.

2. Carefully withdraw the tail light assembly from recess and remove.

Take care that the cable duct remains in position.

3. Detach the cable from the retainer.

5. Push the bulb slightly down, turn it and remove it from the bulb carrier.

Replace the bulb:

Rear fog light (1)

Reversing light (2)

Turn light / hazard warning flasher (3)

Tail light / brake light (4)

6. Attach the bulb carrier to the light assembly.

7. Attach the cable to the retainer.

8. Attach the light assembly to the vehicle body and tighten both screws.

4. Press the retaining lug backwards, pull the bulb carrier and disengage the remaining retaining lugs.

231

Vehicle with rear doors

1. Unscrew and remove the two screws.

4. Disengage the retaining lugs to remove the bulb carrier.

Rear fog light (4)

6. Attach the bulb carrier to the light assembly.

7. Attach the cable to the retainer.

8. Attach the light assembly to the vehicle body and tighten both screws.

3rd-brake light

The 3rd-brake light is designed as LED and can not be changed.

Have lights repaired by a workshop in case of failure.

Bulb check

Switch on the ignition, operate and check all lights.

Side turn lights

To replace the bulb, remove the lamp housing:

2. Carefully withdraw the tail light assembly from recess and remove.

Take care that the cable duct remains in position.

3. Detach the cable from the retainer.

5. Push the bulb slightly down, turn it and remove it from the bulb carrier.

Replace the bulb:

Tail light / brake light (1)

Turn light / hazard warning flasher (2) outer bulb

Reversing light (3) inner bulb

232

1. Slide the lamp housing forward and remove it at the back.

Number plate light

2. Press the retaining lug upwards and remove the bulb socket from the plug connector.

3. Replace the complete unit.

4. Insert left end of the lamp, slide to the left and insert right end.

1. Insert a screwdriver in the recess of the cover and remove it.

2. Pull the bulb from the bulb holder and replace it.

3. Attach the cover.

Interior lights

Have the following bulbs replaced by a workshop:

● courtesy light, reading lights

● load compartment light

● instrument panel illumination

233

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Fuses

CAUTION

Fuse replacement

All work may be performed only by a Fiat

Dealership or a qualified repair workshop.

The replacement of a fuse by a third party may cause a serious car fault.

CAUTION

Installation of electrical accessories

The car’s electrical circuitis are designed to function with standard or optional equipment. Before installing other electrical equipment or accessories in the vehicle, contact a Fiat dealership or a qualified repair workshop.

Note

FCA shall not be held liable for expenses resulting from car repair or anomalies resulting from the installation of accessories not provided or recommended by Fiat and not installed according to specifications, in particular when the combined consumption of all additional equipment connected exceeds 10 mA.

VEHICLE TOOLS

Tools

Vehicles with spare wheel

Open the cover of the footwell storage

3 49.

The jack is located in the stowage compartment underneath the right front seat.

Vehicles without spare wheel

The towing eye and the tools are located in the stowage compartment underneath the left front seat.

The towing eye and the tools are located in the stowage compartment underneath the right front seat.

Tyre repair kit 3 238.

234

WHEELS AND TYRES

Tyre condition, wheel condition

Drive over edges slowly and at right angles if possible. Driving over sharp edges can cause tyre and wheel damage. Do not trap tyres on the kerb when parking.

Regularly check the wheels for damage.

Seek the assistance of a workshop in the event of damage or unusual wear.

Winter tyres

Winter tyres improve driving safety at temperatures below 7 °C and should therefore be fitted on all wheels.

In accordance with country-specific regulations, affix the speed sticker in the driver's field of view, if the tyre speed code is below the maximum speed of the vehicle.

All tyre sizes are permitted as winter tyres

3 272.

Tyre designations

E.g. 225/55 R 18 98 V

225 : tyre width, mm

55 : cross-section ratio (tyre height to tyre width), %

R : belt type: Radial

RF : type: RunFlat

18 : wheel diameter, inches

98 : load index e.g. 98 is equivalent to

750 kg

V : speed code letter

Speed code letter:

Q : up to 160 km/h

S : up to 180 km/h / 112 mph

T : up to 190 km/h / 118 mph

H : up to 210 km/h / 130 mph

V : up to 240 km/h / 150 mph

W : up to 270 km/h / 168 mph

Choose a tyre appropriate for the maximum speed of your vehicle. Refer to the EEC Certificate of Conformity provided with your vehicle or other national registration documents.

Optional equipment could reduce the maximum speed of the vehicle.

Directional tyres

Directional tyres should be mounted so that they rotate in the correct direction.

The proper rotation direction is indicated by a symbol (e.g. an arrow) on the sidewall.

Tyre pressure

Check the pressure of cold tyres at least every 14 days and before any long journey. Do not forget the spare wheel.

This also applies to vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system.

Tyre pressure 3 272.

The tyre pressure information label on the left door frame indicates the original equipment tyres and the correspondent tyre pressures.

The tyre pressure data refers to cold tyres. It applies to summer and winter tyres.

Always inflate the spare tyre to the pressure specified for full load.

Incorrect tyre pressures will impair safety, vehicle handling, comfort and fuel economy and will increase tyre wear.

Tyre pressures differ depending on various options. For the correct tyre pressure value, follow the procedure below:

1. Depending on the vehicle variant, i.e.

cargo or passenger vehicle, identify the payload 3 272.

2. Identify the respective tyre.

235

The tyre pressure tables show all possible tyre combinations 3 272.

For the tyres approved for your vehicle, refer to the EEC Certificate of Conformity provided with your vehicle or other national registration documents.

The driver is responsible for correct adjustment of tyre pressure.

9 WARNING

If the pressure is too low, this can result in considerable tyre warm-up and internal damage, leading to tread separation and even to tyre blow-out at high speeds.

9 WARNING

For specific tyres the recommended tyre pressure as shown in the tyre pressure table may exceed the maximum tyre pressure as indicated on the tyre. Never exceed the maximum tyre pressure as indicated on the tyre.

Temperature dependency

The tyre pressure depends on the temperature of the tyre. During driving, tyre temperature and pressure increase.

Tyre pressure values provided on the tyre pressure information label and tyre pressure chart are valid for cold tyres, which means at 20 °C.

The pressure increases by nearly

10 kPa / 1.5 psi for a 10 °C temperature increase. This must be considered when warm tyres are checked.

Tyre deflation detection system

The tyre deflation detection system continually checks the rotation speed of all four wheels and warns on low tyre pressure condition once vehicle is driving. This is achieved by comparing tyre rolling circumference with reference values and further signals.

If a tyre loses pressure the control indicator w illuminates, a warning chime is given and a warning message is displayed in the Driver Information

Centre.

In this case reduce speed, avoid sharp cornering and strong braking. Stop at next safe opportunity and check tyre pressure.

Control indicator w 3 79.

After adjusting tyre pressure initialise system to extinguish the control indicator and restart system.

CAUTION

Deflation detection system warns just about low tyre pressure condition and does not replace regular tyre maintenance by the driver.

236

In case of a system malfunction a message is displayed in the Driver

Information Centre. Set correct tyre pressure and reinitialise system. If the failure continues to be displayed, contact a workshop. The system is inoperable when ABS or ESC has a malfunction or a temporary spare wheel is used. Once the road tyre has been refitted, check the tyre pressure with cold tyres and initialise the system.

System initialisation

After tyre pressure correction or wheel change, the system must be initialised to learn new circumference reference values:

1. Always ensure that all four tyres have correct tyre pressure 3 272.

2. Apply parking brake.

3. Initialise the deflation detection system: If the vehicle has a graphic info display, press F for three seconds. If the vehicle has a colour info display, the initialisation is done in the vehicle personalisation 3 89.

4. Reset is confirmed by pop-up indication.

After initialisation system automatically calibrates to new tyre pressures during driving. After longer drive the system will adopt and monitor new pressures.

Always check tyre pressure with cold tyres.

System has to be reinitialised when:

● Tyre pressure has been changed

● Load condition has been changed

● Wheels have been swapped or exchanged

The system will not warn instantaneously on a tyre blow out or a rapid deflation.

This is due to required calculation time.

Tread depth

Check tread depth at regular intervals.

For safety reasons, it is recommended that the tread depth of the tyres on one axle should not vary by more than

2 mm.

The legally permissible minimum tread depth (1.6 mm) has been reached when the tread has worn down as far as one of the tread wear indicators (TWI). Their position is indicated by markings on the sidewall.

If there is more wear at the front than the rear, swap round front wheels and rear wheels periodically. Ensure that the direction of rotation of the wheels remains the same.

Tyres age, even if they are not used. We recommend tyre replacement every six years.

Changing tyre and wheel size

If tyres of a different size than those fitted at the factory are used, it may be necessary to reprogramme systems and make other vehicle modifications.

Have the label with tyre pressures replaced.

9 WARNING

The use of unsuitable tyres or wheels may lead to accidents and will invalidate the vehicle operating permit.

Wheel covers

Wheel covers and tyres that are factory approved for the respective vehicle and comply with all of the relevant wheel and tyre combination requirements must be used.

If the wheel covers and tyres used are not factory approved, the tyres must not have a rim protection ridge.

Wheel covers must not impair brake cooling.

9 WARNING

Use of unsuitable tyres or wheel covers could lead to sudden pressure loss and thereby accidents.

Vehicles with steel wheels: When using locking wheel nuts, do not attach wheel covers.

237

Tyre chains

Tyre chains are only permitted on the front wheels.

Always use fine mesh chains that add no more than 9 mm to the tyre tread and the inboard sides (including chain lock).

9 WARNING

Damage may lead to tyre blowout.

Tyre chains are permitted on all tyres sizes allowed for the vehicle.

Temporary spare wheel

The use of tyre chains is not permitted on the temporary spare wheel.

Tyre repair kit

Minor damage to the tyre tread can be repaired with the tyre repair kit.

238

Do not remove foreign bodies from the tyres.

Tyre damage exceeding 4 mm or that is at tyre's sidewall cannot be repaired with the tyre repair kit.

Depending on version, there are two different tyre repair kits (Type A and Type

B).

9 WARNING

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h /

50 mph.

Do not use for a lengthy period.

Steering and handling may be affected.

In the case of a flat tyre:

Apply the parking brake and engage first gear, reverse gear or P.

Type A

Type B

The tyre repair kit is in the storage compartment underneath the front seat.

1. Remove the sealant bottle and the compressor.

2. Pull speed limit label from sealant bottle and place it in driver's visible area.

3. Remove the electrical connection cable (1) and air hose (2) from the stowage compartments on the underside of the compressor.

9. Screw the filler hose to the tyre valve.

10. The switch on the compressor must be set to J .

11. Connect the compressor plug to the

12 V power outlet or cigarette lighter socket.

To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, we recommend running the engine.

4. Type A: Open sealant bottle and lift the lid.

5. Type A: First, insert sealant bottle into the compresor and align the triangle symbols. Then, push down sealant bottle and turn it to the lock position.

Type B: Screw the compressor air hose to the connection on the sealant bottle.

6. Type B: Fit the sealant bottle into the bracket on the compressor.

7. Set the compressor near the tyre in such a way that the sealant bottle is upright.

8. Unscrew valve cap from defective tyre.

12. Set the rocker switch on the compressor to I. The tyre is filled with sealant.

13. The compressor pressure gauge briefly indicates up to

600 kPa (6 bar) whilst the sealant bottle is emptying (approx.

30 seconds). Then the pressure starts to drop.

14. All of the sealant is pumped into the tyre. Then the tyre is being inflated.

239

15. The prescribed tyre pressure should be obtained within ten minutes.

When the correct pressure is obtained, switch off the compressor.

If the prescribed tyre pressure is not obtained within ten minutes, remove the tyre repair kit. Move the vehicle one tyre rotation. Reattach the tyre repair kit and continue the filling procedure for ten minutes. If the prescribed tyre pressure is still not obtained, the tyre is too badly damaged. Seek the assistance of a workshop.

prevents sealant from escaping.

Stow tyre repair kit in load compartment.

17. Remove any excess sealant using a cloth.

18. Continue driving immediately so that sealant is evenly distributed in the tyre. Drive between 20 km/h /

13 mph and 60 km/h / 37 mph. After driving approx. 5 km / 3 miles but no more than ten minutes, stop and check tyre pressure. Screw compressor air hose directly onto tyre valve when doing this. Fill tyre as described before. Drain excess tyre pressure with the button on the air hose.

If tyre pressure hasn't decreased under 200 kPa (2 bar), set it to the correct value. Otherwise the vehicle must not be used. Seek assistance of a workshop.

Repeat the checking procedure once more after driving further 10 km /

6 miles but no more than ten minutes to check that there is no more loss of pressure.

If the tyre pressure has fallen below

200 kPa (2 bar), the vehicle must not be used. Seek the assistance of a workshop.

19. Stow away tyre repair kit in load compartment.

Tyre pressure 3 272.

240

Drain excess tyre pressure with the button on the air hose.

Do not run the compressor longer than ten minutes.

16. Detach the tyre repair kit. Remove sealant bottle from compressor.

Screw the filler hose to the free connection of the sealant bottle. This

Note

The driving characteristics of the repaired tyre are severely affected, therefore have this tyre replaced.

If unusual noise is heard or the compressor becomes hot, turn compressor off for at least

30 minutes.

The built-in safety valve opens at a pressure of 700 kPa / 7 bar / 102 psi.

Note the expiry date of the kit. After this date its sealing capability is no longer guaranteed.

Pay attention to storage information on sealant bottle.

Replace the used sealant bottle. Dispose of the bottle as prescribed by applicable laws.

The compressor and sealant can be used from approx. -30 °C.

Wheel changing

Make the following preparations and observe the following information:

● Park the vehicle on a level, firm and non-skid surface. The front wheels must be in the straight-ahead position.

● Apply the parking brake and engage first gear, reverse gear or P.

● Place a chock under the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed.

● If the ground on which the vehicle is standing is soft, a solid board

(approx. 1 cm thick) should be placed under the jack.

● Take heavy objects out of the vehicle before jacking up.

● No people or animals may be in the vehicle when it is jacked-up.

● Never crawl under a jacked-up vehicle.

● Do not start the vehicle when it is raised on the jack.

● Before screwing in the wheel bolts, clean them.

9 WARNING

Do not grease wheel bolts.

Tightening torques

9 WARNING

Ensure to use always the correct wheel bolts if changing the wheels. When installing the spare wheel for temporary usage, the bolts for alloy wheel rims can also be used.

CAUTION

If the vehicle is equipped with alloy wheel rims, tighten the wheel bolts manually at least for the first five turns.

Depending on the wheel rim material, two different bolts are available.

Tightening torque for alloy wheel rims is

100 Nm.

Tightening torque for steel wheel rims is

115 Nm.

Use the correct wheel bolts for the respective wheel rims.

Jacking positions

The jacking positions shown refer to the use of lifting arms and accessory jacks used for changing winter / summer tyres.

The rear arm position of the lifting platform is centrically under the relevant vehicle jacking point.

The front arm position of the lifting platform is centrically under the relevant vehicle jacking point.

241

Spare wheel

The spare wheel can be classified as a temporary spare wheel depending on the size compared to the other mounted wheels and country regulations. In this case a permissible maximum speed applies, even though no label at the spare wheel indicates this.

Only mount one temporary spare wheel.

Do not drive faster than 80 km/h /

50 mph. Take curves slowly. Do not use for a long period of time.

CAUTION

The use of a spare wheel that is smaller than the other wheels or in combination with winter tyres could affect driveability.

Have the defective tyre replaced as soon as possible.

The spare wheel is located in a holder beneath the vehicle floor.

Vehicle tools 3 234.

1. Depending on the version, open the tailgate or the rear doors.

2. Fit the wheel wrench on one hexagon bolt. Turn it anticlockwise until the spare wheel holder is low enough allow the catch to be unhooked.

3. Lift the spare wheel holder and unhook the catch.

Lower the spare wheel holder.

4. Remove the spare wheel.

5. Change the wheel.

6. Position the damaged wheel with the outside down in the spare wheel holder.

7. Lift the spare wheel holder and engage in the catch. The open side of the catch must point in the direction of travel.

8. Close the spare wheel holder by turning the hexagon bolt clockwise using the wheel wrench.

9. Stow wheel wrench in the storage.

10. Close the tailgate or the rear doors.

Only mount one temporary spare wheel.

The permissible maximum speed on the label on the temporary spare wheel is only valid for the factory-fitted tyre size.

242

Fitting the spare wheel

Make the following preparations and observe the following information:

● Park the vehicle on a level, firm and non-skid surface. The front wheels must be in the straight-ahead position.

● Apply the parking brake and engage first gear, reverse gear or P.

● Place a chock under the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed.

● Remove the spare wheel.

● Never change more than one wheel at once.

● Use the jack only to change wheels in case of puncture, not for seasonal winter or summer tyre change.

● The jack is maintenance-free.

● If the ground on which the vehicle is standing is soft, a solid board

(approx. 1 cm thick) should be placed under the jack.

● Take heavy objects out of the vehicle before jacking up.

● No people or animals may be in the vehicle when it is jacked-up.

● Never crawl under a jacked-up vehicle.

● Do not start the vehicle when it is raised on the jack.

● Before screwing in the wheel bolts, clean them.

9 WARNING

Do not grease wheel bolts.

9 WARNING

Ensure to use always the correct wheel bolts if changing the wheels. When installing the spare wheel for temporary usage, the bolts for alloy wheel rims can also be used.

● Note that the spare wheel is secured by the conical contact of each bolt if the wheel bolts for the alloy wheel rims are used. In this case, the washers do not come into contact with the spare wheel.

1. Disengage wheel bolt caps with the wheel bolt cover remover.

Steel wheel rims with cover: Pull off the wheel cover.

2. Attach the wheel wrench and loosen each wheel bolt by half a turn.

The wheels might be protected by locking wheel nuts. To loosen these specific nuts first attach the adapter onto the head of the nut before installing the wheel wrench. The adapter is located in the tool box.

243

3. Ensure the jack is correctly positioned under the relevant vehicle jacking point.

4. Set the jack to the necessary height.

Position it directly below the jacking point in a manner that prevents it from slipping.

Ensure that the edge of the body fits into the notch of the jack.

With the jack correctly aligned rotate wheel wrench until wheel is clear of the ground.

5. Unscrew the wheel nuts.

6. Change the wheel.

7. Screw on the wheel nuts.

8. Lower the vehicle and remove jack.

9. Install the wheel wrench ensuring that it is located securely and tighten each bolt in a crosswise sequence.

Tightening torque is 115 Nm.

10. Align the valve hole in the wheel cover with the tyre valve before installing.

Install wheel nut caps.

11. Stow the replaced wheel, the vehicle tools and the adapter for the locking wheel nuts.

12. Check the tyre pressure of the installed tyre and the wheel nut torque as soon as possible.

244

JUMP STARTING

Do not start with quick charger.

A vehicle with a discharged vehicle battery can be started using jump leads and the vehicle battery of another vehicle.

CAUTION

Never jump start another vehicle with an electric vehicle.

9 WARNING

Be extremely careful when starting with jump leads. Any deviation from the following instructions can lead to injuries or damage caused by battery explosion or damage to the electrical systems of both vehicles.

9 WARNING

Avoid contact of the battery with eyes, skin, fabrics and painted surfaces. The fluid contains sulphuric acid which can cause injuries and damage in the event of direct contact.

● Never expose the vehicle battery to naked flames or sparks.

● A discharged vehicle battery can already freeze at a temperature of

0 °C. Defrost the frozen battery before connecting jump leads.

● Wear eye protection and protective clothing when handling a battery.

● Use a booster battery with the same voltage (12 V). Its capacity (Ah) must not be much less than that of the discharged vehicle battery.

● Use jump leads with insulated terminals and a cross section of at least 16 mm 2 (25 mm 2 for diesel engines).

● Do not disconnect the discharged vehicle battery from the vehicle.

● Switch off all unnecessary electrical consumers.

● Do not lean over the vehicle battery during jump starting.

● Do not allow the terminals of one lead to touch those of the other lead.

● The vehicles must not come into contact with each other during the jump starting process.

● Apply the parking brake, transmission in neutral, automatic transmission in P.

Open the positive terminal protection caps of both vehicle batteries.

Lead connection order:

1. Connect the red lead to the positive terminal of the booster battery.

2. Connect the other end of the red lead to the positive terminal of the discharged battery.

3. Connect the black lead to the negative terminal of the booster battery.

4. Connect the other end of the black lead to a vehicle grounding point of your vehicle in the engine compartment.

Route the leads so that they cannot catch on rotating parts in the engine compartment.

To start the engine:

1. Start the engine of the vehicle providing the jump.

2. After five minutes, start the other engine. Start attempts should be made for no longer than 15 s at an interval of 1 min.

3. Allow both engines to idle for approx.

three minutes with the leads connected.

4. Switch on electrical consumers e.g.

headlights, heated rear window of the vehicle receiving the jump start.

5. Reverse above sequence exactly when removing leads.

245

TOWING

Towing the vehicle

Wrap a cloth around the tip of a flat screwdriver to prevent paint damage.

Insert the screwdriver in the slot at the lower part of the cap. Release the cap carefully.

The towing eye is stowed with the vehicle tools 3 234.

Screw in the towing eye as far as it will go until it stops in a horizontal position.

Attach a tow rope – or better still a tow rod – to the towing eye.

The towing eye must only be used for towing and not for recovering the vehicle.

Switch on ignition to release steering wheel lock and to permit operation of brake lights, horn and windscreen wiper.

CAUTION

Deactivate the driver assistance systems like active emergency braking 3 189, otherwise the vehicle may automatically brake during towing.

Switch the selector lever to neutral.

Release the parking brake.

CAUTION

Never tow a vehicle equipped with All

Wheel Drive (AWD) with the front or rear tyres on the road. If you tow a vehicle equipped with AWD while the front or rear tyres are rolling on the road, the drive system in the vehicle could be severely damaged. When towing vehicles equipped with AWD, all four tyres must not be in contact with the road.

CAUTION

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive tractive force can damage the vehicle.

When the engine is not running, considerably more force is needed to brake and steer.

To prevent the entry of exhaust gases from the towing vehicle, switch on the air recirculation and close the windows.

When towing an electric vehicle or a vehicle equipped with an automatic transmission, transport the vehicle on a platform or tow it with the front wheels lifted.

Seek the assistance of a workshop.

After towing, unscrew the towing eye.

Insert cap with the flange into the recess and fix cap by pushing.

246

Towing another vehicle

Wrap a cloth around the tip of a flat screwdriver to prevent paint damage.

Insert the screwdriver in the slot at the lower part of the cap. Release the cap carefully.

The towing eye is stowed with the vehicle tools 3 234.

Screw in the towing eye as far as it will go until it stops in a horizontal position.

The lashing eye at the rear underneath the vehicle must never be used as a towing eye.

Attach a tow rope – or better still a tow rod – to the towing eye.

The towing eye must only be used for towing and not for recovering a vehicle.

CAUTION

Drive slowly. Do not drive jerkily. Excessive tractive force can damage the vehicle.

After towing, unscrew the towing eye.

Insert cap with the upper flange into the recess and fix cap by pushing.

APPEARANCE CARE

Exterior care

Locks

The locks are lubricated at the factory using a high quality lock cylinder grease.

Use a de-icing agent only when absolutely necessary, as this has a degreasing effect and impairs lock function. After using a de-icing agent, have the locks regreased by a workshop.

Washing

The paintwork of your vehicle is exposed to environmental influences.

Bird droppings, dead insects, resin, pollen and the like should be cleaned off immediately, as they contain aggressive constituents which can cause paint damage.

If using a vehicle wash, comply with the vehicle wash manufacturer's instructions. The windscreen wiper and rear window wiper must be switched off.

Remove antenna and external accessories such as roof racks etc.

If you wash your vehicle by hand, make sure that the insides of the wheel housings are also thoroughly rinsed out.

Wax painted parts of the vehicle regularly.

247

Clean edges and folds on opened doors and the bonnet as well as the areas they cover.

Clean bright metal mouldings with a cleaning solution approved for aluminium to avoid damages.

CAUTION

Always use a cleaning agent with a pH value of 4 to 9.

Do not use cleaning agents on hot surfaces.

Do not clean the engine compartment with a steam-jet or high-pressure jet cleaner.

Thoroughly rinse and leather-off the vehicle. Rinse leather frequently. Use separate leathers for painted and glass surfaces: remnants of wax on the windows will impair vision.

Have the door hinges of all doors greased by a workshop.

Exterior lights

Headlight and other light covers are made of plastic. Do not use any abrasive or caustic agents, do not use an ice scraper, and do not clean them dry.

Polishing and waxing

Polishing is necessary only if the paint has become dull or if solid deposits have become attached to it.

248

Plastic body parts must not be treated with wax or polishing agents.

Windows and wiper blades

Switch off wipers before handling in their areas.

Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather together with window cleaner and insect remover.

When cleaning the rear window from inside, always wipe in parallel to the heating element to prevent damage.

For mechanical removal of ice, use a sharp-edged ice scraper. Press the scraper firmly against the glass so that no dirt can get under it and scratch the glass.

Clean smearing wiper blades with a soft cloth and window cleaner. Also make sure to remove any residues such as wax, insect residues and similar from the window.

Ice residues, pollution and continuous wiping on dry windows will damage or even destroy the wiper blades.

Glass panel

Use a soft lint-free cloth or chamois leather together with window cleaner to clean the glass panel.

Wheels and tyres

Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.

Clean rims with a pH-neutral wheel cleaner.

Rims are painted and can be treated with the same agents as the body.

Paintwork damage

Rectify minor paintwork damage with a touch-up pen before rust forms. Have more extensive damage or rust areas repaired by a workshop.

Underbody

Some areas of the vehicle underbody have a PVC undercoating while other critical areas have a durable protective wax coating.

After the underbody is washed, check the underbody and have it waxed if necessary.

Bitumen / rubber materials could damage the PVC coating. Have underbody work carried out by a workshop.

Before and after winter, wash the underbody and have the protective wax coating checked.

Liquid gas system

9 DANGER

Liquid gas is heavier than air and can collect in sink points.

Take care when performing work at the underbody in a pit.

For painting work and when using a drying booth at a temperature above

60 °C, the liquid gas tank must be removed.

Do not make any modifications to the liquid gas system.

Towing equipment

Do not clean the coupling ball bar with a steam-jet or high-pressure jet cleaner.

Interior care

Interior and upholstery

Only clean the vehicle interior, including the instrument panel fascia and panelling, with a dry cloth or interior cleaner.

Clean the leather upholstery with clear water and a soft cloth. In case of heavy soiling, use leather care.

The instrument cluster and the displays should only be cleaned using a soft damp cloth. If necessary use a weak soap solution.

Clean fabric upholstery with a vacuum cleaner and brush. Remove stains with an upholstery cleaner.

Clothing fabrics may not be colourfast.

This could cause visible discolourations, especially on light-coloured upholstery.

Removable stains and discolourations should be cleaned as soon as possible.

Clean seat belts with lukewarm water or interior cleaner.

CAUTION

Close Velcro fasteners as open Velcro fasteners on clothing could damage seat upholstery.

The same applies to clothing with sharpedged objects, like zips or belts or studded jeans.

Plastic and rubber parts

Plastic and rubber parts can be cleaned with the same cleaner as used to clean the body. Use interior cleaner if necessary. Do not use any other agent.

Avoid solvents and petrol in particular. Do not use high-pressure jet cleaners.

Floor mats

9 WARNING

If a floor mat has the wrong size or is not properly installed, it can interfere with pedals, what can cause unintended acceleration or increased stopping distance which can cause a crash and injury.

Use the following guidelines for proper floor mat usage.

● The original equipment floor mats were designed for this vehicle. If the floor mats need to be replaced, it is recommended to buy certified floor mats which fit properly and are fixed by the retainers on the driver side.

Always check that the floor mats do not interfere with the pedals.

● Use the floor mat with the correct side up. Do not turn it over.

● Do not place anything on top of the driver side floor mat.

● Use only a single floor mat on the driver side.

Inserting and removing the floor mats

The driver side floor mat is held in place by two retainers.

249

To install the floor mat:

1. Move the seat backwards as far as possible.

2. Align slots in the mat with the retainers, as shown.

3. Push the mat to the floor.

Removing

1. Move the seat backwards as far as possible.

2. Remove the mat.

250

SERVICE AND

MAINTENANCE

General information ........................ 251

Service information ...................... 251

Scheduled maintenance ................. 252

Service schedules ........................ 252

Recommended fluids, lubricants and parts ....................................... 266

Recommended fluids and lubricants .................................... 266

GENERAL INFORMATION

Service information

In order to ensure economical and safe vehicle operation and to maintain the value of your vehicle, it is of vital importance that all maintenance work is carried out at the proper intervals as specified.

The detailed, up-to-date service schedule for your vehicle is available at the workshop.

Severe operating conditions exist if one or more of the following circumstances occur frequently: Cold starting, stop and go operation, e.g. for taxis and police vehicles, trailer operation, mountain driving, driving on poor and sandy road surfaces, increased air pollution, presence of airborne sand and high dust content, driving at high altitude and large variations of temperature.

Under these severe operating conditions, certain service work may be required more frequently than the regular service interval indicated in the service display.

Contact a workshop for customised service schedules.

Service display 3 73.

Confirmations

Confirmation of service is recorded in the

Service and warranty booklet. The date and mileage is completed with the stamp and signature of the servicing workshop.

Make sure that the Service and warranty booklet is completed correctly as continuous proof of service is essential if any warranty or goodwill claims are to be met, and is also a benefit when selling the vehicle.

251

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

Service schedules

1.2 petrol engine

#

Thousands of miles

Thousands of kilometres

Years

1

2

Check (low voltage, ancillaries, remote control, telematic box module, etc.) batteries condition

Check tyre condition / wear (including the spare wheel) and, if necessary, adjust pressure; check the expiry date of the tyre repair kit

3

Check condition and operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glovebox, warning lights, etc.)

4 Check horn

5

Check operation of the windscreen wiper / washer system and adjust nozzles, if necessary

6 Check windscreen / rear window wiper blade position and wear

7

Check cleanliness of bonnet and load compartment locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5

75 87.5 100 112.5 125 137.5 150

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

252

#

Thousands of miles

Thousands of kilometres

Years

8

9

Check the conditon of exterior bodywork, the fixing of under-body protectors, the sealing of rubber elements (gaiters, sleeves, bushes, etc.), hoses and pipes (exhaust line, fuel system, brakes, radiator, engine, gearbox) and their housings

Check condition of front brake calipers, discs, pads and operation of pad wear indicator

10

Check condition of rear brake calipers, discs, pads and operation of pad wear indicator

11 Check front and rear brake pad wear with removed wheels

12 Check dampers sealing

13 Check brake pedal

14

Check clutch travel and adjust if necessary or check the condition of the automatic wear compensation device

15 Check parking brake lever travel and adjust, if necessary

16

Check and, if necessary, top up engine compartment fluid levels

(engine coolant, high voltage battery coolant, brakes, windscreen washer fluid, etc.) 1)

17 Check pH value of engine coolant

18 Replace engine coolant

12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5

75 87.5 100 112.5 125 137.5 150

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

2)

3)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

●

●

253

#

Thousands of miles

Thousands of kilometres

Years

19 Road test

20 Auto diagnostic memories reading check

21 Check the condition and tensioning of the ancillaries drive belt(s)

22 Check the timing belt width

23 Check cleanliness of sliding side door lower guides

24 Check of the air filter clogging

25 Replacement of fuel filter

26 Replacement of ancillaries drive belt

27 Replacement of ancillaries drive belt kit

28 Replacement of timing belt and coolant pump belt

29 Replacement of timing kit and coolant pump belt

30 Replacement of air filter

31 Change engine oil and replace oil filter 10)

32 Change the brake fluid

33 Replacement of passenger compartment filter 10)

12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5

75 87.5 100 112.5 125 137.5 150

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

4)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

5)

8)

7)

6)

7)

8)

9)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

11)

● ● ● ● ● ●

254

#

Thousands of miles

Thousands of kilometres

Years

34 Service indicator reinitialisation

12.5 25 37.5 50 62.5

75 87.5 100 112.5 125 137.5 150

20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

6)

7)

8)

9)

10)

11)

Only ever use the fluids shown in the Owner's Manual for topping up, and only after checking that the system is intact.

after 120,000 km / 4 years and then every service when pH<6.3 or every 180,000 km / 10 years; in case of usage in arduous conditions: every 165,000 km / 10 years; in case of usage out of

Europe: every 160,000 km / 10 years recommended any time, static checks are not enough to identify vehicle issue(s) outside Europe: after 10,000 km and then every 20,000 km outside Europe: every 40,000 km after 100,000 km / 6 years and then every 200,000 km / 12 years; with arduous conditions or outside Europe: after 90,000 km / 6 years and then every 180,000 km / 12 years every 200,000 km / 12 years; with arduous conditions or outside Europe: every 180,000 km / 12 years every 40,000 km / 4 years; with arduous conditions: every 30,000 km / 4 years; outside Europe: every 20,000 km / 4 years with arduous conditions in Europe: every year / 15,000 km; with arduous conditions outside Europe: every year / 10,000 km every 2 years

Service intervals with arduous conditions in Europe: every year / 15,000 km; with arduous conditions outside Europe: every year /

10,000 km

255

1.5 diesel engine

#

Thousands of miles

Thousands of kilometres

Years

1 Check (low voltage, ancillaries, remote control, telematic box module, etc.) batteries condition

2

3

Check tyre condition / wear (including the spare wheel) and, if necessary, adjust pressure; check the expiry date of the tyre repair kit

Check condition and operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glovebox, warning lights, etc.)

4 Check horn

5 Check operation of the windscreen wiper / washer system and adjust nozzles, if necessary

6 Check windscreen / rear window wiper blade position and wear

7 Check cleanliness of bonnet and load compartment locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

8

Check the conditon of exterior bodywork, the fixing of under-body protectors, the sealing of rubber elements

(gaiters, sleeves, bushes, etc.), hoses and pipes (exhaust line, fuel system, brakes, radiator, engine, gearbox) and their housings

9 Check condition of front brake calipers, discs, pads and operation of pad wear indicator

10 Check condition of rear brake calipers, discs, pads and operation of pad wear indicator

11 Check front and rear brake pad wear with removed wheels

12 Check dampers sealing

25 50 75 100 125 150

40 80 120 160 200 240

2 4 6 8 10 12

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ●

● ●

● ●

● ●

● ●

● ●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

256

#

Thousands of miles

Thousands of kilometres

Years

13 Check brake pedal

14 Check clutch travel and adjust if necessary or check the condition of the automatic wear compensation device

15 Check parking brake lever travel and adjust, if necessary

16

Check and, if necessary, top up engine compartment fluid levels (engine coolant, high voltage battery coolant, brakes, windscreen washer fluid, etc.) 12)

17 Check pH value of engine coolant

18 Replace engine coolant

19 Road test

20 Auto diagnostic memories reading check

21 Check the condition and tensioning of the ancillaries drive belt(s)

22 Check cleanliness of sliding side door lower guides

23 Check of the clogging of the exhaust filter 16)

24 Check and bleed fuel filter if necessary

25 Replacement of fuel filter

26 Replacement of ancillaries drive belt

25 50 75 100 125 150

40 80 120 160 200 240

2 4 6 8 10 12

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

13)

14)

15)

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

17)

18)

● ● ●

257

#

Thousands of miles

Thousands of kilometres

Years

27 Replacement of ancillaries drive belt kit

28 Replacement of timing belt

29 Replacement of timing kit and coolant pump belt

30 Replacement of air filter

31 Change engine oil and replace oil filter 22)

32 Change the brake fluid

33 Replacement of passenger compartment filter 22)

34 Service indicator reinitialisation

25 50 75 100 125 150

40 80 120 160 200 240

2 4 6 8 10 12

● ● ●

19)

20)

19)

21)

23)

● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

12)

13)

14)

15)

16)

17)

18)

19)

20)

21)

22)

23)

Only ever use the fluids shown in the Owner's Manual for topping up, and only after checking that the system is intact.

after 120,000 km / 4 years and then every service when pH<6.3

recommended any time, static checks are not enough to identify vehicle issue(s) with arduous conditions in Europe: after 180,000 km and then every 20,000 km; outside Europe: after 180,000 km and then every 10,000 km every 40,000 km / 4 years; outside Europe: every 20,000 km / 4 years every 120,000 km / 6 years; outside Europe with dusty conditions: every 90,000 km / 5 years every 200,000 km / 10 years; with arduous conditions: every 180,000 km / 10 years; outside Europe: every 160,000 km / 10 years; nordic countries: every 5 years outside Europe with dusty conditions: every 80,000 km / 5 years every 40,000 km / 4 years; with arduous conditions: every 30,000 km / 4 years; outside Europe: every 10,000 km / 4 years with arduous conditions in Europe: every year / 15,000 km; outside Europe: every year / 10,000 km every 2 years

258

Service intervals with arduous conditions in Europe: every year / 15,000 km; with arduous conditions outside Europe: every year /

10,000 km

1.6 diesel engine

#

1

Thousands of miles

Thousands of kilometres

Years

Check (low voltage, ancillaries, remote control, telematic box module, etc.) batteries condition

2

3

Check tyre condition / wear (including the spare wheel) and, if necessary, adjust pressure; check the expiry date of the tyre repair kit

Check condition and operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glovebox, warning lights, etc.)

4 Check horn

5

Check operation of the windscreen wiper / washer system and adjust nozzles, if necessary

6 Check windscreen / rear window wiper blade position and wear

7

8

Check cleanliness of bonnet and load compartment locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

Check the conditon of exterior bodywork, the fixing of under-body protectors, the sealing of rubber elements (gaiters, sleeves, bushes, etc.), hoses and pipes (exhaust line, fuel system, brakes, radiator, engine, gearbox) and their housings

16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192

25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

●

● ● ●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

259

#

Thousands of miles

Thousands of kilometres

Years

9

10

Check condition of front brake calipers, discs, pads and operation of pad wear indicator

Check condition of rear brake calipers, discs, pads and operation of pad wear indicator

11 Check front and rear brake pad wear with removed wheels

12 Check dampers sealing

13 Check brake pedal

14

Check clutch travel and adjust if necessary or check the condition of the automatic wear compensation device

15 Check parking brake lever travel and adjust, if necessary

16

Check and, if necessary, top up engine compartment fluid levels (engine coolant, high voltage battery coolant, brakes, windscreen washer fluid, etc.)

24)

17 Check pH value of engine coolant

18 Replace engine coolant

19 Road test

20 Auto diagnostic memories reading check

16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192

25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

● ● ●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

25)

26)

27)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

260

#

Thousands of miles

Thousands of kilometres

Years

21 Check the condition and tensioning of the ancillaries drive belt(s)

22 Check cleanliness of sliding side door lower guides

23 Check of the clogging of the exhaust filter 28)

24 Check and bleed fuel filter if necessary

25 Replacement of fuel filter

26 Check of the exhaust filter additive level by diagnostic tool, if provided 30)

27 Replacement of ancillaries drive belt

28 Replacement of ancillaries drive belt kit

29 Replacement of timing belt

30 Replacement of timing kit and coolant pump belt

31 Replacement of air filter

32 Change engine oil and replace oil filter 35)

33 Change the brake fluid

34 Replacement of passenger compartment filter 35)

16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192

25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

29)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

31)

32)

33)

32)

34)

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

36)

● ● ● ● ● ●

261

#

Thousands of miles

Thousands of kilometres

Years

35 Service indicator reinitialisation

16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192

25 50 75 100 125 150 175 200 225 250 275 300

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

24)

25)

26)

27)

28)

29)

30)

31)

32)

33)

34)

35)

36)

Only ever use the fluids shown in the Owner's Manual for topping up, and only after checking that the system is intact.

after 125,000 km / 4 years and then every service when pH<6.3

recommended any time, static checks are not enough to identify vehicle issue(s) with arduous conditions in Europe: after 150,000 km and then every 15,000 km; outside Europe: after 150,000 km and then every 10,000 km every 50,000 km / 4 years; outside Europe: every 20,000 km / 4 years with arduous conditions: after 90,000 km and then every 15,000 km; outside Europe: after 90,000 km and then every 10,000 km every 125,000 km / 6 years; outside Europe with dusty conditions: every 90,000 km / 5 years every 175,000 km / 10 years; with arduous conditions: every 165,000 km / 10 years; outside Europe: every 160,000 km / 10 years; nordic countries: every 5 years outside Europe with dusty conditions: every 80,000 km / 5 years every 50,000 km / 4 years; with arduous conditions: every 30,000 km / 4 years; outside Europe: every 10,000 km / 4 years with arduous conditions in Europe: every year / 15,000 km; outside Europe: every year / 10,000 km every 2 years

Service intervals with arduous conditions in Europe: every year / 15,000 km; with arduous conditions outside Europe: every year /

10,000 km

262

Electric vehicle

#

Thousands of miles

Thousands of kilometres

Years

1

Check tyre condition / wear (including the spare wheel) and, if necessary, adjust pressure; check the expiry date of the tyre repair kit

2 Check (low voltage, ancillaries, remote control, telematic box module, etc.) batteries condition

3

Check condition and operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, boot, passenger compartment, glovebox, warning lights, etc.)

4 Check horn

5 Check operation of the windscreen wiper / washer system and adjust nozzles, if necessary

6 Check windscreen / rear window wiper blade position and wear

7 Check cleanliness of bonnet and load compartment locks, cleanliness and lubrication of linkage

8 Check the conditon of exterior bodywork, the fixing of under-body protectors

9 Check condition of front brake calipers, discs, pads and operation of pad wear indicator

10 Check condition of rear brake calipers, discs, pads and operation of pad wear indicator

11 Check front and rear brake pad wear with removed wheels

12 Check dampers sealing

13 Check brake pedal

12.5 25 50 75 100 125 150

20 40 80 120 160 200 240

1 2 4 6 8 10 12

●

●

● ●

● ●

● ●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ● ●

●

● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ●

● ●

● ●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

263

#

Thousands of miles

Thousands of kilometres

Years

14 Check parking brake lever travel and adjust, if necessary

15

Check and, if necessary, top up engine compartment fluid levels (engine coolant, high voltage battery coolant, brakes, windscreen washer fluid, etc.) 37)

16 Check pH value of coolant

17 Replace coolant

18 Road test

19 Auto diagnostic memories reading check

20 Diagnostic check of vehicle systems functionality (vehicle control units, high voltage battery, etc.)

21 Check of the air conditioning system effectiveness

22 Check cleanliness of sliding side door lower guides

23 Change the brake fluid

24 Replacement of passenger compartment filter 42)

25 Check electric charging socket and cables condition

26 Service indicator reinitialisation

12.5 25 50 75 100 125 150

20 40 80 120 160 200 240

1 2 4 6 8 10 12

●

●

●

● ●

● ●

● ●

● ●

●

●

38)

39)

40)

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

41)

●

●

●

●

●

●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

● ● ● ● ● ●

37)

38)

Only ever use the fluids shown in the Owner's Manual for topping up, and only after checking that the system is intact.

after 120,000 km / 4 years and then every service

264

39)

40)

41)

42) when pH<6.3

recommended any time, static checks are not enough to identify vehicle issue(s) every 2 years outside Europe: every 25,000 km / 1 year

Service intervals outside Europe: every year / 25,000 km

265

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS,

LUBRICANTS AND PARTS

Recommended fluids and lubricants

Only use products that meet the recommended specifications.

9 WARNING

Operating materials are hazardous and could be poisonous. Handle with care. Pay attention to information given on the containers.

Engine oil

Engine oil is identified by its quality and its viscosity. Quality is more important than viscosity when selecting which engine oil to use. The engine oil quality ensures e.g. engine cleanliness, wear protection and engine oil aging control, whereas viscosity grade gives information on the engine oil's thickness over a temperature range.

Select the appropriate engine oil based on its quality and on the minimum ambient temperature 3 269.

Topping up engine oil

CAUTION

In case of any spilled engine oil, wipe it up and dispose of it properly.

Engine oils of different manufacturers and brands can be mixed as long as they comply with the required engine oil quality and viscosity.

Select the appropriate engine oil based on its quality and on the minimum ambient temperature 3 269.

Additional engine oil additives

The use of additional engine oil additives could cause damage and invalidate the warranty.

Engine oil viscosity grades

The SAE viscosity grade gives information of the thickness of the engine oil.

Multigrade engine oil is indicated by two figures, e.g. SAE 5W-30. The first figure, followed by a W, indicates the low temperature viscosity and the second figure the high temperature viscosity.

Select the appropriate viscosity grade depending on the minimum ambient temperature 3 269.

All of the recommended viscosity grades are suitable for high ambient temperatures.

Coolant and antifreeze

Use only antifreeze approved for the vehicle. Consult a workshop.

The system is factory filled with coolant designed for excellent corrosion protection and frost protection down to approx. -37 °C. This concentration should be maintained all year round. The use of additional coolant additives that intend to give additional corrosion protection or seal against minor leaks can cause function problems. Liability for consequences resulting from the use of additional coolant additives will be rejected.

Washer fluid

Use only washer fluid approved for the vehicle to prevent damage of wiper blades, paintwork, plastic and rubber parts. Consult a workshop.

Brake fluid

Over time, brake fluid absorbs moisture which will reduce braking effectiveness.

The brake fluid should therefore be replaced at the specified interval.

AdBlue

Only use AdBlue to reduce the nitrogen oxides in the exhaust emission.

266

TECHNICAL DATA

Vehicle identification ....................... 267

Vehicle identification number ........ 267

Identification plate ........................ 267

Engine identification ..................... 268

Vehicle data ................................... 269

Recommended fluids and lubricants .................................... 269

Engine data ................................. 271

Vehicle dimensions ...................... 272

Tyre pressures ............................. 273

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

Vehicle identification number

The identification plate is located on the front left or right door frame. The layout and position differ for some export countries.

The Vehicle Identification Number may be embossed on the instrument panel, visible through the windscreen.

Identification plate

Information on identification label:

1 : manufacturer

2 : type approval number

3 : vehicle identification number

4 : permissible gross vehicle weight rating in kg

5 : permissible gross train weight in kg

6 : maximum permissible front axle load in kg

7 : maximum permissible rear axle load in kg

8 : manufacturer address, vehiclespecific or country-specific data

The combined total of front and rear axle loads must not exceed the permissible gross vehicle weight.

267

Vehicle's kerb weight depends on the specification of the vehicle, e.g. optional equipment and accessories. Refer to the

EEC Certificate of Conformity provided with your vehicle or other national registration documents.

The technical data is determined in accordance with European Community standards. We reserve the right to make modifications. Specifications in the vehicle documents always have priority over those given in this manual.

Engine identification

The technical data tables show the engine identifier code.

Engine data 3 271.

To identify the respective engine, refer to the engine power in the EEC Certificate of Conformity provided with your vehicle or other national registration documents.

268

VEHICLE DATA

Recommended fluids and lubricants

Engine 1.2 EB2ADT - MT6

€6.4 (PETROL)

1.5 DV5RC - DV5RCf

MT6/AT8 €6.4

(DIESEL)

1.6 DV6DR -

MT5 €5

(DIESEL)

Fuel tank [l] 53

Engine cooling system [l]

Engine sump [l]

(after engine oil change)

Engine sump and filter [l]

-

3

3.5

Gearbox casing differential (AT8)

[l]

-

Gearbox casing differential (MT5)

[l]

-

Gearbox casing differential (MT6)

[l]

1.8

Hydraulic brake circuit [kg]

Top up the levels

-

-

60

3.5

4.9

4 2)

1.8

3)

5.3 3)

7

2)

Top up the levels

-

-

-

60

3.25

3.75

1.9

-

-

-

-

-

13

-

Electric vehicle

(ZAE)

Prescribed fuels and original lubricants

Unleaded petrol with at least 95 - EN228 specifications 1)

Diesel for motor engine (EN590 specification)

Contact a dealer or a qualified workshop

SAE 0W-20 - ACEA C5 B71 2010 (1.2 petrol -

1.5 diesel)

Selenia ECO2 CP - SAE 0W30 B71 2312 (1.6

diesel)

SAE 5W30 ACEA C3 - API SN Plus 4)

Olio AW2

Tutela Transmission Experya

Tutela Transmission Experya

Top up the levels Top up the levels

FMVSS Nr. 116, ISO 4925, SAE J 1703 and

SAE J 1704.

269

Engine

Windscreen and rear window washer fluid [l]

5

Electric drive unit

BEV [l]

-

High-voltage cooling system [l]

-

AdBlue tank capacity approx.

[l]

-

1.2 EB2ADT - MT6

€6.4 (PETROL)

1.5 DV5RC - DV5RCf

MT6/AT8 €6.4

(DIESEL)

1.6 DV6DR -

MT5 €5

(DIESEL)

5 5

-

-

17

-

-

17

-

-

Electric vehicle

(ZAE)

5

1.1 (RGM)

5)

Prescribed fuels and original lubricants

Mixture of water and liquid

PETRONAS DURANCE SC 35

Tutela Transmission Experya

Contact a dealer or a qualified workshop

AdBlue (DIN 70070 and ISO 22241-1 specifications)

1)

2)

3)

4)

5)

The maximum engine power and the car's performance can only be guaranteed with lead-free petrol with RON 95 or higher

Passenger vehicle

Cargo vehicle

For a specific country

Not available at time of printing.

270

Engine data

Sales designation

Engineering code

Piston displacement [cm 3 ]

Engine power [kW] at rpm

Torque [Nm] at rpm

Fuel type

Octane rating RON 6)7) recommended possible

1.2 Turbo

EB2ADT

1199

81

5500

205

1750

Petrol

95

98 -

-

1.5 Turbo

DV5RC

1499

96

3750

300

1750

Diesel

-

-

1.5 Turbo

DV5RCf

1499

75

3750

240

1750

Diesel

-

-

1.6 Turbo

DV6DR

1560

68

4000

230

1750

Diesel

-

-

Electric vehicle

–

–

100

–

260

–

–

6)

7)

A country specific label at the fuel filler flap can supersede the engine specific requirement.

In certain countries, the use of a particular fuel, e.g. a specific octane rating, may be required to ensure proper engine operation.

271

Vehicle dimensions

Size

Length [mm]

Width without exterior mirrors [mm]

Width with exterior mirrors [mm]

Passenger vehicle

Height without roof railing [mm]

Passenger vehicle

Height with roof railing [mm]

Electric passenger vehicle

Height with roof railing [mm]

Cargo vehicle

Height without roof railing [mm]

Cargo vehicle

Height with roof railing [mm]

Electric cargo vehicle

Height with roof railing [mm]

Wheelbase [mm]

Turning circle diameter [m]

272

L1

4403

1848

2107

1800 - 1807

1837 - 1844

1841

1796 - 1851

1797 - 1998

1796 - 1860

2785

10.8 / 11

L2

4753

1848

2107

1812 - 1818

1843 - 1849

1880

1815 - 1821

1845 - 1857

1812 - 1860

2975 / 2977

11.5 / 11.8

Tyre pressures

Cargo vehicle

Payload 650 kg

Tyres

195/65 R16

205/60 R16

215/65 R16

Vehicle with up to 3 people front rear

[kPa/bar] ([psi]) [kPa/bar] ([psi])

260/2,6 (38)

250/2,5 (36)

260/2,6 (38)

290/2,9 (42)

250/2,5 (36)

280/2,8 (41)

With full load front

[kPa/bar] ([psi])

260/2,6 (38)

250/2,5 (36)

260/2,6 (38) rear

[kPa/bar] ([psi])

320/3,2 (46)

320/3,2 (46)

300/3,0 (44)

273

Payload 1000 kg

Tyres

205/60 R16

215/65 R16

Vehicle with up to 3 people front

[kPa/bar] ([psi]) rear

[kPa/bar] ([psi])

250/2,5 (36)

260/2,6 (38)

290/2,9 (42)

280/2,8 (41)

Passenger vehicle

Tyres

195/65 R16

205/60 R16

205/60 R17

Vehicle with up to 3 people front

[kPa/bar] ([psi]) rear

[kPa/bar] ([psi])

260/2,6 (38)

240/2,4 (35)

250/2,5 (36)

290/2,9 (42)

240/2,4 (35)

250/2,5 (36)

With full load front

[kPa/bar] ([psi])

250/2,5 (36)

260/2,6 (38)

With full load front

[kPa/bar] ([psi])

260/2,6 (38)

260/2,6 (38)

260/2,6 (38) rear

[kPa/bar] ([psi])

290/2,9 (42)

300/3,0 (44) rear

[kPa/bar] ([psi])

320/3,2 (46)

320/3,2 (46)

320/3,2 (46)

274

CUSTOMER INFORMATION

Customer information ..................... 275

Declaration of conformity ............. 275

REACH ........................................ 276

Software update .......................... 276

Registered trademarks ................. 277

Vehicle data recording and privacy . 278

Event data recorders ................... 278

Radio Frequency Identification

(RFID) ......................................... 280

CUSTOMER INFORMATION

Declaration of conformity

Radio transmission systems

This vehicle has systems that transmit and / or receive radio waves subject to

Directive 2014/53/EU and

The Radio Equipment Regulations 2017 by the United Kingdom. The manufacturers of the systems listed below declare conformity with

Directive 2014/53/EU and

The Radio Equipment Regulations 2017.

The full text of the EU declaration of conformity for each system is available at the following internet address: https:// aftersales.fiat.com/eLum/.

Importer is FCA Italy S.p.A. – MOPAR –

Technical Service Operation, Via Adige 7,

10040 Rivalta di Torino (TO), Italy.

Infotainment system

Multimedia Navi Pro

Continental

LCIE Bureau Veritas-Site de Fontenay aux Roses, 33 avenue du général

Leclerc, 92260 Fontenay aux Roses,

France

Operation frequency

(MHz)

Maximum output

(dBm)

2400.0 - 2483.5

2400.0 - 2483.5

2.2

15

Infotainment system Radio

Clarion

244 rue du Pré à Varois, 54670 Custines,

France

Operation frequency: 2400 - 2480 MHz

Maximum output: 4 dBm

Infotainment system Multimedia

Robert Bosch Car Multimedia GmbH

Robert-Bosch-Straße 200, 31139

Hildesheim, Germany

Operation frequency

(MHz)

Maximum output

(dBm)

2402.0 - 2480.0

2412.0 - 2472.0

17

4.15

Antenna module

Yokowo Manufacturing of America, LLC

28221 Beck Road, Unit A-21

Wixom, MI 48394, USA

Operation frequency: N/A

Maximum output: N/A

ASK Automotive Pvt. Ltd.

275

Unit 2 Plot No. 30-31, Fathepur-Nawada,

Manesar, Gurugram, Haryana 122050,

India

Operation frequency: N/A

Maximum output: N/A

Radio remote control transmitter

Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG

Steeger Straße 17

42551 Velbert, Germany

Operation frequency: 433.92 MHz

Maximum output: 10 dBm

Radio remote control receiver

Delphi European, Middle Eastern &

African Regional Offices Customer

Technology

Center Avenue de Luxembourg, L-4940

Bascharage, G.D. of Luxembourg

Operation frequency: 119 - 128.6

Maximum output: 16 dBµA/m @ 10 m

Electronic key transmitter

Valeo

43 Rue Bayen, 75017 Paris, France

Operation frequency: 433.92 MHz

Maximum output: 10 dBm

Immobiliser

KOSTAL of America, Inc.

350 Stephenson Hwy, Troy MI 48083,

USA

276

Operation frequency: 125 kHz

Maximum output: 5 dBμA/m at 10 m

ICASA type approval numbers

List of all Independent Communications

Authority of South Africa (ICASA) type approval numbers:

TA-2016/121, TA-2016/3261,

TA-2017/2387,TA-2017/2745,

TA-2013/430, TA-2017/1106,

TA-2016/929, TA-2017/3180

REACH

Registration, Evaluation, Authorisation and Restriction of Chemicals (REACH) is a European Union regulation adopted to improve the protection of human health and the environment from the risks that can be posed by chemicals. Visit our website for further information and for access to the Article 33 communication.

Software update

The Infotainment system can download and install selected software updates over a wireless connection.

Note

The availability of these over-the-air vehicle software updates varies by vehicle and country. Find more information on our website.

Remote device management and remote software and firmware updates

As an integral part of the service related to the performance of subscribed connected service contracts, necessary device management and necessary software and firmware updates related to the software and firmware for the named connected service will be performed remotely, in particular by using over-theair technology.

For this, a secure radio network connection between the vehicle and the device management server will be established when ignition is switched on and a mobile network is available.

Depending on the equipment of the vehicle, connection configuration must be set to Connected vehicle to allow the establishment of the radio network connection.

Irrespective of a valid connected service subscription, remote product security or product safety related device management and software and firmware updates will be performed when the processing is necessary for the compliance with a legal obligation to which the manufacturer is subject (e.g.

applicable product liability law, emergency call regulation) or when the processing is necessary in order to protect the vital interests of the respective vehicle users and passengers.

The establishment of a secure radio network connection and the related remote updates are not affected by privacy settings and will be performed in principal after an initiation by the vehicle user following a respective notification.

The system is able to notify receipt of an update as soon as it is connected to an exterior Wi-Fi network or a mobile network. Large updates are downloaded only via the Wi-Fi network.

The availability of an update is notified on the Info Display at the end of a trip with an option of immediate installation or postponement of installation.

The installation time is variable and can take several minutes with a maximum of about 30 minutes. A notification will give an estimate of the duration and a description of the update.

Updates can be checked manually via the Info Display. Follow the on-screen prompts in the respective menu.

Info Display 3 84.

Note

Steps for downloading and installing updates may vary by vehicle.

For safety reasons and because it requires sustained attention by the driver, the installation must be carried out with the ignition on without starting the engine. The installation cannot be carried out in the following cases:

● engine running

● emergency call in progress

● insufficient vehicle battery charge

● charging the vehicle's high voltage battery

Note

During the installation process, the vehicle may not be operational.

If the update has failed, seek the assistance of a workshop.

Registered trademarks

Apple Inc.

Apple CarPlay™ is a trademark of Apple

Inc.

App Store ® and iTunes Store ® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

iPhone ® , iPod ® , iPod touch ® , iPod nano ® , iPad ® and Siri ® are registered trademarks of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

Bluetooth ® is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

DivX, LLC

DivX ® and DivX Certified ® are registered trademarks of DivX, LLC.

Google Inc.

Android™ and Google Play™ Store are trademarks of Google Inc.

Verband der Automobilindustrie e.V.

AdBlue ® is a registered trademark of the

VDA.

277

VEHICLE DATA RECORDING AND

PRIVACY

Event data recorders

Electronic control units are installed in your vehicle. Control units process data which is received by vehicle sensors and other components, or which they generate themselves or exchange amongst themselves. Some control units are necessary for the safe functioning of your vehicle, others assist you while you drive (driver assistance systems), while others provide comfort or infotainment functions.

The following contains general information about data processing in the vehicle. You will find additional information as to which specific data is uploaded, stored and passed on to third parties and for what purpose in your vehicle under the key word Data

Protection closely linked to the references for the affected functional characteristics in the relevant Owner's

Manual or in the general terms of sale.

These are also available online.

Operating data in the vehicle

Control units process data for operation of the vehicle.

This data includes, e.g.:

● vehicle status information (e.g.

speed, movement delay, lateral acceleration, wheel rotation rate,

"seat belts fastened" display)

● ambient conditions (e.g.

temperature, rain sensor, distance sensor)

As a rule such data is transient, not stored for longer than an operational cycle, and only processed on board the vehicle itself. Control units often include data storage (including the vehicle key).

This is used to allow information to be documented temporarily or permanently on vehicle condition, component stress, maintenance requirements and technical events and errors.

Depending on technical equipment level, the data stored is as follows:

● system component operating states

(e.g. fill level, tyre pressure, battery status)

● faults and defects in important system components (e.g. lights, brakes)

● system reactions in special driving situations (e.g. triggering of an airbag, actuation of the stability control systems)

● information on events damaging the vehicle

● for electric vehicles the amount of charge in the high-voltage battery, estimated range

In special cases (e.g. if the vehicle has detected a malfunction), it may be necessary to save data that would otherwise just be volatile.

When you use services (e.g. repairs, maintenance), the operating data saved can be read together with the vehicle identification number and used when necessary. Staff working for the service network (e.g. garages, manufacturers) or third parties (e.g. breakdown services) can read the data from the vehicle. The same applies to warranty work and quality assurance measures.

Data is generally read via the OBD (On-

Board Diagnostics) port prescribed by law in the vehicle. The operating data which is read out, documents the technical condition of the vehicle or individual components and assists with fault diagnosis, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement.

This data, in particular information on component stress, technical events, operator errors and other faults, is transmitted to the manufacturer where appropriate, together with the vehicle identification number. The manufacturer is also subject to product liability. The manufacturer potentially also uses

278

operating data from vehicles for product recalls. This data can also be used to check customer warranty and guarantee claims.

Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service company when carrying out servicing or repairs or at your request.

Comfort and infotainment functions

Comfort settings and custom settings can be stored in the vehicle and changed or reset at any time.

Depending on the equipment level in question, these include

● seat and steering wheel position settings

● chassis and air conditioning settings

● custom settings such as interior lighting

You can input your own data in the infotainment functions for your vehicle as part of the selected features.

Depending on the equipment level in question, these include

● multimedia data such as music, videos or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system

● address book data for use with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system

● input destinations

● data on the use of online services

This data for comfort and infotainment functions can be stored locally in the vehicle or be kept on a device that you have connected to the vehicle (e.g. a smartphone, USB stick or MP3 player).

Data that you have input yourself can be deleted at any time.

This data can only be transmitted out of the vehicle at your request, particularly when using online services in accordance with the settings selected by you.

Smartphone integration, e.g.

Android Auto or Apple CarPlay

If your vehicle is equipped accordingly, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile device to the vehicle so that you can control it via the controls integrated in the vehicle. The smartphone image and sound can be output via the multimedia system in this case. At the same time, specific information is transmitted to your smartphone.

Depending on the type of integration, this includes data such as position data, day / night mode and other general vehicle information. For more information, please see the operating instructions for the vehicle / infotainment system.

Integration allows selected smartphone apps to be used, such as navigation or music playback. No further integration is possible between smartphone and vehicle, in particular active access to vehicle data. The nature of further data processing is determined by the provider of the app used. Whether you can define settings, and if so which ones, is dependent on the app in question and your smartphone's operating system.

Online services

If your vehicle has a radio network connection, this allows data to be exchanged between your vehicle and other systems. The radio network connection is made possible by means of a transmitter device in your vehicle or a mobile device provided by you (e.g. a smartphone). Online functions can be used via this radio network connection.

These include online services and applications / apps provided to you by the manufacturer or other providers.

Proprietary services

In the case of the manufacturer's online services, the relevant functions are described by the manufacturer in an appropriate location (e.g. Owner's

Manual, the manufacturer's website) and the associated data protection information is provided. Personal data may be used to provide online services.

Data exchange for this purpose takes place via a protected connection, e.g.

using the manufacturer's IT systems provided for the purpose. Collection, processing and use of personal data for the purposes of preparation of services

279

take place solely on the basis of legal permission, e.g. in the case of a legally prescribed emergency communication system or a contractual agreement, or by virtue of consent.

You can activate or deactivate the services and functions (which are subject to charges to some extent) and, in some cases, the vehicle's entire radio network connection. This does not include statutory functions and services such as an emergency communication system.

Third party services

If you make use of online services from other providers (third parties), these services are subject to the liability and data protection and usage conditions of the provider in question. The manufacturer frequently has no influence over the content exchanged in this regard.

Therefore, please note the nature, scope and purpose of the collection and use of personal data within the scope of third party services provided by the service provider in question.

Radio Frequency Identification

(RFID)

RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as immobiliser or as radio remote controls for door locking / unlocking and starting. RFID technology in the vehicles does not use or record personal information or link with any other system containing personal information.

280

Index

A

Accessories and vehicle modifications .............................. 219

Active emergency braking......... 81, 189

Adaptive cruise control............. 81, 183

AdBlue...................................... 79, 164

Adjustable air vents ........................ 155

Advanced parking assist................. 194

Airbag and belt tensioners ............... 76

Airbag deactivation .................... 40, 76

Airbag label....................................... 36

Airbag system .................................. 36

Air conditioning regular operation ... 156

Air conditioning system .................. 147

Air intake ........................................ 156

Air vents.......................................... 155

Antilock brake system .................... 172

Antilock brake system (ABS) ............ 78

Anti-theft alarm system .................... 17

Anti-theft locking system .................. 17

Appearance care............................ 247

Armrest............................................. 30

Ashtrays .......................................... 70

Audio...................... 104, 121, 132, 140

Automatic anti-dazzle ....................... 20

Automatic crash notification.............. 90

Automatic light control ..................... 91

Automatic locking ............................ 12

Automatic transmission .................. 168

Autostop................................... 80, 161

B

Basic operation....... 103, 120, 131, 140

Battery discharge protection ............ 97

BlueInjection................................... 164

Bonnet ........................................... 222

Brake and clutch system .................. 77

Brake assist ................................... 175

Brake fluid .............................. 224, 266

Brakes ................................... 172, 224

Breakdown..................................... 246

Bulb replacement ........................... 228

C

Cargo management system ............. 52

Car wash mode.............................. 167

Catalytic converter ......................... 164

Central locking system ....................... 9

Centre console lighting .................... 96

Centre console storage .................... 49

Changing tyre and wheel size ......... 237

Charging......................................... 209

Charging cable............................... 207

Charging cable connected................ 80

Charging status.............................. 212

Charging system .............................. 76

Charging types............................... 207

Child locks ....................................... 12

Child restraint installation locations ... 44

Child restraints.................................. 41

Child restraint systems ..................... 41

Child surveillance mirror.................... 21

Cigarette lighter ............................... 69

Climate control systems.................. 146

Clock................................................ 67

Comfort consumption gauge............ 72

Control indicators.............................. 74

Control of the vehicle ..................... 157

Controls............................................ 65

Convex shape .................................. 19

Coolant and antifreeze.................... 266

Cruise control .......................... 80, 178

282

Cupholders ...................................... 46

Curtain airbag system ...................... 39

D

Danger, Warnings and Cautions ......... 4

Daytime running lights ...................... 93

Declaration of conformity................ 275

DEF................................................ 164

Deflation detection system................ 79

Descent control system ........... 78, 176

Diesel exhaust fluid......................... 164

Diesel fuel system bleeding ............ 227

Door open ....................................... 81

Doors.................................... 13, 14, 15

Drive modes................................... 172

Driver alert...................................... 205

Driver assistance systems............... 178

Driver Information Centre.................. 81

Driving characteristics and towing tips ............................................. 215

Driving hints.................................... 157

E

Eco mode....................................... 171

Electric adjustment .......................... 19

Electrical system............................. 234

Electric drive unit............................. 167

Electric parking brake....... 77, 172, 173

Electric parking brake fault................ 78

Electric power consumption............ 206

Electric range.................................. 206

Electronic climate control system ... 149

Electronic driving programmes ....... 170

Electronic key system......................... 8

Electronic Stability Control and

Traction Control system......... 78, 175

Emergency call................................. 90

End-of-life vehicle recovery ............ 221

Engine coolant ............................... 224

Engine coolant temperature ............. 79

Engine coolant temperature gauge . . 72

Engine data ................................... 271

Engine exhaust .............................. 163

Engine identification........................ 268

Engine oil ....................... 223, 266, 269

Engine oil level monitor..................... 73

Engine oil pressure ........................... 79

Entry lighting .................................... 96

Event data recorders....................... 278

Exhaust filter............................. 79, 163

Exit lighting ...................................... 96

Exterior care .................................. 247

Exterior light ..................................... 80

Exterior lighting................................. 91

Exterior mirrors................................. 19

External devices.............. 106, 123, 142

F

Fault .............................................. 171

Fiat Connect..................................... 90

First aid............................................. 57

First aid kit ....................................... 57

Fixed air vents ................................ 156

Floor mats...................................... 249

Folding front passenger seat............. 29

Folding mirrors ................................. 19

Folding seats.............................. 31, 32

Footwell storage............................... 49

Forward collision alert..................... 188

Front airbag system ......................... 38

Front fog lights ................... 80, 93, 229

Front passenger seat

Table position................................ 29

Front pedestrian protection............. 191

Front seats........................................ 27

Front storage.................................... 47

Front turn lights .............................. 230

Fuel................................................ 213

Fuel consumption - CO

2

-Emissions 215

Fuel for diesel engines .................... 213

Fuel for petrol engines .................... 213

Fuel gauge ....................................... 71

Fuses ............................................. 234

G

Gauges............................................. 70

Gear selection ................................ 168

Gear shifting..................................... 78

General information................. 206, 215

Glass panel ...................................... 25

Glovebox ......................................... 46

H

Halogen headlights ........................ 228

Hand brake..................................... 173

Hazard warning flashers ................... 93

Headlight flash ................................. 92

Headlight range adjustment ............. 92

Headlights........................................ 91

Headlights when driving abroad ....... 92

Head restraints ................................ 26

Head-up display............................... 86

Heated mirrors ................................. 20

Heated rear window ......................... 23

Heated windscreen........................... 24

Heating ............................................ 30

Heating and ventilation system ....... 146

High beam ................................. 80, 92

283

High beam assist........................ 80, 92

High voltage battery................ 221, 226

High voltage battery gauge............... 71

Hill start assist ................................ 175

Horn ................................................ 65

I

Identification plate .......................... 267

Ignition switch positions ................. 158

Immobiliser ...................................... 19

Indicators.......................................... 70

Inductive charging............................. 69

Info Display....................................... 84

Installing seats.................................. 32

Instrument panel illumination control 95

Instrument panel overview ................ 60

Interior care .................................... 249

Interior lighting.................................. 95

Interior lights ............................ 95, 233

Interior mirrors.................................. 20

Introduction ......... 4, 98, 117, 128, 136

J

Jump starting ................................. 244

K

Keys .................................................. 6

Keys, locks......................................... 6

L

Ladder flap....................................... 49

Lane keep assist....................... 78, 203

Lashing eyes .................................... 52

LED headlights.......................... 80, 229

Lighting features............................... 96

Light switch ..................................... 91

Load compartment .................... 15, 49

284

Load compartment cover ................. 50

Load compartment grille................... 54

Loading................................ 29, 31, 32

Loading information ......................... 58

Low beam........................................ 80

Low fuel ........................................... 80

M

Malfunction indicator light ................ 77

Manual anti-dazzle ........................... 20

Manual mode ................................. 170

Manual transmission ...................... 171

Misted light covers ........................... 94

N

Navigation....................................... 108

New vehicle running-in ................... 158

Number plate light ......................... 233

O

Object detection systems................ 191

Odometer ........................................ 70

Oil................................................... 269

Oil, engine....................................... 266

Outside temperature ........................ 67

Overhead console ............................ 48

Overload indicator....................... 58, 78

Overrun cut-off .............................. 160

P

Panoramic view system.................. 199

Parking .......................................... 162

Parking assist ................................ 191

Parking brake........................... 77, 173

Parking heater................................ 152

Parking lights ................................... 94

Particulate filter............................... 163

Passenger side camera................... 198

Pedestrian safety alert....................... 65

Pedestrian safety alert fault............... 81

Performing work ............................ 222

Peripheral lighting............................. 96

Phone..................... 113, 125, 134, 144

Power button.................................. 158

Power indicator gauge...................... 72

Power outlets ................................... 68

Power windows ............................... 22

Preheating ....................................... 79

Programmable charging.................. 211

Puncture......................................... 242

R

Radio Frequency Identification

(RFID).......................................... 280

Radio remote control ......................... 7

Rain sensor....................................... 80

REACH........................................... 276

Reading lights .................................. 95

Rear doors ....................................... 14

Rear fog light ..................... 80, 94, 231

Rear view camera .......................... 201

Rear view display........................ 21, 87

Rear windows .................................. 23

Rear window wiper and washer ....... 67

Recommended fluids and lubricants ............................ 266, 269

Reduced engine power..................... 80

Refueling......................................... 269

Refuelling ....................................... 214

Regenerative braking...................... 175

Registered trademarks.................... 277

Removing seats................................ 32

Reversing lights ................................ 94

Ride control systems...................... 175

Roller blinds ..................................... 24

Roof.................................................. 25

Roof load.......................................... 58

Roof rack ......................................... 57

S

Safety net ........................................ 53

Seat adjustment ............................... 28

Seat belt reminder ........................... 75

Seat belts ........................................ 34

Seat folding ...................................... 29

Seat heating..................................... 30

Seat position .................................... 27

Second row seats ............................ 31

Selective catalytic reduction............ 164

Selective ride control....................... 177

Selector.......................................... 168

Service ................................... 156, 251

Service display ................................. 73

Service information ........................ 251

Service schedules........................... 252

Service vehicle soon ........................ 77

Side airbag system .......................... 39

Side blind spot alert.................. 81, 197

Sidelights.......................................... 91

Side turn lights ............................... 232

Sliding door ..................................... 13

Sliding side door............................... 13

Software update............................. 276

SOS.................................................. 90

Spare wheel ................................... 242

Speech recognition. 112, 125, 134, 143

Speed limiter............................. 81, 181

Speedometer ................................... 70

Starting and operating.................... 158

Starting the engine ......................... 159

Steering.......................................... 158

Steering wheel adjustment ............... 65

Steering wheel controls .................... 65

Stop engine...................................... 77

Stop-start system........................... 161

Storage............................................. 46

Storage compartments..................... 46

Sunvisor lights ................................. 95

Sun visors ........................................ 24

Symbols ............................................ 4

System check................................... 77

T

Tachometer ..................................... 71

Tailgate............................................. 15

Tail lights ........................................ 231

Temperature preconditioning.......... 153

Third row seats ................................ 32

Three-point seat belt ........................ 35

Tools ............................................. 234

Tow bar.......................................... 215

Towing.................................... 215, 246

Towing another vehicle .................. 247

Towing equipment ......................... 216

Towing the vehicle ......................... 246

Trailer coupling............................... 215

Trailer stability assist ...................... 218

Trailer towing ................................. 216

Transmission display ...................... 168

Tread depth ................................... 237

Trip odometer .................................. 70

Turn lights .................................. 75, 93

Tyre chains .................................... 238

Tyre deflation detection system ...... 236

Tyre designations ........................... 235

Tyre pressure ................................. 235

Tyre pressures ............................... 273

Tyre repair kit ................................. 238

U

Ultrasonic parking assist................. 191

Underseat storage ........................... 48

Upholstery...................................... 249

USB port.......................................... 68

Using this manual .............................. 4

V

Vehicle battery ............................... 225

Vehicle checks................................ 222

Vehicle data.................................... 269

Vehicle data recording and privacy.. 278

Vehicle dimensions ........................ 272

Vehicle identification number .......... 267

Vehicle jack..................................... 234

Vehicle locator lighting...................... 96

Vehicle messages ............................ 88

Vehicle personalisation ..................... 89

Vehicle ready.................................... 80

Vehicle security................................. 17

Vehicle storage............................... 220

Vehicle tools................................... 234

Ventilation....................................... 152

W

Warning chimes ............................... 88

Warning lights................................... 70

Warning triangle ............................... 57

Washer fluid ................................... 224

Wheel changing ............................. 240

Wheel covers ................................. 237

Wheels and tyres ........................... 235

Windows........................................... 22

285

Windscreen....................................... 22

Windscreen wiper and washer ......... 66

Winter tyres ................................... 235

Wiper blade replacement ............... 227

FCA Italy S.p.A. – MOPAR – Technical Service Operation

Via Adige 7, 10040 Rivalta di Torino (TO) – Italy

Print n. 603.85.674 - 06/2022 - 1 Edition

The data contained in this publication is intended merely as a guide. FCA Italy S.p.A. reserves the right to modify the models and versions described in this booklet at any time for technical and commercial reasons.

If you have any further questions please consult your FIAT dealer.

ENGLISH

F I A T D O B L Ò

QUICK GUIDE